Home

Compaq 850 Laptop User Manual

image

Contents

1. NOTE Main key positions same as Windows Enhanced Figures C 5 or C 6 Figure C 7 7 Button Easy Access Keyboard Layout The 8 button Easy Access Keyboard uses the layout shown in Figure C 8 and uses the PS 2 type connection Btn1 Btn2 Btn3 Btn4 Btn5 Btn6 Btn7 Btn8 NOTE Main key positions same as Windows Enhanced Figures C 5 or C 6 Figure C 8 8 Button Easy Access Keyboard Layout Compaq Personal Computers C 7 Changed July 2000 Appendix Keyboard C 2 4 KEYS keys generate a make code when pressed and a break code when released with the exception of the Pause key pos 16 which produces a make code only All keys with the exception of the Pause and Easy Access keys are also typematic although the typematic action of the Shift Ctrl Alt Num Lock Scroll Lock C
2. 1 2134 5 617 8 9 10 11 12 13 114 15 16 X 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 103 72 73 74 gt 75 4 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 92 1110 93 94 95 111 112 96 97 98 99 100 1101 3 Figure C 6 National Windows 102W Key Keyboard Key Positions C 6 Compaq Personal Computers Changed July 2000 Technical Reference Guide 2 3 3 Easy Access Keyboards The Easy Access keyboard is a Windows Enhanced type keyboard that includes special buttons allowing quick internet navigation Depending on system either a 7 button or an 8 button layout may be supplied The 7 button Easy Access Keyboard uses the layout shown in Figure C 7 and is available with either a legacy PS 2 type connection or a Universal Serial Bus USB type connection Bini Btn2 Btn3 Btn4 Btn5 Btn6 Btn7
3. Table 4 14 System Port Function 0000 001Fh DMA Controller 1 0020 002Dh Interrupt Controller 1 002 002Fh Index Data Ports to LPC47B357 Controller primary 0030 003Dh Interrupt Controller 0040 0042h Timer 1 004 004Fh Index Data Ports to LPC47B357 I O Controller secondary 0050 0052h Timer Counter 0060 0067h Microcontroller NMI Controller alternating addresses 0070 0077h RTC Controller 0080 0091h DMA Controller 0092h Port A Fast A20 Reset Generator 0093 009Fh DMA Controller 00A0 00B1h Interrupt Controller 2 00B2h 00 3 APM Control Status Ports 00B4 00BDh Interrupt Controller 00C0 00DFh DMA Controller 2 OOFOh Coprocessor error register 0170 0177h IDE Controller 2 active only if standard I O space is enabled for primary drive 01F0 01F7h IDE Controller 1 active only if standard I O space is enabled for secondary drive 0278 027Fh Parallel Port LPT2 02E8 02EFh Serial Port 02F8 02FFh Serial Port COM2 0370 0377h Diskette Drive Controller Secondary Address 0376h IDE Controller 2 active only if standard I O space is enabled for primary drive 0378 037Fh Parallel Port LPT1 03B0 03DFh Graphics Controller 03BC 03BEh Parallel Port LPT3 03E8 03EFh Serial Port COM3 03F0 03F5h Diskette Drive Controller Primary Addresses O3F6h IDE Controller 1 active only if standard I O space is enabled fo
4. 21 Y1 26 Y13 1 21 25 1213 Figure 4 Feature Connector 26 Pin Header Table G 4 Video In Connector Pinout Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description 1 Z1 GND Ground 2 Y1 PO Pixel Data 0 3 22 GND Ground 4 Y2 P1 Pixel Data 1 5 73 GND Ground 6 Y3 P2 Pixel Data 2 7 74 1 8 Y4 Pixel Data 3 9 25 HADO External Sync 10 Y5 P4 Pixel Data 4 11 26 HCTL External Clock 12 Y6 P5 Pixel Data 5 13 Z7 SCL Serial Clock 14 Y7 P6 Pixel Data 6 15 28 GND Ground 16 Y8 P7 Pixel Data 7 17 29 GND Ground 18 Y9 DCLK Pixel Data Clock 19 Z10 GND Ground 20 Y10 NC Not Connected 21 211 GND Ground 22 Y11 NC Not Connected 23 212 VIRQ 24 Y12 25 213 SDA Serial Data 26 Y13 GND Ground G 6 Compaq Personal Computers Original November 2000 Technical Reference Guide Appendix H COMPAQ Matrox Millennium G450 AGP GRAPHICS CARD H 1 INTRODUCTION This appendix describes the Compaq Matrox Millennium G450 AGP Graphics Card used in standard configuration on some models and also available as an option This card layout shown in the following figure installs system s AGP slot The Compaq Matrox Millennium G450 graphics card SP 203626 001 provides high 2D performance and entry level 3D capabilities This card features a dual RAMDAC design for driving two analog displays Feature Connector
5. 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 30 52 53 54 55 56 57 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 e 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 1101 n Figure 3 U S English 101 Key Keyboard Key Positions 1 2 4 15 6 17 18119 10 11 12 13 141115 16 pu 1 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 log 72 73 74 ds 75 ho4l 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 P
6. 15 Bi 14 ID END CHE Bit 19 Slot 0 Slot 1 Slot 2 Data Data Slot Description 0 Bit 15 Frame valid bit Bits 14 3 Slots 1 12 valid bits Bits 2 0 Codec ID Command address Bit 19 R W Bits 18 12 reg Index Bits 11 0 reserved 2 Command data 3 Bits 19 4 PCM audio data left channel SD OUT playback SD IN record Bits 3 0 all zeros 4 Bits 19 4 PCM audio data right channel SD OUT playback SD IN record Bits 3 0 all zeros 5 Modem codec data not used in this system 6 11 Reserved 12 control Figure 5 10 AC 97 Link Bus Protocol Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 5 29 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 5 Input Output Interfaces 5 8 4 AUDIO CODEC The Cirrus Logic 54297 audio codec provides pulse code modulation PCM coding and decoding of audio information as well as the selection and or mixing of analog channels As shown in Figure 5 11 analog audio from a microphone tape or CD can be selected and if to be recorded saved onto a disk drive routed through an analog to digital converter ADC The resulting left and right PCM record data are muxed into a time division multiplexed TDM data stream SD IN signal that is routed to the audio controller Playback PB audio takes the reverse
7. Wired INTB INTA INTD INTC INTA INTA INTD id INTD INTB INTG INTD INTC INTB INTA INTC INTH 4 16 Deskpro EXS Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide NOTE The APIC mode is supported by Windows NT 2000 operating systems Systems using the Windows 95 or 98 operating system will need to run in 8259 mode The mode is selectable through the Setup utility access with F10 key during boot sequence Maskable Interrupt processing is controlled and monitored through standard AT type I O mapped registers These registers are listed in Table 4 8 Table 4 8 Maskable Interrupt Control Registers Port Register 020h Base Address Int Cntlr 1 021h Initialization Command Word 2 4 Int Cntlr 1 Base Address Int Cntlr 2 0 1 Initialization Command Word 2 4 Int Cntlr 2 The initialization and operation of the interrupt control registers follows standard AT type protocol 4 4 1 2 Non Maskable Interrupts Non maskable interrupts cannot be masked inhibited within the microprocessor itself but may be maskable by software usi
8. Parameter Measurement Interface Type IDE Transfer Rate Max Sustained 4800 KB s Burst 16 6 MB s Media Type Mode 1 2 Mixed Mode CD DA Photo CD Cdi CD XA Capacity Mode 1 12 cm 550 MB Mode 2 12 cm 640 MB 8cm 180 MB Center Hole Diameter 15 mm Disc Diameter 8 12 cm Disc Thickness 1 2 mm Track Pitch 1 6 um Laser Beam Divergence 53 5 1 5 Output Power 53 6 0 14 mW Type GaAs Wave Length 790 25 nm Average Access Time Random 100 ms Full Stroke 150 ms Audio Output Level 0 7 Vrms Cache Buffer 128 KB Table 2 10 Hard Drive Specifications Parameter 18 0 GB 20 0 GB 40 0 GB Drive Size 3 5 3 5 5 25 Interface Ultra 160 SCSI UATA 100 UATA 100 Drive Protection System Support Yes Yes Yes Transfer Rate max 160 MB s 100 MB s 100 MB s Typical Seek Time w settling 1 Single Track 1 7 ms 2 0 ms 1 0 ms Average 8 5 ms 9 5 ms 9 0 ms Full Stroke 15 ms 21 ms 20 ms Disk Format logical of Oylinders 16383 16383 16383 of Data Heads 16 16 16 3t of Sectors per Track 63 63 63 Rotation Speed 10 000 RPM 7200 RPM 7200 RPM Drive Fault Prediction SMART III SMART III SMART III NOTE Actual times may vary depending on specific drive installed All EMEA units feature Quiet Drives 1 Operates at 66 MB s in these systems 2 16 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference
9. Figure C 4 National 102 Key Keyboard Key Positions Compaq Personal Computers C 5 Changed July 2000 Appendix Keyboard C 2 3 2 Windows Enhanced Keyboards 1 2 4 15 6 17 8 9 10 11 112 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 201121 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 30 52 53 54 55 56 57 59 60 61 62 163 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 sis 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 92 110 93 94 95 11 112 96 97 98 99 100 104 d Figure 5 0 5 English Windows 101 W Key Keyboard Key Positions
10. 4 1 INTRODUCTION tr ettet EH EE e tiere Ee uri 4 1 4 2 PCE BUS OVERVIEW neon ee I eet bi e er PER Aue e EU ether eh 4 2 4 2 1 PCI BUS TRANSACTIONS rette hei rrt the 4 3 4 2 2 PCI BUS MASTER ARBITRATION 4 6 4 2 3 OPTION ROM MAPPING EIE EE NEIN 4 7 4 2 4 PCI INTERRUPTS cene erbe ole re e ERE 4 7 4 2 5 PCI POWER MANAGEMENT 5 essent eene eerte 4 7 4 2 6 565 8 pe pete ds 4 7 4 2 7 PCE CONFIGURATION pt te e Rer Ri esr imperi 4 8 4 2 8 PCI CONNECTOR eese o D RE SHEER ER OUR 4 9 4 3 AGP BUS OVERVIEW eene aee ee erede tee re brecha 4 10 4 3 1 BUS TRANSACTIONS 2e prt e Herr 4 10 4 3 2 5e pte itching iced 4 13 4 3 3 AGP CONNECTOR inn heii Sek IURI E eas 4 14 44 SYSTEM RESOURCES elie Ss Alpes Rel ee 4 15 4 4 1 INTERRUPTS hehehe DOR pee oa quePdee 4 15 4 4 2 DIRECT MEMORY ACGESS tod iai edocs eee tie enu poe ertet 4 19 4 5 SYSTEM CLOCK DISTRIBUTION eese nennen trennen 4 20 40 REAL TIME CLOCK AND CONFIGURATION MEMORY eee eee 4 20 4 6 1 CEEARING CMOS tenor orn DE ertet rel dead re epe eget 4 21 4 6 2 CMOS ARCHIVE AND RESTORE ete RU e Ped
11. 7 15 TABLE 7 6 APM BIOS FUNCTIONS E Eee oe rere e I RE ET 7 20 TABLE A 1 BEEP KEYBOARD LED 1 TABLE A 2 POWER ON SELF TEST POST 55 6 1 1 221 4002 0 000600000000000000000000000000000021 A 2 TABLE 3 SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES ccccceceesssseceeececeesssaececececsessaaececececeessaaeceeeeeeseseaeaeeeesesesennsaeeeeecs A 3 TABLE 4 MEMORY ERROR MESSAGES eese enne 4 TABLE 5 KEYBOARD ERROR MESSAGES 2 22 2 20 2 0 0000000000000000000000000000 4 TABLE 6 PRINTER ERROR MESSAGES csessssssececeesessseececccecsesssaeeecccecsesaaeeeeececeesesaeeeeececeensaaeseseeeceenea 5 TABLE A 7 VIDEO GRAPHICS ERROR MESSAGES 5 TABLE 8 DISKETTE DRIVE ERROR MESSAGES ccccceseesessscecececeenesececececeesenseceseecceesensaeceeecessensaaeeeeees A 6 TABLE A 9 SERIAL INTERFACE ERROR MESSAGES ccssssccccccecsessseececececeesssaececececsesssaecesececeessaeeeeeeeceenea A 6 TABLE A 10 SERIAL INTERFACE ERROR A T TABLE A 11 SYSTEM STATUS ERROR MESSAGEG cccssssssecececsessseececececsesssaececececsessaeceeececeensaeeeseeeeeene A 8 TABLE A 12 HARD DRIVE ERROR 55 85 2 2 1 11 001 0000000000000000000000000000000 et
12. Key Make Break Codes Hex Pos Legend Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Btn1 8 EO 1 0 9E 1 0 1C 95 FO 95 Btn2 8 EO 26 0 6 EO 4B EO F0 4B 9C FO 9C Btn3 8 25 E0 A5 42 0 42 9D FO 9D Btn4 8 EO 23 0 EO 33 0 33 9 0 9A 5 8 0 21 0 1 EO 2 0 F0 2B 99 0 99 Btn6 8 EO 12 0 92 0 24 0 24 96 0 96 Btn7 18 EO 32 0 B2 EO 0 F0 97 0 97 Btn1 9 EO 23 0 EO 33 E0 33 9A FO 9A Btn2 9 0 1 0 9F EO 1B EO 1B 80 0 80 Btn3 9 EO 1A EO 9A EO 54 0 54 99 0 99 Btn4 9 0 1 0 9 1 0 FO 1C 95 F0 95 Btn5 9 EO 13 0 93 EO 20 0 F0 2D OC FO Btn6 9 EO 14 0 94 2 0 FO 2C 9D FO 9D Btn7 9 EO 15 0 95 35 E0 FO 35 96 0 96 Btn8 9 0 1 0 9 5 0 F0 5B 97 0 97 NOTES All codes assume Shift Ctrl and Alt keys inactive unless otherwise noted NA Not applicable 1 Shift left key active 2 Ctrl key active 3 Alt key active 4 Left Shift key active For active right Shift key substitute AA 2A make break codes for B6 36 codes 5 Left Shift key active For active right Shift key substitute FO 12 12 make break codes for 59 59 codes 6 Num Lock key active 7 Windows keyboards only 8 7 Button Easy Access keyboard 9 8 Button Easy Access keyboard Changed July 2000 Compaq Personal Computers C 15 Appendix
13. 43 did not deassert 12 44 Parity error 13 50 Data pins bad 14 Drive hardware error 51 Data line 7 bad 15 Illegal drive command 52 MSG O D or I O lines bad 16 Media was changed 6nyy 53 BSY never went busy 17 Tape write protected 6nyy 54 BSY stayed busy 6nyy 18 No data detected 6nyy 60 Controller CONFIG 1 register fault 6nyy 21 Drive command aborted 6nyy 61 Controller CONFIG 2 register fault 6nyy 24 Media hard error 6nyy 65 Media not unloaded 6nyy 25 Reserved 6nyy 90 Fan failure 6nyy 30 Controller timed out 6nyy 91 Over temperature condition 6nyy 31 Unrecoverable error 6nyy 92 Side panel not installed 6nyy 32 Controller drive not connected 6nyy 99 Autoloader reported tape not loaded properly n 5 Hard drive yy 00 ID 6 CD ROM drive 03 Power check 7 Tape drive 05 Read 06 SA Media 08 Controller 23 Random read 28 Media load unload A 20 POINTING DEVICE INTERFACE ERROR MESSAGES 8601 xx Table A 19 Pointing Device Interface Error Messages Message Probable Cause Message Probable Cause 8601 01 Mouse ID fails 8601 07 Right block not selected 8601 02 Left mouse button is inoperative 8601 08 Timeout occurred 8601 03 Left mouse button is stuck closed 8601 09 Mouse loopback test failed 8601 04 Right mouse button is inoperative 8601 10 Pointing device is i
14. 7 1 e PER DRE 7 1 EEASUING ee toto REUNIR 7 2 7 2 1 ihn ot ee tee ere peo tec cb eire 7 2 7 2 2 CHANGEABLE SPLASH SCREEN 1 eerte nennen entren trennen enne 7 3 7 3 BOOT FUNCTIONS nth ete pesi regere UE P rr entes 7 4 7 3 1 BOOT nein e deer tre ete ee 7 4 7 3 2 NETWORK BOOT F12 SUPPORT eese 7 4 7 3 3 MEMORY DETECTION AND eene 7 5 7 3 4 BOOT ERROR CODBS reet hte eb OR REESE It itat 7 5 WA COSETUPIUTIDIDY ante E e Uti UE ee oit ee e e ks 7 6 7 5 CLIENT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS essent enne teen treten 7 12 7 5 1 SYSTEM ID AND ROM nennen a a nete trennen teen 7 14 45 2 EDID RETRIEVE ette Reip are o bet Ro 7 14 7 5 3 TEMPERATURE 5 noter t eere eere et re e Ee FEAR 7 14 7 5 4 DRIVE FAULT PREDICTION ettet remet 7 15 7 6 PNP SUPPORT 7 15 7 6 1 rnern Pe PDA RE e ete eri teen 7 16 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers v Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 71 POWER M
15. TE NOTE 1 May be populated with a V 90 56K modem in Deskpro EXS models May be populated with an Ultra 160 SCSI adapter in select Workstaton 300 models Figure 2 4 Chassis Layout Left Side View 2 6 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 2 3 3 BOARD LAYOUT Technical Reference Guide These systems use an ATX type system board Figure 2 5 shows the location of sockets connectors headers switches jumpers and LEDs 3 System Board 010821 Item Description Item Description 1 PCI expansion bus slot connectors 15 Power supply connector 2 AGP slot connector 16 Secondary IDE connector 3 Auxiliary audio input header 17 Power LED connector 1 4 Chassis fan header 18 Primary IDE connector 5 Line In HP Line Out Mic In connectors 19 Power supply on 5V Aux power LED 6 USB ports 4 20 Diskette drive connector 7 Top Serial port B Bottom serial port A 21 CMOS clear button 8 Top mouse connector Bot Kybd conn 22 Power button LED 9 Parallel port connector 23 Speaker conn
16. Rambus Signal Attributes Each Channel No of Input Signal Signal Name Lines Output 1 Level Impedance Function ROW 2 0 3 RSL 28 ohms Row address COL 4 0 5 RSL 28 ohms Column address DQA 8 0 9 yo RSL 28 ohms Data byte A w parity or ECC bit DQB 8 0 9 yo RSL 28 ohms Data byte B w parity or ECC bit CFM CFMN 2 RSL 2 28 ohms 400 MHz Clock from master for writes CTM CTMN 2 RSL 2 28 ohms 400 MHz Clock to master for reads Vref 1 1 4 V Reference voltage for RSL signals SIO 1 y o CMOS Serial I F for initialization amp pwr cntrl SCK 1 CMOS 56 ohms SIO clock 1 MHz for configuration 100 MHz for power management CMD 1 CMOS 56 ohms Serial I F config amp power control 25V Power for Rambus circuitry NOTES 1 Relative to the memory controller 2 Differential pair with Ep p swing of 400 to 600 mV Figure 3 4 Rambus Channel Signal Distribution and Key Attributes 3 6 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 3 3 2 RAMBUS CHANNEL TRANSACTIONS Transactions on the Rambus Channel involve packets of control row or column bits and packets of data bits Each packet consists of eight segments with even segments transferred on falling clock edges and odd segments transferred on rising clock edges A typical operation consists of the memory controller sen
17. Button Description Default Function 1 Check email Email 2 Go to community Emoney 3 Extra web site Compaq web site 4 Go to favorite web site AltaVista web site 5 Internet search Search 6 Instant answer Travel expenses 7 E commerce Shopping 8 Button Easy Access Keyboard Button Description Default Function 1 Go to favorite web site Customer web site of choice 2 Go to AltaVista AltaVista web site 3 Search AltaVista search engine 4 Check Email Launches user Email 5 Business Community Industry specification info 6 Market Monitor Launches Bloomberg market monitor 7 Meeting Center Links to user s project center 8 News PC Lock News retrieval service buttons may be re programmed by the user through the Easy Access utility C 10 Compaq Personal Computers Changed July 2000 2 5 5 2 6 Technical Reference Guide Table C 1 lists the commands that the keyboard can send to the system specifically to the 8042 type logic Table C 1 Keyboard to System Commands Command Value Description Key Detection Error Over run 00h 1 Indicates to the system that a switch closure couldn t be FFh 2 identified BAT Completion AAh Indicates to the system that the BAT has been successful BAT Failure FCh Indicates failure of the BAT by the keyboard Echo EEh Indicates that the Echo command was received by the ke
18. INTRODUCTION di tei Re e rece etae iene etur Er EUER E d 1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION need tert rettet e e eere eren 2 5 3 F 3 1 TRANSFER RATES ee Eten peteret E F 3 F 32 TRANSMISSION rennen nen rennen net F 3 4 POWER MANAGEMENT need e Pepe Pn pene F 4 F 4 1 APM ENVIRONMENT insistentes eter pei e eli ertet ette F 4 F 4 2 ft needle ictu ete erectae re pede desee eee lee te pets F 4 BROGRAMMINOG ite eet qe dined e oie eg Cep EUR F 4 F6 CONNECTOR nene eee Une uA UR F 4 APPENDIX COMPAQ ELSA GLORIA II GRAPHICS ebrii itte toe erp ee b eri eee t edits G 1 02 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION eee G 2 G 3 BISPEAY MODES ideo mE Bene DEB G 3 G 4 SOFTWARE SUPPORT G 4 65 POWER MANAGEMENT AND CONSUMPTION nnne nennen G 4 CONNECTORS ar ai eee ees ate Sate e erre Reese G 5 G 6 1 MONITOR CONNECTOR eese nennen rennen emet enne trennen nennen nennen G 5 0 62 VIDEO FEATURE trennen te e tee G 6 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 3
19. F 1 RE F 2 COMPAQ LUCENT V 90 56K PCI MODEM BLOCK DIAGRAM cene enne F 2 RE F 3 RJ 11 CONNECTOR FEMALE AS VIEWED FROM F 4 RE G 1 COMPAQ ELSA GLORIA AGP GRAPHICS CARD P N 174565 001 LAYOUT G 1 RE G 2 ELSA GLORIA II GRAPHICS CARD BLOCK 11 0006 0000 G 2 RE G 3 VGA MONITOR CONNECTOR FEMALE DB 15 AS VIEWED FROM G 5 RE G 4 FEATURE CONNECTOR 26 PIN isses eene enne rennen nre G 6 RE H 1 COMPAQ MATROX MILLENNIUM G450 GRAPHICS CARD LAYOUT 202901 001 H 1 RE H 2 MATROX MILLENNIUM G450 GRAPHICS CARD BLOCK DIAGRAM H 2 RE H 3 VGA MONITOR CONNECTOR ONE OF TWO FEMALE DB 15 AS VIEWED FROM REAR H 5 RE H 4 FEATURE CONNECTOR 26 PIN 2 4 12 4042 411400000000000000000000000000000000000 H 6 I 1 INTEL 100 PRO 100 S MANAGEMENT ADAPTER CARD LAYOUT nene 1 1 1 2 INTEL PRP 100 MANAGEMENT ADAPTER BLOCK 1 2 REI 3 ETHERNET CONNECTOR RJ 45 VIEWED FROM CARD I 7 RE J 1 COMPAQ NVIDIA QUADRO2 MXR AGP GRAPHICS CARD PCA 221411 001 LAYOUT J 1 RE 2 NVIDIA QUADRO2 MXR GRAPHICS CARD BLOCK DIAGRAM eene J 2 RE J 3 VGA MONITOR CONNECTOR FEMALE DB 15 AS
20. Table 5 18 USB Control Registers Addr Register Default Value 00 01h Command 0000h 02 03h Status 0000h 04 05h Interupt Enable 0000h 06 07 Frame Number 0000h 08 0B Frame List Base Address 0000h OCh Start of Frame Modify 40h 10 11h Port 1 Status Control 0080h 12 13h Port 2 Status Control 0080h 18h Test Data 00h 5 24 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 5 7 3 5 7 4 Technical Reference Guide USB CONNECTOR Four series A connectors are accessible on the rear panel of the chassis Figure 5 8 Universal Serial Bus Connector Table 5 19 USB Connector Pinout Pin X Signal Description Pin Signal Description 1 Vcc 45 VDC 3 USB Data plus 2 USB Data minus 4 GND Ground USB CABLE DATA The recommended cable length between the host and the USB device should be no longer than sixteen feet for full channel 12 MB s operation depending on cable specification see following table Table 5 20 USB Cable Length Data Conductor Size Resistance Maximum Length 20 AWG 0 036 Q 16 4 ft 5 00 m 22 AWG 0 057 Q 9 94 ft 3 03 m 24 AWG 0 091 Q 6 82 ft 2 08 m 26 AWG 0 145 Q 4 30 ft 1 31 m 28 AWG 0 232 Q 2 66 ft 0 81 m NOTE For sub channel 1 5 MB s operation and or when using sub standard cable shorter lengths may be allowable and or necessary
21. ED Der t RH pe notet Ets 5 26 5 8 2 AUDIO CONTROLLER rcc here te e ere tee eid 5 28 5 8 3 ACOT LINK BUS dete etit t RUE RE oes om bebe poete gn 5 29 5 8 4 AUDIO CODEC ret ec pe eue tiet erus 5 30 5 8 5 AUDIO PROGRAMMING 5 erit hie iere En reor Pe HE bate rper creep hens 5 31 5 8 6 AUDIO SPECIFICATION S nb Ruhm Urt e biet eiie d e ER Rees 5 32 59 NETWORK SUPPORT teet eo tete ae Ie ind ut eite e sche dern cte 5 33 5 9 1 2 2 SUPPORT istae n eene dieere 5 33 5 9 2 ALERT ON LAN SUPPORT neone dette e rt eret 5 33 5 9 3 REMOTE SYSTEM ALERT 5 5 35 CHAPTER 6 POWER SUPPLY AND DISTRIBUTION 6 1 INTRODUCTION nier ess ks E A See Sl atin bens 6 1 62 POWER SUPPLY 5 6 1 6 2 1 POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY eiie dee te ere ette 6 2 6 2 2 POWER CONTROBE it Ind ta REPRE ERES coe ru RE i e Ee eC 6 3 6 3 POWER DISTRIBUTION 5e he e Utere EI TEE 6 5 6 3 1 3 3 5 12 VDE DISTRIBUTION n o nre yes pho e rH eripere 6 5 6 3 2 LOW 0 6 6 64 SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION ws occ 02200 dete seb 6 7 CHAPTER 7 BIOS 2 12
22. SD RGB Monitor RAM RAM Connectors SDRAM MGA Dual RAMDAC Controller SDRAM Figure 1 Compaq Matrox Millennium G450 AGP Graphics Card Layout 202901 001 This appendix covers the following subjects Functional description D 2 page D 2 Display modes D 3 page D 3 Software support information D 4 page D 4 Monitor power management D 5 page D 4 Connectors D 6 page D 5 Compaq Personal Computers H 1 Original November 2000 Appendix Compaq Matrox Millennium G450 Graphics H 2 Card Edge Connector BIOS ROM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION The Matrox Millennium G450 SD Graphics Card provides high performance 2D and 3D display imaging The card s AGP design provides an economical approach to 3D processing by off loading 3D effects such as texturing z buffering and alpha blending to the system memory while 32 megabytes of on board SDRAM stores the main display image 128 bit 166 MHz Data Bus MGA Graphics Controller 32 MB SDRAM Frame Buffer Memory Video VF Scalar AGP Bus 350 MHz RAMDAC Analog Monitor Connector 1 3D Array Engine H VSync H VSync CRT Controller EIN Analog gt Monitor 200 2 Connector 2 RAMDAC Figure H 2 Matrox Millennium G450 Graphics Card Block diagram The Matrox Millennium G450 Graphics Card includes the
23. operation refer to the data manual for the Intel 82801 I O Controller Hub The 82801 ICH2 component includes the equivalent of two 8237 DMA controllers cascaded together to provide eight DMA channels each excepting channel 4 configurable to a specific device Table 4 9 lists the default configuration of the DMA channels Table 4 9 DMA Channel Assignments And Register Ports DMA Channel Function Port Controller 1 byte transfers Control registers 000h 00Eh 0 Unused Page register 087h Audio subsystem Page register 083h Diskette drive Page register 081h Parallel port ECP or EPP mode Page register 082h Control registers OCOh ODEh 1 2 3 Controller 2 word transfers 4 5 6 Cascade for controller 1 n a Unused Page register 08Bh Unused Page register 089h 7 Unused Page register 08Ah Refresh O8Fh see note NOTE The DMA memory page register for the refresh channel must be programmed with 00h for proper operation All channels in DMA controller 1 operate at a higher priority than those in controller 2 Note that channel 4 is not available for use other than its cascading function for controller 1 The DMA controller 2 can transfer words only on an even address boundary The DMA controller and page register define a 24 bit address that allows data transfers within the address space of the CPU In addition to device configuration each channel can be configured through PCI Configuration Registers for one of tw
24. SGRAM Analog NVIDIA Monitor TNT2 Connector Controller Figure D 1 Compaq NVIDIA TNT2 Pro AGP Graphics Card P N 198998 B21 Layout This appendix covers the following subjects Functional description D 2 page D 2 Display modes D 3 page D 3 Software support information D 4 page D 4 Monitor power management D 5 page D 4 Connectors D 6 page D 5 Compaq Personal Computers D 1 Original July 2000 Appendix Compaq NVIDIA TNT2 Pro Graphics D 2 Card Edge Connector FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION The NVIDIA TNT2 Pro SD Graphics Card provides high performance 2D and 3D display imaging The card s AGP design provides an economical approach to 3D processing by off loading 3D effects such as texturing z buffering and alpha blending to the system memory while 16 megabytes of on board SGRAM stores the main display image 128 bit NVIDIA TNT2 Graphics Controller 166 MHz Data Bus Memory 16 MB AGP Video SGRAM Bus Scalar CRT Controller Analog Monitor DA ated 300 MHz Connector RAM DAC Figure D 2 NVIDIA TNT2 Pro Graphics Card Block diagram The NVIDIA TNT2 Pro Graphics Card includes the following features 16 MB SGRAM frame buffer using 128 bit 166 MHz access AGP 4X transfers with sideband addressing 2D drawing engine 3D rendering engine 300 MHz R
25. 40h 3Ch 38h 34h 30h 2Ch 28h 24h 20h 1Ch 18h 10h OCh 08h 04h 00h Chapter 4 System Support 4 2 2 PCI BUS MASTER ARBITRATION 4 6 The PCI bus supports a bus master target arbitration scheme A bus master is a device that has been granted control of the bus for the purpose of initiating a transaction A target is a device that is the recipient of a transaction The Request REQ Grant GNT and FRAME signals are used by PCI bus masters for gaining access to the PCI bus When a PCI device needs access to the PCI bus and does not already own it the PCI device asserts it s REQn signal to the PCI bus arbiter a function of the system controller component If the bus is available the arbiter asserts the GNTn signal to the requesting device which then asserts FRAME and conducts the address phase of the transaction with a target If the PCI device already owns the bus a request is not needed and the device can simply assert FRAME and conduct the transaction Table 4 2 shows the grant and request signals assignments for the devices on the PCI bus Table 4 2 PCI Bus Mastering Devices REQ GNT Line Device REQO GNTO PCI Connector Slot 1 REQ1 GNT1 Connector Slot 2 REQ2 GNT2 PCI Connector Slot 3 REQ3 GNT3 Connector Slot 4 REQ4 GNT4 Connector Slot 5 5 51373 Audio Controller GREQ GGNT AGP Slot PCI bus arbitration is based on a round robin scheme that complies with the fairne
26. AGP Connector Power On HD Activity System Board Conn P20 PCA 010821 Sec IDE Conn P21 NOTES Audio Conn P7 Dsk Conn P10 Mouse Kybd Conn J68 G Pwr Btn Pwr HD LED S ENS o qa pU 12 8 Vcpu 3 5 12 VDC 3 5AUX Fan Cntrl PS On IDE Data Cntl IDE Hard Drive Power Supply Assembly 5 12 VDC CD ROM IDE I F L R Audio Dskt Data Diskette Drive pex Mouse Bid 5 12 VDC c 5 12 VDC Hi Keyboard 1 See Figure 6 7 for header pinout Figure 6 4 Signal Distribution Diagram Typical Configuration Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 6 7 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 6 Power and Signal Distribution Power Button LED Header P5 1 HD LED anode HD LED cathode PWR LED anode PWR LED cathode PWR button PWR button Reserved 9 GND 10 SCSI HD LED 1 11 SCSI HD LED 1 JO OOOOOOOOO CD ROM Audio Header P7 1 Audio Left Channel 2 Ground 3 Ground 4 Audio right channel OOOO AOL SOS Header P12 BIOS Fail 1 2 Not Connected Not GOnnecteg d 4 Not Connected Not Connected 5 6
27. Horizontal Sync 6 Red Analog Ground VSync Vertical Sync 7 G GND Green Analog Ground SCL DDC2 B Clock 8 B GND Blue Analog Ground m NOTES 1 Fuse automatically resets when excessive load is removed Compaq Personal Computers J 5 Original December 2000 Appendix 7 Compaq NVIDIA Quadro2 MXR Graphics This page is intentionally blank J 6 Compaq Personal Computers Original December 2000 Technical Reference Guide Appendix K COMPAQ PCI 10 100 ETHERNET ADAPTER K 1 INTRODUCTION This appendix describes Compaq PCI 10 100 Ethernet Adapter SP 118042 001 that may included in the standard configuration on some models and available as options for all models The adapter card installs in a PCI slot to provide a system with network interface capability Speed LED SMBus AOL SOS Connector WOL RJ 45 Connector Network Connector 3C905C Link Activity ue NIC LED NOTE Actual layout may vary Figure K 1 Compaq PCI 10 100 Ethernet Adapter Card Layout 402355 001 This appendix covers the following subjects Functional description K 2 page 2 Power management K 3 page K 4 Adapter programming K 4 page K 5 Network connector K 5 page K 6 Adapter specifications K 6 page K 6 Compaq Personal Computers K 1 Original December 2000 Appendix K Compaq PCI 10 100 Ethernet Adapter K 2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTI
28. LIST OF TABLES TABLE 1 1 ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS 2 4 442 0120002 00000 000000000500000000000000 1 3 TABLE 2 1 STANDARD FEATURE DIFFERENCE 2 2 TABLE 2 2 CHIPSET 5 2 11 TABLE 2 3 SUPPORT COMPONENT 8 2200 1 000 000201010000 00000000050 2 11 TABLE 2 4 STANDARD AGP GRAPHICS CARD 8 2 2 4 11 000000000 150000000000 2 13 TABLE 2 5 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS 2 2 1 3 4 1 0000000001000000000000000000000000 2 14 TABLE 2 6 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2 14 2 7 esercito E re sea et ek ee ipee ex RE e ORE ERU eS 2 15 TABLE 2 8 DISKETTE DRIVE SPECIFICATIONS 2 20 7 ennt 2 15 TABLE 2 9 48x CD ROM DRIVE SPECIFICATIONS cessere enne enhn ennt nnne sr 2 16 TABLE 2 10 HARD DRIVE SPECIFICATIONS ccccsesssccccceceessssececececseseaececececeeseseaeseesesesesnsaeeeeeeseserteaeees 2 16 TABLE3 1 HOST PCI BRIDGE CONFIGURATION REGISTERS GMCH FUNCTION 0 3 10 TABLE 4 1 PCI DEVICE CONFIGURATION ACCESS 2 4 4 TABLE 4 2 PCI BUS MASTERING DEVICES ccccessssccecececsessececececeesenseaececececsessaaeceeececeeeaaecesececeesenseaeees 4 6 TABLE 4 3 LPC BRIDGE CONFIGURATION REGISTERS ICH
29. TCO packet VLAN Type When an enabled event is received the controller asserts the PME signal that is used to initiate the wakeup sequence Compaq Personal Computers I 5 Original December 2000 Appendix Compag Intel Network Interface Controller Adapters 14 ADAPTER PROGRAMMING Programming the adapter consists of configuration which occurs during POST and control which occurs at runtime 41 CONFIGURATION The adapter s 82559 or 82550 NIC controller is a PCI device and configured though PCI configuration space registers using PCI protocol described in chapter 4 of this guide The PCI configuration registers are listed in the following table Table 1 1 PCI Configuration Registers PCI Value PCI Value Conf on Conf on Addr Register Reset Addr Register Reset 00 01h Vender ID 8086h 10 13h Cntrl Reg Base Addr Mem 0000h 02 03h Device ID 1229h 14 17h Cntrl Reg Base Addr I O 00h 04 05h Command 0000h 18 1Bh Flash Mem Base Addr 00h 06 07h PCI Status 0280h 2C 2Dh Subsystem Vender ID 08h Revision ID xxh 2E 2Fh Subsystem 10 09 0Bh Class Code 01h 30 33h Expansion ROM Base OCh Cache Line Size Oth 34h Cap Ptr ODh Latency Timer 04h 3C 3D Interrupt Line Pin Header 00h 3E 3Fh Min Gnt Max Lat OFh BIST 00h DC E3h Power Mgmt Functions NOTE Assume unmarked gaps are reserved and or not used 1 4 2 CONTROL The adapter s 82559 or 82550 control
30. 74 4A J 106 6A j 11 0B 43 2B 75 4B K 107 6B k 12 0C 44 2C 76 4C L 108 6C 13 00 45 20 77 40 109 60 14 0 X 46 2E 78 4 110 6E n 15 iX 47 2F 79 4F 111 6 16 10 gt 48 30 0 80 50 112 70 17 11 4 49 31 1 81 51 113 71 4 18 12 1 50 32 2 82 52 R 114 72 r 19 13 51 33 3 83 53 S 115 73 S 20 14 4 52 34 4 84 54 T 116 74 t 21 15 53 35 5 85 55 U 117 75 22 16 54 36 6 86 56 V 118 76 V 23 17 55 37 7 87 57 119 77 w 24 18 T 56 38 8 88 58 X 120 78 x 25 19 57 39 9 89 59 Y 121 79 y 26 1A gt 58 3A 90 2 122 7 2 27 1 lt 59 3B 91 5B 123 7B 28 1 LL 60 3C lt 92 5C 124 7 29 10 o 61 3D 93 5D 125 70 30 1 62 gt 94 A 126 7E 31 1 v 63 3F 95 5F _ 127 Continued Table B 1 ASCII Code Set Continued Compaq Personal Computers B 1 Changed July 2000 Appendix ASCII Character Set Dec Hex Symbol Dec Hex Symbol Dec Hex Symbol Dec Hex Symbol 128 80 160 A0 192 224 EO 129 81 161 A1 193 1 225 E1 130 82 162 2 194 C2 226 E2 r 131 83 163 a 195 227 132 84 164 4 f 196 C4 228 4 z 133 85 165 5 197 C5 229 5 134 86 166 6 198 C6 230 E6 u 135 87 167 A7 199 C7 231 E7 136 88 168 8 i 200 C8 232 E8 137 89 169 9 201 c9 F 233 E9 e 138 8A 170 202 234 EA Q 139 8B 171 203 T 235
31. Parallel Data FIFO LPT1 2 3 Base 400 ECP Data FIFO LPT1 2 3 Base 400h Test FIFO LPT1 2 3 Base 400h Configuration Register A LPT1 2 3 Base 401h Configuration Register B LPT1 2 3 Base 402h Extended Control Register LPT1 2 3 Base Address LPT1 378h LPT2 278h LPT3 3BCh 5 14 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 5 5 5 PARALLEL INTERFACE CONNECTOR Figure 5 4 and Table 5 12 show the connector and pinout of the parallel interface connector Note that some signals are redefined depending on the port s operational mode Figure 5 4 Parallel Interface Connector Female DB 25 as viewed from rear of chassis Table 5 12 DB 25 Parallel Connector Pinout Pin Signal Function Pin Signal Function 1 STB Strobe Write 1 14 LF Line Feed 2 2 DO Data 0 15 ERR Error 3 3 D1 Data 1 16 INIT Initialize Paper 4 4 D2 Data 2 17 SLCTIN Select In Address Strobe 1 5 D3 Data 3 18 GND Ground 6 04 Data 4 19 GND Ground 7 D5 Data 5 20 GND Ground 8 D6 Data 6 21 GND Ground 9 07 Data 7 22 GND Ground 10 ACK Acknowledge Interrupt 1 23 GND Ground 11 BSY Busy Wait 1 24 GND Ground 12 PE Paper End User defined 1 25 GND Ground 13 SLCT Select User defined 1 NOTES 1 Standard and ECP mode function EPP mode fun
32. clock but provides Quad pumped data transfers While the Pentium III could transfer 8 bytes of data on a 133 MHz clock cycle the Pentium 4 can transfer 32 bytes of data a 100 clock cycle for a throughput rate of 3 2 GB s balancing the performance of the dual Rambus memory subsystem Address information is transferred at a 200 rate Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 3 3 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 3 Processor Memory Subsystem The Pentium 4 processor is software compatible with Celeron Pentium II Pentium MMX Pentium and x86 processors but will require the latest versions of operating system software to take advantage of the Streaming SIMD extensions SSE2 3 2 2 PROCESSOR UPGRADING units use the PGA423 ZIF mounting socket and ship with the Pentium 4 processor in a Flip Chip FC PGA423 package installed with a passive heat sink The FC PGA423 package consists of the processor die mounted upside down on a PC board This arrangement allows the heat sink to come in direct contact with the processor die The heat sink and attachment clip are specially designed provide maximum heat transfer from the processor component Improper attachment of the heat sink will likely result in a thermal condition Although the system is designed to detect thermal conditions and automatically shut down such a condition could still result in damage to the
33. 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Password Enable not connected not used 4 36 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 4 8 3 CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS The I O controller used in desktop and minitower systems contains various functions such as the keyboard mouse interfaces diskette interface serial interfaces and parallel interface While the control of these interfaces uses standard AT type I O addressing as described in chapter 5 the configuration of these functions occurs through indexed ports using PnP protocol In these systems hardware strapping selects I O addresses 02Eh 02Fh at reset as the Index Data ports for accessing the logical devices within the I O contoller Table 4 16 lists the PnP control registers for the LPCA7B357 Table 4 16 Controller Control Registers Index Function Reset Value 02h Configuration Control 00h 03h Reserved 07h Logical Device Interface Select 00h 00h Diskette Drive I F 01h Rsvd 02h Rsvd 03h Parallel I F 04h Serial I F UART 1 05h Serial I F UART 2 06h Rsvd 07h Keyboard I F 08h Rsvd 09h Rsvd OAh Runtime Reg GPIO Config OBh Rsvd 20h Super I O ID Register SID 56H 21h Revision B 22h Logical Device Power Control
34. 7 PRINTER ERROR MESSAGES 4 Table A 6 Printer Error Messages Technical Reference Guide Message Probable Cause Message Probable Cause 401 01 Printer failed or not connected 402 11 Interrupt test data cntrl reg failed 402 01 Printer data register failed 402 12 Interrupt test and loopback test failed 402 02 Printer control register failed 402 13 Int test LpBk test and data register failed 402 03 Data and control registers failed 402 14 Int test LpBk test and cntrl register failed 402 04 Loopback test failed 402 15 Int test LpBk test and data cntrl reg failed 402 05 Loopback test and data reg failed 402 16 Unexpected interrupt received 402 06 Loopback test and cntrl reg failed 402 01 Printer pattern test failed 402 07 Loopback tst data cntrl reg failed 403 Printer pattern test failed 402 08 Interrupt test failed 404 xx Parallel port address conflict 402 09 Interrupt test and data reg failed 498 00 Printer failed or not connected 402 10 Interrupt test and control reg failed A 8 VIDEO GRAPHICS ERROR MESSAGES 5 Table A 7 Video Graphics Error Messages Message Probable Cause Message Probable Cause 501 01 Video controller test failed 508 01 320x200 mode color set 0 test failed 502 01 Video memory test failed 509 01 320x200 mode color set 1 test failed 503 01 Video attribute test failed 510 01 640x200 mode tes
35. 7 7 1 4 System OFF When the system is turned Off but still plugged into a live AC outlet the NIC ICH2 and I O components continue to receive auxiliary power in order to power up as the result of a Magic Packet being received over a network Some NICs are able to wake up a system from Standby in PM most require their Windows NT driver to reset them after one wake up 7 7 1 5 Waking Up in Independent PM Activity of either of the following devices will cause the system to wake up with the screen restored Keyboard Mouse if driver installed The hard drive will not spin up until itis accessed Any hard drive access will cause it to wake up and resume spinning Since the BIOS returns to the currently running software it is possible for the drive to spin up while the system is in Standby with the screen blanked 7 18 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 7 7 2 7 7 Technical Reference Guide ACPI SUPPORT This system meets the hardware and firmware requirements for being ACPI compliant This system supports the following ACPI functions PM timer Power button Power button override RTC alarm Sleep Wake logic 51 53 54 Windows 2000 55 C1 state Halt PCI Power Management Event PME 999999 APM 1 2 SUPPORT Advanced Power Management is an extension of power management In the O S decides when a
36. 96 Key w corresponding symbol 97 126 Key w corresponding symbol or Shift and key w corresponding symbol and Caps Lock active 127 Ctrl 128 255 Alt and decimal digit s of desired character B 2 Compaq Personal Computers Changed July 2000 Technical Reference Guide Appendix C KEYBOARD C 1 INTRODUCTION This appendix describes the Compaq keyboard that is included as standard with the system unit The keyboard complies with the industry standard classification of an enhanced keyboard and includes a separate cursor control key cluster twelve function keys and enhanced programmability for additional functions This appendix covers the following keyboard types Standard enhanced keyboard Space Saver Windows version keyboard featuring additional keys for specific support of the Windows operating system Easy Access keyboard with additional buttons for internet accessibility functions Only one type of keyboard is supplied with each system Other types may be available as an option NOTE This appendix discusses only the keyboard unit The keyboard interface is a function of the system unit and is discussed in Chapter 5 Input Output Interfaces Topics covered in this appendix include the following Keystroke processing C 2 page C 2 Connectors page C 16 Compaq Personal Computers C 1 Changed July 2000 Appendix Keyboard 2 KEYSTROKE PROCESSING A functional block dia
37. 97 E0 4B EO CB EO 6B Eo F0 6B 61 FO 61 AA EO 4B EO CB 2A 4 EO FO 12 EO 6B EO FO 6B EO 12 5 EO 2A E0 4B EO EO AA 6 EO 12 E0 6 6B FO 12 6 98 EO 50 E0 DO EO 72 0 F0 72 60 F0 60 EO 50 E0 DO 2A 4 FO 12 EO 72 E0 FO 72 EO 12 5 2A EO 50 0 DO AA 6 EO 12 EO 72 0 FO 72 EO FO 12 6 99 EO 4D EO CD 74 0 74 6A F0 6A AA 4D EO CD 2A 4 EO FO 12 EO 74 E0 FO 74 EO 12 5 EO 2A 4D EO CD EO AA 6 12 0 74 0 74 EO FO 12 6 100 0 52 02 6 70 FO 70 6 70 na 6 101 53 D3 6 71 0 71 6 71 na 6 102 na 7E FE 6D FO 6D 7B FO 7B 103 na 2B AB 5D FO 5D 53 F0 53 104 na 36 D6 61 FO 61 13 0 13 110 Win95 5B EO DB EO 1F EO FO 1F 8B FO 8B 7 EO AA EO 5B E0 DB EO 2A 4 EO FO 12 EO 1F EO FO 1F EO 12 5 EO 2 5 AA 6 12 1 0 1F FO 12 6 111 Win95 0 5C EO DC EO 2F EO FO 27 8C FO 8C 7 5 DC 2A 4 EO FO 12 EO 27 0 FO 27 EO 12 5 2A 5C EO DC EO AA 6 EO 12 E0 27 0 FO 27 EO FO 12 6 112 Win EO 5D EO DD EO 2F E0 F0 2F 8D FO 8D Apps EO AA EO 5D EO DD EO 2 4 EO FO 12 2F E0 FO 2F EO 12 5 7 EO 2A EO 5D 0 DD EO AA 6 EO 12 2F EO FO 2F FO 12 6 Continued Notes listed at end of table 14 Compaq Personal Computers Changed July 2000 Table 2 Keyboard Scan Codes Continued Technical Reference Guide
38. Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide APPENDIX D COMPAQ NVIDIA TNT2 PRO AGP GRAPHICS Dil INTRODUCTION EE epe it ive os gd aden eee toit D 1 D 2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION viere E A intente entrent denne nenne nrbt teen nee tren nre D 2 D 3 DISPLAY MODES ep retenti oet e ire pe Pr PEE erro E D 3 D 4 SOFTWARE SUPPORT D 4 05 POWER MANAGEMENT AND CONSUMPTION ener enne nennen D 4 D6 CONNECTORS eene geriet nni D 5 D 6 1 MONITOR CONNECTOR 2 2 220200200000 0 00 00 00 enr ea ekea etre D 5 APPENDIX COMPAQ NVIDIA GEFORCE2 GTS AGP GRAPHICS CARD eerte INTRODUCTION ssc nir ter etti eet ot etate east ence quien E 1 E2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION eee ettet terere cei pete Rete bet E 2 3 DISPLAY MODES 3 3535 Sis ates nee SR AS Rie ES eS Re RR E 3 E 4 SOFTWARE SUPPORT INFORMATION 4 E5 POWER MANAGEMENT AND 4 6 5 ERU EIU UR IEEE IE ur e E 5 E 6 1 MONITOR CONNECTOR 5 6 2 6 APPENDIX COMPAQ LUCENT 90 56K PCI MODEM 22
39. Keyboard C 3 CONNECTORS Two types of keyboard interfaces are used in Compaq systems PS 2 type and USB type System units that provide a PS 2 connector will ship with a PS 2 type keyboard but may also support simultaneous connection of a USB keyboard Systems that do not provide a PS 2 interface will ship with a USB keyboard For a detailed description of the PS 2 and USB interfaces refer to chapter 5 Input Output of this guide The keyboard cable connectors and their pinouts are described in the following figures in Function Data Not connected Ground 5 VDC Clock 0 Not connected Figure C 9 PS 2 Keyboard Cable Connector Male Pin Function 1 45 VDC 2 Data 3 Data 4 Ground Figure C 10 USB Keyboard Cable Connector Male C 16 Compaq Personal Computers Changed July 2000 Technical Reference Guide Appendix D COMPAQ NVIDIA TNT2 PRO AGP GRAPHICS CARD D 1 INTRODUCTION This appendix describes the Compaq NVIDIA TNT2 Pro Graphics Card used in the standard configuration on some models and also available as an option This card layout shown in the following figure installs in a system s AGP slot The Compaq NVIDIA TNT2 Pro graphics card P N 189998 B21 provides high 2D performance as well as 3D capabilities Feature Connector
40. Processor runs at slow speed 1 Monitor Off Mode 0 Turn monitor power off after 45 minutes in standby 1 Leave monitor power Energy Saver Mode Indicator Blinking LED 0 Disable 1 Enable Configuration Byte 24h System Board Identification Default Value 7Eh Configuration memory location 24h holds the system board ID Configuration Byte 25h System Architecture Data Default Value Bit Function 7 4 3 Unmapping of ROM 0 Allowed 1 Not allowed 1 0 Diagnostic Status Byte Address 00 Memory locations 80C00000h 80C00004h 01 ports 878h 87Ch 11 neither place 4 26 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide Configuration Byte 26h Auxiliary Peripheral Configuration Default Value 00h Delay Select 00 420 ns default 01 300 ns 10 2600 ns 11 540 ns Alternative A20 Switching 0 Disable port 92 mode 1 Enable port 92 mode Bi directional Print Port Mode 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 3 Graphics Type 0 Color 1 Monochrome Hard Drive Primary Secondary Address Select 0 Primary 1 Secondary Diskette Port 0 Primary 1 Secondary Diskette Port Enable 0 Primary 1 Secondary Configuration Byte 27h Speed Control External Drive Default Value 00h Bit Function Boot Speed 0 Max MHz 1 Fast speed 6 0 R
41. Remove the chassis hood cover and insure that no LEDs on the system board are illuminated Press and release the CMOS clear button on the system board Replace the chassis hood cover Reconnect the AC power cord to the outlet and or system unit Turn the unit on To clear only the Power On Password refer to section 4 7 1 1 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 4 21 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 4 System Support 4 6 2 CMOS ARCHIVE AND RESTORE During the boot sequence the BIOS saves a copy of NVRAM CMOS contents password s and other system variables in a portion of the flash ROM Should the system become un usable the last good copy of NVRAM data can be restored with the Power Button Override function This function is invoked with the following procedure 1 With the unit powered down press and release the power button 2 Immediately after releasing the power button in step 1 press and hold the power button until the unit powers down This action will be recorded as a Power Button Override event With the next startup sequence the BIOS will detect the occurrence of the Power Button Override event and will load the backup copy of NVRAM from the ROM to the CMOS NOTE The Power Button Override feature does not allow quick cycling of the system turning on then off If the power cord is disconnected during the POST routine the splash screen image ma
42. SMBus F IDE I F with UATA 100 support AC 97 controller RTC CMOS IRQ controller Power management logic USB I F 4 8259 and I O APIC interrupt processing 82802 FWH Loaded with Compaq BIOS 2 4 3 SUPPORT COMPONENTS Input output functions not provided by the chipset are handled by other support components Table 2 3 shows the functions provided by the support components Table 2 3 Support Component Functions Component Name Function LPC47B357 7 I O Controller Keyboard and pointing device I F Diskette I F Serial I F COM1and COM2 Parallel I F LPT1 LPT2 or LPT3 AGP PCI reset generation ISA serial IRQ converter Power button and LED control logic GPIO ports ES1373 PCI audio controller CS4297A Audio Codec Audio mixer Digital to analog converter Analog to digital converter Analog I O Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 2 11 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 2 System Overview 2 4 4 2 4 5 2 4 6 2 4 7 SYSTEM MEMORY These systems feature a dual channel Direct Rambus RDRAM architecture Capable of a peak data throughput of 3 2 GB sec this high performance memory design represents a new generation of memory subsystems that can keep pace with ever increasing processor performance These systems each provide a total of four RIMM sockets all of which will be populated with either PC800 RDRAM memory modules RIMMs or continuity
43. Serial port B connector USB ports 4 Microphone In audio jack 10 Headphone Line Out audio jack 11 Line In audio jack 12 Ultra SCSI connector some Workstation models only 13 Network I F connector 14 Graphics RGB monitor connector Figure 2 3 Rear Cabinet View Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 2 5 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 2 System Overview 2 3 2 CHASSIS LAYOUT For detailed information on servicing the chassis refer to the multimedia training CD ROM and or the maintenance and service guide for these systems Figure 2 4 shows the layout for the system in a minitower configuration This chassis provides Three 5 14 inch drive bays and two 3 1 drive bays Easy access to expansion slots and all socketed system board components Space for either a ATX or full ATX type system board Power Supply Chassis Fan Air Baffle Drive Bays System Board es Back Front e D dte ted Processor O PCI Slot 1 1 PCI Slot 2 1 Graphics Card in AGP Slot PCI Slot 3 PCI Slot 4 PCI Slot 5 1 Speaker
44. The register addresses are decoded by the audio controller and forwarded to the audio codec over the AC97 Link Bus previously described The audio codec s control registers Table 5 22 are mapped into 64 kilobytes of variable I O space Table 5 22 AC 97 Audio Codec Control Registers Value Value Value Offset On Offset On Offset On Addr Register Reset Addr Register Reset Addr Register Reset 00h Reset 0100h 14h Video Vol 8808h 28h Ext Audio ID 0001h 021 Master Vol 8000h 16h Aux Vol 8808h 2Ah Ext Audio Ctrl Sts 0000h 04h Reserved X 18h PCM Out Vol 8808h 2Ch PCM DAC SRate BB80h 06h Mono Mstr Vol 8000h 1Ah Record Sel 0000h 32h PCM ADC SRate BB80h 08h Reserved X 1Ch Record Gain 8000h 5Eh AC Mode Control 0080h OAh PC Beep Vol 8000h 1Eh Reserved X 60h Misc Cystal 0023h OCh Phone In Vol 8008h 20h Gen Purpose 0000h 68h S PDIF Cntrl 0000h OEh Mic Vol 8008h 22h 3D Control 0000h 10h Line In Vol 8808h 24h Reserved X 7Ch Vender ID1 4352h 12h CD Vol 8808h 26h Pwr Mgnt 000xh 7Eh Vender ID2 5931h Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 5 31 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 5 Input Output Interfaces 5 8 6 AUDIO SPECIFICATIONS The specifications for the audio subsystem are listed in Table 5 23 Table 5 23 Audio Subsystem Specifications Paramemter Measurement Sampling Rate 5
45. continued Device Options PCI VGA Configuration Technical Reference Guide Description Allows user to enable or disable PCI bus mastering which allows a PCI device to take control of the PCI bus PCI VGA palette snooping which sets the VGA palette snooping bit in PCI configuration space this is only needed with more than one graphics controller installed PCI SERR Generation Allows user to set Printer mode bi directional EPP amp ECP output only Num Lock state at power on off on PME power management event wakeup events enable disable Processor cache enable disable Processor Number enable disable for Pentium 111 processors ACPI S3 support enable disable S3 is an ACPI advanced configuration and power interface sleep state that some add in hardware options may not support AGP Aperture size options vary depending on platform allows you to modify the size of your AGP aperture size window Appears only if there are multiple PCI video adapters in the system Allows users to specify which controller will be the boot or primary VGA controller Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 7 11 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 7 BIOS ROM 7 5 CLIENT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Table 7 4 lists the client management BIOS functions supported by the systems covered in this guide These functions designed to support intelligent
46. normal operation Steady green Green w HD activity S1 Suspend Blinks green 1 Hz Off S3 Suspend to RAM Blinks green 1 Hz Off S4 Suspend to disk Blinks green 0 5 Hz Off S5 Soft off Off clear Off Backplane board not seated Steady red Steady red Processor not seated Steady red Off CPU thermal shutdown Blinks red 4 Hz Off ROM error Blinks red 1 Hz Off Power supply crowbar activated Blinks red 0 5 Hz Off System off Off Off I O security The parallel serial and diskette interfaces be disabled individually by software and the LPC47B357 s disabling register locked If the disabling register is locked a system reset through a cold boot is required to gain access to the disabling Device Disable register Processor present speed detection One of the battery back general purpose inputs GPI26 of the LPC47B357 detects if the processor has been removed The occurrence of this event is passed to the ICH that will during the next boot sequence initiate the speed selection routine for the processor The speed selection function replaces the manual DIP switch configuration procedure required on previous systems Legacy ACPI power button mode control The LPC47B357 receives the pulse signal from the system s power button and produces the PS On signal according to the mode legacy or ACPI selected Refer to chapter 7 for more information regarding power management Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Perso
47. page 6 1 Power distribution 6 3 page 6 5 Signal distribution 6 4 page 6 8 6 2 SUPPLY ASSEMBLY CONTROL This system features a power supply assembly that is controlled through programmable logic Figure 6 1 Front Bezel SysiemBoad Power On Off MES NE CPU Slots Chipsets Logic PowerOn 040 amp Voltage Regulators Spd AUX AUX 110 230 VAC Mains 5 VDC 110 VAC gt 0 Power Supply Drives 115 230 VAC Assembly e 12 VDC Select SW gt o 230 VAC Figure 6 1 Power Distribution and Control Block Diagram Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 6 1 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 6 Power and Signal Distribution 6 2 1 POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY The power supply assembly is contained in a single unit that features a selectable input voltage 90 132 and 180 264 V AC Deskpro EN SFF systems use a 120 watt supply while all other systems employ a 265 watt supply Table 6 1 list the specifications of the power supplies Table 6 1 265 Watt Power Supply Assembly Specifications P N 195196 Range Min Current Max Surge Max Tolerance Loading 1 Current Current 2 Ripple Input Line Voltage 115 VAC Setting 90 132 VAC 230 VAC Setting 180 264 VAC Line Frequency 47 63 Hz Constant Input AC Current 4 0 A 3 3 VDC O
48. 0 gt Transmission Rate 00000 30 0 ms 00001 26 6 ms 00010 24 0 ms 00011 21 8 ms 11111 2 0 ms Enable F4h Instructs keyboard to clear output buffer and last typematic key and begin key scanning Default Disable F5h Resets keyboard to power on default state and halts scanning pending next 8042 command Set Default F6h Resets keyboard to power on default state and enable scanning Set Keys Typematic F7h Clears keyboard buffer and sets default scan code set 1 Set Keys Make Brake F8h Clears keyboard buffer and sets default scan code set 1 Set Keys Make F9h Clears keyboard buffer and sets default scan code set 1 Set Keys Typematic Make Brake FAh Clears keyboard buffer and sets default scan code set 1 Set Type Key Typematic FBh Clears keyboard buffer and prepares to receive key ID 1 Set Type Key Make Brake FCh Clears keyboard buffer and prepares to receive key ID 1 Set Type Key Make FDh Clears keyboard buffer and prepares to receive key ID 1 Resend FEh 8042 detected error in keyboard transmission Reset FFh Resets program runs keyboard BAT defaults to Mode 2 Note 1 Used in Mode 3 only Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 5 17 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 5 Input Output Interfaces 5 6 2 5 6 3 POINTING DEVICE INTERFACE OPERATION The pointing device typically a mouse connects to a 6 pin DIN type connector that is i
49. 00h 23h Logical Device Power Management 00h 24h PLL Oscillator Control 04h 25 2Fh Device specific 2 NOTES Refer to LPC47B357 data sheet for detailed register information The configuration registers are accessed through I O registers 2Eh index and 2Fh data after the configuration phase has been activated by writing 55h once to I O port 2Eh The BIOS then initiates each logical device and then deactivates the configuration phase by writing AAh to 2Eh Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 4 37 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 4 System Support 4 8 3 1 4 38 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 LPC47B357 GPIO Utilization The LPC47B357 Controller used in desktop and minitower systems provides 62 general purpose pins that can be individually configured for specific purposes These pins are configured through the Runtime registers logical device 0Ah during the system s configuration phase of the boot sequence by the BIOS Table 4 17 lists the GPIO registers for the LPC47B357 Note that not all ports are listed as this table defines only the custom implementation of GPIO ports Refer to SMC documentation for standard usage of unlisted GPIO ports Table 4 17 LPC47B357 GPIO Port Utilizati
50. 21 25 1213 Figure E 4 Feature Connector 26 Pin Header Table E 4 Video In Connector Pinout Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description 1 71 GND Ground 2 Y1 PO Pixel Data 0 3 22 GND Ground 4 Y2 P1 Pixel Data 1 5 73 GND Ground 6 2 Pixel Data 2 7 24 HAD1 8 Y4 P3 Pixel Data 3 9 25 HADO External Sync 10 Y5 P4 Pixel Data 4 11 26 HCTL External Clock 12 Y6 P5 Pixel Data 5 13 77 SCL Serial Clock 14 Y7 P6 Pixel Data 6 15 78 GND Ground 16 Y8 P7 Pixel Data 7 17 79 GND Ground 18 Y9 DCLK Pixel Data Clock 19 Z10 GND Ground 20 Y10 NC Not Connected 21 211 GND Ground 22 Y11 NC Not Connected 23 212 VIRQ 24 Y12 25 213 SDA Serial Data 26 Y13 GND Ground 6 Compaq Personal Computers Original November 2000 Technical Reference Guide Appendix F COMPAQ LUCENT V 90 56K PCI MODEM INTRODUCTION This appendix describes the Compaq Lucent V 90 56K PCI modem Compaq SP 146803 001 This modem installs in a PCI slot allowing it to be auto configured into the system RJ 11 Connector NOTE Actual layout may vary Figure F 1 Compaq Lucent V 90 56K PCI Modem PCA 152972 Layout This appendix covers the following subjects Functional description 2 page F 2 Operating parameters F 3 page F 3 Power management 4 page F 4 Programming F 5 page F 5 Connectors F 6 page F 5 Compaq Personal Computers F 1 Original December 20
51. 23 6 07 87 36 0 36 36 0 36 24 7 08 88 3D FO 3D 3D FO 3D 25 8 09 89 3E FO 3E F0 26 9 46 F0 46 46 0 46 27 0 0B 8B 45 F0 45 45 0 45 28 0 8 4E FO 4E 4E F0 4E 29 00 80 55 F0 55 55 0 55 30 2 50 5D 5C FO 5C 31 Backspace OE 8E 66 F0 66 66 F0 66 32 Insert EO 52 E0 D2 EO 70 0 FO 70 67 na EO EO 52 0 D2 2A 4 EO FO 12 EO 70 EO FO 70 EO 12 5 2A EO 52 0 D2 AA 6 EO 12 EO 70 0 0 70 EO FO 12 6 33 Home EO 47 0 D2 EO 6C EO FO 6C 6E na EO 52 0 D2 2A 4 EO FO 12 E0 6C EO FO 6C EO 12 5 EO 2A 47 0 C7 EO AA 6 EO 12 EO 6 0 FO 6C FO 12 6 34 Page Up EO 49 0 C7 EO 7D EO F0 7D 6F na EO 49 C9 2A 4 EO FO 12 EO 7D EO 7D EO 12 5 2A 49 0 C9 AA 6 EO 12 EO 7D EO 7D 12 6 35 Num Lock 45 C5 77 FO 77 76 36 0 35 5 4 F0 4A 77 EO 35 E0 B5 2A 1 EO 12 4 4A EO 12 1 37 37 7 7C FO 7C 7E na 38 4A CA 7B FO 7B 84 na 39 Tab OF 8F 0D FO 0D 40 10 90 15 F0 15 15 Continued Notes listed at end of table C 12 Compaq Personal Computers Changed July 2000 Table C 2 Keyboard Scan Codes Continued Technical Reference Guide Key Make Break Codes Hex Pos Legend Mo
52. 2406 01 80x25 mode 8x8 cell test failed 2422 01 640x350 16 color set test failed 2407 01 40x25 mode test failed 2423 01 640x350 64 color set test failed 2408 01 320x200 mode color set 0 test failed 2424 01 EGA Mono text mode test failed 2409 01 320x200 mode color set 1 test failed 2425 01 EGA Mono graphics mode test failed 2410 01 640x200 mode test failed 2431 01 640x480 graphics mode test failed 2411 01 Screen memory page test failed 2432 01 320x200 256 color set test failed 2412 01 Gray scale test failed 2448 01 Advanced VGA controller test failed 2414 01 White screen test failed 2451 01 132 column AVGA test failed 2416 01 Noise pattern test failed 2456 01 AVGA 256 color test failed 2417 01 Lightpen text test failed no response 2458 xx AVGA test failed 2417 02 Lightpen text test failed invalid response 2468 xx AVGA DAC test failed 2417 03 Lightpen graphics test failed no resp 2477 data path test failed 2417 04 Lightpen graphics tst failed invalid resp 2478 xx AVGA test failed 2418 01 EGA memory test failed 2480 xx linedraw test failed Compaq Personal Computers 9 Changed November 2000 Appendix Error Messages and Codes A 16 A 17 A 18 AUDIO ERROR MESSAGES 3206 xx Table A 15 Audio Error Message Message Probable Cause 3206 xx Audio subsystem internal error DVD CD ROM ERROR MESSAGES 33xx xx Table A 16 DVD CD ROM Drive Error Messages Message Probable Cause 3301 xx
53. 27 Open Open 28 Open Open 29 GND Ground 30 GND Ground 31 GND Ground 32 ATN Attention 33 GND Ground 34 GND Ground 35 GND Ground 36 BSY Busy 37 GND Ground 38 ACK Acknowledge 39 GND Ground 40 SBRST Reset 41 GND Ground 42 MSG Message Activity 43 GND Ground 44 SEL Select 45 GND Ground 46 C D Control Data Transfer Indicator 47 GND Ground 48 REQ Request 49 GND Ground 50 Input Output Indicator Compaq Personal Computers L 5 Original December 2000 Appendix K Compaq PCI 10 100 Ethernet Adapter L 5 3 INTERNAL 68 PIN ULTRA160 SCSI CONNECTOR The card provides one internal 68 pin Ultral60 SCSI connector This connection is designed for a 68 conductor unshielded Twist N Flat cable as specified in the T 10 SPI 2 standard Pin 1 Pin 35 Figure L 5 Ultra 160 SCSI Connector 68 pin header type Table L 5 Ultra160 SCSI Connector Pinout Pin Signal Function Signal Function 1 GND Ground DB12 Data Bit 12 2 GND Ground DB13 Data Bit 13 3 GND Ground DB14 Data Bit 14 4 GND Ground DB15 Data Bit 15 5 GND Ground DBP Data Bus Parity 6 GND Ground DBO Data Bit 0 7 GND Ground DB1 Data Bit 1 8 GND Ground DB2 Data Bit 2 9 GND Ground DB3 Data Bit 3 10 GND Ground DB4 Data Bit 4 11 GND Ground DB5 Data Bit 5 12 GND Ground DB6 Data Bit 6 13 GND Ground DB7 Data Bit 7 14 GND Ground DBP Data Bus Parity 15 GND Ground
54. 3D rendering engine 350 MHz RAMDAC 32 bit Z stencil buffer eliminates hidden screen portions for faster loading 32 bit color for increased image quality 30 fps full screen DVD playback Dual monitor support with a PCI graphics card 99999999 Compaq Personal Computers Original December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 9 3 DISPLAY MODES The 2D graphics display modes supported by the NVIDIA Quadro2 MXR Graphics are listed in Table J 1 Table J 1 NVIDIA Quadro2 MXR Graphics Display Modes Max Refresh Memory Used Resolution Bits per pixel Color Depth Frequency Hz 1 For Texture 640 x 480 8 256 240 N A 640 x 480 16 65K 240 N A 640 x 480 32 16 7M 240 28 4 MB 800 x 600 8 256 240 N A 800 x 600 16 65K 240 N A 800 x 600 32 16 7M 240 26 4 MB 1024 x 768 8 256 200 N A 1024 x 768 16 65K 200 N A 1024 x 768 32 16 7M 200 22 8 MB 1152 x 864 8 256 170 N A 1152 x 864 16 65K 170 N A 1152 x 864 32 16 7M 170 20 3 MB 1280 x 1024 8 256 150 N A 1280 x 1024 16 65K 150 N A 1280 x 1024 32 16 7M 150 16 6 MB 1600 x 1000 8 256 120 N A 1600 x 1000 16 65K 120 22 6 MB 1600 x 1000 32 16 7M 120 13 3 MB 1600 x 1200 8 256 100 N A 1600 x 1200 16 65K 100 20 8 MB 1600 x 1200 32 16 7M 100 9 5 MB 1600 x 1280 8 256 100 N A 1600 x 1280 16 65K 100 20 0 MB 1600 x 1280 32 16 7M 100 8 0 MB 1920 x 1080 8 256 85 N A 1920 x 1080 16 65K 85 19 9 MB 1920 x 1080 32 16 7M 85 7 7 MB
55. 7 PCI modem F 2 PCI ver 2 2 5 33 Pentium 4 processor 3 2 Pentium II 2 11 Pentium II processor 2 10 pinouts header connector 6 8 Plug n Play 2 2 2 12 7 15 Plug Play BIOS function 7 15 power button 6 3 Power Button Override 4 22 power consumption graphics card D 4 power distribution 6 5 Power indicator 4 39 power LED 6 4 power management ACPI 4 32 PCI 4 7 Rambus 3 8 power management BIOS function 7 17 power mangement F 4 power supply 6 1 power supply assembly 6 2 power on password 4 31 processor upgrading 3 4 processor Celeron 2 10 processor Pentium 4 3 2 processor Pentium II 2 10 RAM 2 12 Rambus 3 5 3 5 reference sources 1 1 remote flashing 7 2 remote sense alert 5 35 restoring CMOS 4 22 RIMM 3 5 3 6 ROM BIOS 7 1 ROM flashing 7 2 ROM option 4 7 RS 232 5 8 RTC 4 20 scan codes keyboard C 11 SDRAM E 2 G 2 H 2 security functions 4 31 security interface 4 32 sensor thermal 4 34 serial interface 2 12 5 8 SGRAM D 2 J 2 sideband addressing 4 11 signal distribution 6 7 6 8 SMBIOS 7 16 SMI 4 18 Sound Blaster 128 audio 5 26 specifications electrical 2 14 environmental 2 14 physical 2 15 power supply 6 7 6 8 Specifications 8x CD ROM Drive 2 16 Audio subsystem 5 32 Diskette Drive 2 15 SCSI Host Adapter L 3 specifications network adapter I 7 K 8 specifications system 2 14 SSE2 3 2 status system LED 4 33 4 39 syste
56. AOL compliant NIC PCI card such as the Intel PRO 100 Management Adapter Solution requires no auxiliary cable since the communication of alert events is handled through the PCI bus interface Network NIC Card in PCI Slot Cable aap og 2 TA System Board V Alert Clock Trace 82801 ICH2 Alert Data Trace Figure 5 12 AOL Implementation Generic Representation The 82801 ICH initiates event notification by transmitting an alert message over the SMBus type Alert Clock Alert Data interface to a NIC card On these systems the Alert Clock Alert Data signals are wired Or d with the SMBus signals and use the SDONEn SBOn signals lines for routing to a NIC card on the PCI bus The ICH s alert message will be the result of a signal from a sensor thermal or CPU state or from the ICH s detection of the system s running status Upon receiving the alert message from the ICH the NIC transmits the appropriate pre constructed message over the network The AOL implementation requirements are as follows 1 Intel PRO 100 network drivers 4 11 or later available from Compaq Intel Alert On LAN Utilities version 2 6 available from Compaq 3 Management console running one of the following a HP OpenView Network Node Manager 6 x b Intel LANDesk Client Manager c Sample Application Console from the Intel AOL Utilities item 2 above 5 34 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workst
57. Addr Register R W 3F8h 2F8h Receive Data Buffer R Transmit Data Buffer Baud Rate Register 0 when bit 7 of Line Control Reg Is set 3F9h 2F9h X Baud Rate Divisor Register 1 when bit 7 of Line Control Reg Is set Interrupt Enable Register R W 3FAh 2FAh Interrupt ID Register R FIFO Control Register W 3FBh 2FBh Line Control Register R W 3FCh 2FCh Control Register R W 3FDh 2FDh Line Status Register R 3FEh 2FEh Modem Status R 5 10 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 5 5 5 5 1 Technical Reference Guide PARALLEL INTERFACE The legacy light models include a parallel interface for connection to a peripheral device that has a compatible interface the most common being a printer The parallel interface function is integrated into the LPC47B357 controller component and provides bi directional 8 bit parallel data transfers with a peripheral device The parallel interface supports three main modes of operation Standard Parallel Port SPP mode Enhanced Parallel Port EPP mode Extended Capabilities Port ECP mode These three modes and their submodes provide complete support as specified for an IEEE 1284 parallel port STANDARD PARALLEL PORT MODE The Standard Parallel Port SPP mode uses software based protocol and includes two sub modes of operation compatible and extended both
58. Boot ROM with PXE and RPL support 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 99 K 2 Compaq Personal Computers Original December 2000 Technical Reference Guide K 2 1 AOL FUNCTION The adapter s Alert On LAN AOL function provides a AOL compliant system unit with the ability to communicate system status to a management console even while the system is powered down When installed in an AOL compliant system the adapter receives alert messages from the system s I O Controller Hub ICH over the SMBus Each alert message decoded by the adapter results in a pre constructed status message being transmitted over the network to a management console Alert On LAN functionality occurs independent of software driver or even processor intervention The adapter can report following conditions System tampering Removal of the chassis cover BIOS failure System fails to boot successfully OS problem System fails to load operating system after boot Missing faulty processor Processor fails to fetch first instruction Thermal condition High temperature detected in system Heartbeat Indication of system s presence on the network sent approximately every 30 seconds 99999 NOTE The system unit must be plugged into a live AC outlet for the AOL function to be operative Controlling a system unit s power through an AC outlet strip will when the strip is turned off disable AOL functionality NOTE Since AOL implements the SMBus a cable connection f
59. CPU offloads drive transactions using DMA protocol with transfer rates up to 16 MB s Ultra ATA 100 mode Preferred bus mastering source synchronous protocol providing transfer rates of 100 MB s NOTE These systems include 80 conductor data cables required for UATA 66 and 100 modes IDE PROGRAMMING The IDE interface is configured as a PCI device during POST and controlled through I O mapped registers at runtime Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 5 1 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 5 Input Output Interfaces Hard drives types not found in the ROM s parameter table are automatically configured as to soft type by DOS as follows Primary controller drive 0 type 65 drive 1 type 66 Secondary controller drive 0 type 68 drive 1 type 15 Non DOS non Windows operating systems may require using Setup F10 for drive configuration 5 2 1 1 IDE Configuration Registers The IDE controller is configured as a PCI device with bus mastering capability The PCI configuration registers for the IDE controller function PCI device 31 function 1 are listed in Table 5 1 Table 5 1 EIDE PCI Configuration Registers 82801 Device 31 Function 1 PCI Conf Reset PCI Conf Reset Addr Register Value Addr Register Value 00 01h Vender ID 8086h OF 1Fh Reserved 05 02 03h Device ID 244Bh 20 23h BMIDE Base Address 1 04 05h PCI
60. Connector SDRAM Analog NVIDIA Monitor NV11GL Connector Controller SDRAM Figure J 1 Compaq NVIDIA Quadro2 MXR AGP Graphics Card PCA 221411 001 Layout This appendix covers the following subjects Functional description D 2 page D 2 Display modes D 3 page D 3 Software support information D 4 page D 4 Monitor power management D 5 page D 4 Connectors D 6 page D 5 Compaq Personal Computers J 1 Original December 2000 Appendix 7 Compaq NVIDIA Quadro2 MXR Graphics Card J 2 Card Edge Connector J 2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION The NVIDIA Quadro2 MXR Graphics Card provides high performance 2D and 3D display imaging The card s AGP design provides an economical approach to 3D processing by off loading 3D effects such as texturing z buffering and alpha blending to the system memory while 32 megabytes of on board SDRAM stores the main display image 128 bit NVIDIA NV11GL Graphics Controller 166 MHz Data Bus 32 MB Memory Video SDRAM AGP Frame Buffer Scalar CRT Controller Analog Monitor 3D Array 350 MHz Connector Engine RAM DAC Figure J 2 NVIDIA Quadro2 MXR Graphics Card Block diagram The NVIDIA Quadro2 MXR Graphics Card includes the following features 32 MB SDRAM frame buffer using 128 bit 183 MHz access AGP 4X transfers with sideband addressing 2D drawing engine
61. Drive test failed 3305 XX Seek test failed See Table A 18 for additional messages NETWORK INTERFACE ERROR MESSAGES 60xx xx Table A 17 Network Interface Error Messages Message Probable Cause Message Probable Cause 6000 xx Pointing device interface error 6054 xx Token ring configuration test failed 6014 xx Ethernet configuration test failed 6056 xx Token ring reset test failed 6016 xx Ethernet reset test failed 6068 xx Token ring int loopback test failed 6028 xx Ethernet int loopback test failed 6069 xx Token ring ext loopback test failed 6029 xx Ethernet ext loopback test failed 6089 xx Token ring open A 10 Compaq Personal Computers Changed November 2000 Technical Reference Guide 19 SCSI INTERFACE ERROR MESSAGES 65xx xx 66xx xx 67xx xx Table A 18 SCSI Interface Error Messages Message Probable Cause Message Probable Cause 02 Drive not installed 33 Illegal controller command 03 Media not installed 34 Invalid SCSI bus phase 05 Seek failure 35 Invalid SCSI bus phase 06 36 Invalid SCSI bus phase 07 39 Error status from drive 08 Drive already reserved 40 Drive timed out 09 Reserved 41 SSI bus stayed busy 10 Reserved 42 ACK REQ lines bad 11
62. Function 0 Device 31 PCI PCI Config Reset Config Reset Register Value Addr Register Value 00 011 Vendor ID 8086h 8Ah Device 31 Error Status 00h 02 03h Device ID 2410h 90 91h PCI DMA Configuration 0000h 04 05h Command 000Fh 0 06 077 X Status 0280h DO D3h General Control 05 08h Revision ID 00h D4 D7h General Status FOOh 0 Class Code 0106h D8h RTC Configuration 00h 80h EOh LPC COM Port Dec Range 00h 40 43h ACPI Base Address 1 Eth LPC FDD amp LPT Dec Rge 00h 44h ACPI Control 00h E2h LPC Audio Dec Range 80h 4E 4Fh BIOS Control 0000h E3h FWH Decode Enable FFh 54h TCO Control 00h E4 E5h LPC I F Decode Range 1 0000h 58 5Bh GPIO Base Address 1 E6 E7h LPC I F Enables 0000h 5Ch GPIO Control 00h E8h FWH Select 00 60 63h INTA D Routing 80h 1 EC EDh LPC Decode Range 2 0000h 64h Serial IRQ Control 10h EE EFh Reserved 65 87 Reserved FOh Reserved 88h Dev 31 Error Config 00h F2h Function Disable Register 00h NOTE 1 Value for each byte Assume unmarked locations gaps as reserved Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 4 2 8 62 52 49 Technical Reference Guide B1 62 A52 A49 Figure 4 4 PCI Bus Connector 32 Bit Type A1
63. Guide Chapter 3 PROCESSOR MEMORY SUBSYSTEM 3 1 INTRODUCTION This chapter describes the processor memory subsystem of Compaq Deskpro Personal Computers featuring the Pentium 4 processor These systems feature the Pentium 4 processor and the 850 chipset Figure 3 1 The 82850 MCH component of the 850 chipset supports two Direct Rambus channels each channel accommodating one or two RIMMs Pentium 4 Processor 400 MHz 64 Bit FSB ESB I F Channel 1 16 82850 Rambus Channel 2 16 XMM4 Socket E Will be populated with optional RIMM or CRIMM E Covered in Chapter 6 _ Covered in Chapter 4 Figure 3 1 Processor Memory Subsystem Architecture This chapter includes the following topics Pentium 4 processor 3 2 page 3 2 Memory subsystem 3 3 page 3 5 Subsystem configuration 3 4 page 3 8 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 3 1 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 3 Processor Memory Subsystem 3 2 PENTIUM 4 PROCESSOR These systems each feature an Intel Pentium 4 processor in a FC PGA423 package mounted with a passive heat sink in a PGA423 W type zero insertion force socket The mounting socket allows the processor to be easily changed for servicing and or upgrading 3 2 1 PROCESSOR OVERVIEW The 1 4 1 5 GHz Intel Pentium 4 processor represents the latest generation of Inte
64. Industry Association EISA extended ISA EPP enhanced parallel port EIDE enhanced IDE ESCD Extended System Configuration Data format EV Environmental Variable data ExCA Exchangeable Card Architecture FIFO first in first out FL flag register FM frequency modulation FPM fast page mode RAM type FPU Floating point unit numeric or math coprocessor FPS Frames per second ft Foot feet GB gigabyte GMCH Graphics memory controller hub GND ground GPIO general purpose GPOC general purpose open collector GART Graphics address re mapping table GUI graphics user interface h hexadecimal HW hardware hex hexadecimal Hz Hertz cycles per second ICH controller hub IDE integrated drive element IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IF interrupt flag VF interface in inch INT interrupt input output IPL initial program loader IrDA InfraRed Data Association IRQ interrupt request ISA industry standard architecture Kb KB kilobits kilobytes x 1024 bits x 1024 bytes Kb s kilobits per second kg kilogram KHz kilohertz kv kilovolt Continued 1 4 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide Table 1 1 Acronyms and Abbreviations Continued Acronym Abbreviation Description lb pound LAN local area network LCD liquid crystal display LED light emitting diode LIF
65. November 2000 6 6 1 Technical Reference Guide CONNECTORS There are two connectors associated with the graphics subsystem the display monitor connector and the Feature connector NOTE The graphic card s edge connector mates with the AGP slot connector on the system board This interface is described in chapter 4 of this guide MONITOR CONNECTOR The display monitor connector is provided for connection of a compatible RGB analog monitor Figure E 3 VGA Monitor Connector Female DB 15 as viewed from rear Table E 3 DB 15 Monitor Connector Pinout Pin Signal Description Signal Description 1 R Red Analog PWR 5 fused 1 2 G Blue Analog GND Ground 3 B Green Analog NC Not Connected 4 NC Not Connected SDA DDC2 B Data 5 GND Ground HSync Horizontal Sync 6 R GND Red Analog Ground VSync Vertical Sync 7 G GND Green Analog Ground SCL DDC2 B Clock 8 B GND Blue Analog Ground NOTES 1 Fuse automatically resets when excessive load is removed Compaq Personal Computers E 5 Original November 2000 Appendix Compaq NVIDIA GeForce2 GTS Graphics E 6 2 VIDEO FEATURE CONNECTOR The Video Feature connector allows a video peripheral such as a TV tuner card to provide video input to the graphics card This interface is compliant with VESA VIP specification 1 1 21Y1 26 Y13 1
66. PWR AGP Bus Power Supply 4 43 3 VDC 2 5 S8 VDC E 3 AUX Circuitry 4 5 e 5 12 12 8 VIDO Regulator VccP see text 5 VID1 Circuit Processor VID2 Processor lt VID3 VID4 Figure 6 3 Low Voltage Supply and Distribution Diagram regulator produces processor core voltage according to the strapping of signals VID4 0 by the processor The possible voltages available are listed as follows VID 4 0 VID 4 0 VID 4 0 00000 2 05 VDC 01011 1 50 VDC 10110 2 90 00001 2 00 VDC 01100 1 45 VDC 10111 2 80 VDC 00010 1 95 VDC 01101 1 40 VDC 11000 2 70 VDC 00011 1 90 VDC 01110 1 35 VDC 11001 2 60 VDC 00100 1 85 VDC 01111 1 30 VDC 11010 2 50 VDC 00101 1 80 VDC 10000 3 50 VDC 11011 2 40 VDC 00110 1 75 VDC 10001 3 40 VDC 11100 2 30 VDC 00111 1 70 VDC 10010 3 30 VDC 11101 2 20 VDC 01000 1 65 VDC 10011 3 20 VDC 11110 2 10 VDC 01001 1 60 VDC 10100 3 10 VDC 11111 No CPU 01010 1 55 VDC 10101 3 00 VDC 6 6 Compaq Deskpro EXS Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 6 4 SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION Technical Reference Guide Figures 6 4 shows general signal distribution between the main subassemblies of the system units Chassis Fan Graphics Controller AGP Fan Bus PWR Audio Power On Off
67. TRANSFER PEAK TRANSFER RATE 532 5 4 12 AGP DATA TRANSFER PEAK TRANSFER RATE 1064 5 4 12 1 5 VOLT AGP BUS CONNECTOR cc sccccccecsesssscecececcessaececececseseaececcceceeseasaesecscsesennsaeseeeees 4 14 MASKABLE INTERRUPT PROCESSING BLOCK DIAGRAM 4 15 CONFIGURATION MEMORY 12 2212204000000000000000000000000000 00 4 20 FAN CONTROL BLOCK 222 22 000002 0 00100000000000000 asse ener 4 34 40 PIN PRIMARY CONNECTOR ON SYSTEM BOARD 5 3 34 PIN DISKETTE DRIVE 2 0000 0 012000010000000000000000 tente nnns seen eee nean 5 7 SERIAL INTERFACE CONNECTOR MALE DB 9 AS VIEWED FROM REAR OF CHASSIS 5 8 PARALLEL INTERFACE CONNECTOR FEMALE DB 25 AS VIEWED FROM REAR OF CHASSIS 5 15 KEYBOARD OR POINTING DEVICE INTERFACE CONNECTOR eee enne 5 21 USB VE BLEOCK DIAGRAM estu 5 22 USB PACKET PORMNATS ere OE ERE Prev Lai envi 5 23 UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS 02002002 00000000000000000000000080808888 5 25 AUDIO SUBSYSTEM FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM 5 27 OT EINK B SIPROTOGOE 5 29 54297 AUDIO CODEC FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM eere 5 30 AOL I
68. Table 4 4 PCI Bus Connector Pinout Pin B Signal A Signal Pin B Signal A Signal 01 12 VDC TRST 32 AD17 AD16 02 12 33 2 3 3 03 5 34 GND FRAME 04 TDO TDI 35 IRDY GND 05 5 VDC 5 VDC 36 3 3 VDC TRDY 06 5 VDC INTA 37 DEVSEL GND 07 INTB INTC 38 GND STOP 08 INTD 5 VDC 39 LOCK 3 3 VDC 09 PRSNT1 Reserved 40 PERR SDONE n 10 RSVD 5 VDC 41 3 3 VDC SBO 11 PRSNT2 Reserved 42 SERR GND 12 GND GND 43 3 3 VDC PAR 13 GND GND 44 C BE1 AD15 14 RSVD 3 3 AUX 45 AD14 3 3 VDC 15 GND RST 46 GND AD13 16 CLK 5 VDC 47 AD12 AD11 17 GND GNT 48 AD10 GND 18 REQ GND 49 GND 009 19 5 VDC 50 20 AD31 AD30 51 Key Key 21 AD29 43 8 52 AD08 C BEO 22 GND AD28 53 007 3 3 VDC 23 AD27 AD26 54 3 3 VDC 06 24 AD25 GND 55 05 004 25 3 3 VDC AD24 56 ADOS GND 26 IDSEL 57 GND ADO2 27 AD23 43 8 VDC 58 ADO1 ADOO 28 GND AD22 59 5 VDC 5 VDC 29 AD21 AD20 60 ACK64 REQ64 30 AD19 GND 61 5 VDC 5 VDC 31 3 3 VDC AD18 62 5 VDC 5 VDC Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 4 9 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 4 System Support 4 3 4 3 1 AGP BUS OVERVIEW NOTE This section provides a brief description of AGP bus operation For a detailed description of AGP bus
69. The service routine takes the appropriate action based on which key was pressed Compaq Personal Computers C 3 Changed July 2000 Appendix Keyboard C 2 2 USB TYPE KEYBOARD TRANSMISSIONS The USB type keyboard sends essentially the same information to the system that the PS 2 keyboard does except that the data receives additional NRZI encoding and formatting prior to leaving the keyboard to comply with the USB I F specification discussed in chapter 5 of this guide Packets received at the system s USB I F and decoded as originating from the keyboard result in an SMI being generated An SMI handler routine is invoked that decodes the data and transfers the information to the 8042 keyboard controller where normal legacy keyboard processing takes place C 4 Compaq Personal Computers Changed July 2000 Technical Reference Guide C 2 3 KEYBOARD LAYOUTS Figures C 3 through C 8 show the key layouts for keyboards shipped with Compaq systems Actual styling details including location of the Compaq logo as well as the numbers lock caps lock and scroll lock LEDs may vary C 2 3 4 Standard Enhanced Keyboards
70. The AOL implementation requirements are as follows System unit featuring the 810 810e 820 or 850 or later chipset Intel 100 Management Adapter Driver 3 1 or later available from Compaq Client side utility agent software available from Compaq Management console running one of the following a HP OpenView Network Node Manager 6 x b Intel LANDesk Client Manager c Compag Insight Manager dus qu WAKE UP FUNCTIONS The adapter provides two types of wake up signaling the PME signal and the WOL signal The adapter provides PME signal support for systems compliant with PCI ver 2 2 The detection of any wake event results in the adapter s assertion of the PME signal which can be used by the system unit to initiate the power up sequence System software is responsible for the clearing the PME signal The adapter also includes a WOL interface for systems supporting that method of wake up The adapter asserts the WOL signal for 50 milliseconds upon detection of a Magic Packet The WOL signal is routed to the system unit through a three conductor cable connection for initializing a power up sequence Compaq Personal Computers 1 3 Original December 2000 Appendix Network Interface Controller Adapters 1 2 3 IPSEC FUNCTION The 82550 controller used on the Intel PRO 100 S Management Adapter includes an encryption engine that provides on the fly encryption and or authentication of transm
71. The Video Feature connector allows a video peripheral such as a TV tuner card to provide video input to the graphics card This interface is compliant with VESA VIP specification 1 1 21Y1 26 Y13 1 21 25 1213 Figure H 4 Feature Connector 26 Pin Header Table G 4 Video In Connector Pinout Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description 1 71 GND Ground 2 Y1 PO Pixel Data 0 3 22 GND Ground 4 Y2 P1 Pixel Data 1 5 73 GND Ground 6 2 Pixel Data 2 7 24 HAD1 8 Y4 P3 Pixel Data 3 9 25 HADO External Sync 10 Y5 P4 Pixel Data 4 11 26 HCTL External Clock 12 Y6 P5 Pixel Data 5 13 77 SCL Serial Clock 14 Y7 P6 Pixel Data 6 15 78 GND Ground 16 Y8 P7 Pixel Data 7 17 79 GND Ground 18 Y9 DCLK Pixel Data Clock 19 Z10 GND Ground 20 Y10 NC Not Connected 21 211 GND Ground 22 Y11 NC Not Connected 23 212 VIRQ 24 Y12 25 213 SDA Serial Data 26 Y13 GND Ground H 6 Compaq Personal Computers Original November 2000 Technical Reference Guide Appendix I COMPAQ INTEL NETWORK INTERFACE CONTROLLER ADAPTERS INTRODUCTION This appendix describes Compaq Intel Network Interface Controller adapters that may be included in the standard configuration on some models and available as options for all models This appendix describes the following devices Compag Intel 100 Management Adapter SP 1
72. VIEWED FROM REAR J 5 RE K 1 COMPAQ PCI 10 100 ETHERNET ADAPTER CARD LAYOUT PCA 402355 001 K 1 RE K 2 COMPAQ PCI 10 100 ETHERNET ADAPTER BLOCK DIAGRAM ccccsessscecececeesssseceeececeeneaees K 2 RE K 3 ETHERNET TPE CONNECTOR RJ 45 VIEWED FROM CARD EDGE cerne K 6 RE K 4 AOL SOS CONNECTOR 7 PIN enne enne enne enne nennen nn K 6 RE K 5 SMBUS CONNECTOR 4 PIN nennen enne rennen nnne K 7 RE K 6 WOL CONNECTOR 3 PIN 40 40 7 20000 enne ener entere entrer ener nre K 7 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers xi Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide FIGURE L 1 COMPAQ ADAPTEC 29160N SCSI HOST ADAPTER CARD LAYOUT PCA 157342 001 L 1 FIGURE L 2 COMPAQ ADAPTEC ULTRA SCSI ADAPTER CARD BLOCK DIAGRAM nene L 2 FIGURE L 3 EXTERNAL ULTRA SCSI CONNECTOR 90 L 4 FIGURE L 4 INTERNAL 50 PIN ULTRA SCSI CONNECTOR L 5 FIGURE L 5 ULTRA 160 SCSI CONNECTOR 68 PIN HEADER TYPE L 6 xi Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide
73. and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 7 15 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 7 BIOS ROM 7 6 1 SMBIOS In support of the DMI specification the PnP functions 50h and 51h are used to retrieve the SMBIOS data Function 50h retrieves the number of structures size of the largest structure and SMBIOS version Function 51h retrieves a specific structure This system supports SMBIOS version 2 3 1 and the following structure types Data BIOS Information System Information System Enclosure or Chassis Processor Information Cache Information Port Connector Information System Slots BIOS Language Information System Event Log Information Physical Memory Array 17 Memory Devices 19 Memory Array Mapped Addresses 20 Memory Device Mapped Addresses 31 Boot Integrity Service Entry Point 32 System Boot Information 128 OEM Defined Structure with Intel Alert On LAN AOL Information 4 NOTE System information on these systems is handled exclusively through the an SMBIOS The System Information Table SIT method and it s associated BIOS functions used on previous systems is no longer supported 7 16 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 7 7 7 7 1 Technical Reference Guide POWER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS The BIOS ROM provides three types of power management s
74. base DS is read only SS Stack selector must provide at least 1K of stack space and be 32 bit I O permissions must be provided so that the BIOS can support as necessary AL Return code 00h requested service is present 80h requested service is not present 81h un implemented function specified in BL 86h and CF 1 function not supported EBX Physical address to use as the selector BASE for the service ECX Value to use as the selector LIMIT for the service EDX Entry point for the service relative to the BASE returned in EBX The following subsections provide a brief description of key Client Management functions Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 7 13 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 7 BIOS ROM 7 5 1 7 5 2 7 5 3 SYSTEM ID AND TYPE Applications can use the INT 15 AX E800h BIOS function to identify the type of system This function will return the system ID in the BX register These systems have the following IDs and ROM family types System System ID ROM Family PnP ID Deskpro EXS or Workstation 300 06C8h 686P5 CPQ0010 The ROM family and version numbers can be verified with the Setup utility or the Compaq Insight Manager or Diagnostics applications EDID RETRIEVE The BIOS function INT 15 AX E813h is a tri modal call that retrieves the VESA extended display identification data EDID Two subfunctions are pro
75. configuration cycle PCT 4 4 configuration memory 4 20 configuration space PCI 4 5 connector RJ 11 modem F 4 Connector AGP bus 4 14 Audio CD 5 27 audio headphones out 5 26 audio line in 5 26 audio line out 5 26 Audio Mic In 5 26 Audio Speaker 5 27 diskette drive interface 5 7 display VGA monitor D 5 E 5 G 5 H 5 J IDE interface 5 3 keyboard pointing device interface 5 21 Network RJ 45 5 36 parallel interface 5 15 PCI bus 4 9 serial interface RS 232 5 8 Ultra SCSI 50 pin D type L 4 Ultra SCSI 50 pin header type L 5 Universal Serial Bus interface 5 25 pass through feature E 6 G 6 H 6 Wide Ultra SCSI 68 pin header type L 6 continuity module 3 6 cooling 4 34 core voltage 6 6 CRIMM 3 6 Data Encryption Standards DES I 4 DES I 4 device ID PCI 4 4 DIMM detection 7 5 DIMM support 7 14 Direct Rambus 3 5 diskette drive interface 5 4 display modes D 3 E 3 G 3 H 3 J 3 DMA 4 19 DMI 7 16 drive fault prediction 7 15 DSP F 2 dual head support H 2 East Access keys C 10 Easy Access keyboards C 7 effects 3D D 2 2 G 2 H 2 J 2 EIDE interface 5 1 Enhanced Parallel Port EPP 5 12 events wake up 6 4 expansion card cage 2 6 Extended Capabilities Port ECP 5 12 features standard 2 2 flash ROM 7 2 flash status 4 33 general purpose I O 4 36 GPIO 4 36 controller 4 38 graphics card D 1 1 F 1 G 1 H 1 J 1 K 1 L
76. destined for a device being serviced by a downstream bridge Figure 4 2 shows the configuration cycle format and how the loading of OCF8h results in a Type 0 configuration cycle on the PCI bus The Device Number bits lt 15 11 gt determines which one of the AD31 11 lines is to be asserted high for the IDSEL signal which acts as a chip select function for the PCI device to be configured The function number CF8h bits lt 10 8 gt is used to select a particular function within a PCI component 31 24 23 16 15 11 10 8 7 2 1 O 1 Functi Regi Register OCF8h Reserved DE Results in i Eod 4 AD31 0 ion Register w Type 0 IDSEL only one signal line asserted Config Cycle NOTES 1 Bits 1 0 00 Type 0 Cycle 01 Type 1 cycle Type 1 cycle only Reserved on Type 0 cycle Figure 4 2 Configuration Cycle Table 4 1 shows the standard configuration access data for components and slots residing on a PCI bus Table 4 1 PCI Component Configuration Access Data PCI IDSEL PCI Component Vendor Device ID Bus Device Function Wired to 82850 MCH Memory Controller 8086h 2530h 0 0 00h 0 AGP Bridge 8086h 2532h 0 1 01h 0 slot 3 1 0 00h 0 82801BA 2 PCI PCI Bridge 8086h 244Eh 0 30 0 LPC Bridge 8086h 2440h 0 31 1Fh 0 EIDE Controller 8086h 244Bh 0 31 1Fh 1 USB I F 1
77. divided into two 128 byte configuration memory areas The RTC uses the first 14 bytes 00 0Dh of the standard memory area locations of the standard memory area 00 7Fh can be directly accessed using conventional OUT and IN assembly language instructions through I O ports 70h 71h although the suggested method is to use the INT15 AX E823h BIOS call ODh Register D 82801 Register C OBh RegisterB Extended Config OAh Register A Memory Area O9h 128 bytes 08h Month 07h Date of Month 06h Day of Week 05 Hours Alarm Standard Config 04 Hours Timer Memory Area 03h Minutes Alarm 114 bytes 02h Minutes Timer Seconds Alarm RTC Area Seconds Timer 14 bytes Figure 4 10 Configuration Memory Map A lithium 3 VDC battery is used for maintaining the RTC and configuration memory while the system is powered down The battery is located in a battery holder on the system board is replaced with a Renata CR2032 or equivalent 3 VDC lithium battery 4 20 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 4 6 1 Technical Reference Guide CLEARING CMOS The contents of configuration memory including the Power On Password can be cleared by the following procedures 1 2 3 Turn off the unit Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and or system unit
78. drive assemblies Figure 6 2 shows the power supply cabling for Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 series units P6 P7 P7 n P4 P5 To gt Assemblies P2 P6 432 1 P2 0000 P3 gt 4 gt 12 3 4 2 1 3 2 Power Supply To Assembly P1 System SP 195196 1 E 14 1511617 18 19 2021 122 2324 2 111213 4 5 6 7 9 1011 12 Conn Pint Pin2 Pin3 Pin4 5 Pinga Ping 10 11 Pin 12 NOTES Connectors not shown to scale All and values are VDC RTN Return signal ground GND Power ground RS Remote sense FO Fan off FSpd Fan speed FS Fan Sink 1 This row represents pins 13 24 of connector P1 Figure 6 2 Power Cable Diagram Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 6 5 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 6 Power and Signal Distribution 6 3 2 LOW VOLTAGE PRODUCTION DISTRIBUTION Voltages less than 3 3 VDC including processor core VccP voltage are produced through regulator circuitry on the system board f 45 AUX d Te 3 3 VDC 45 VDC RIMM RIMMs Circuit 3 3 VDC gt VDDQ 1 5 VDC 12 VDC
79. during increment pattern test 210 03 Error while restoring memory during increment pattern test 211 01 Memory random pattern test 211 02 Error while saving memory during random memory pattern test 211 03 Error while restoring memory during random memory pattern test 213 Incompatible DIMM in slot x 214 xx Noise test failed 215 xx Random address test 6 KEYBOARD ERROR MESSAGES 30 Table A 5 Keyboard Error Messages Message Probable Cause Message Probable Cause 300 xx Failed ID test 303 05 LED test LED command test failed 301 01 Kybd short test 8042 self test failed 303 06 LED test LED command test failed 301 02 Kybd short test interface test failed 303 07 LED test LED command test failed 301 03 Kybd short test echo test failed 303 08 LED test command byte restore test failed 301 04 Kybd short test kybd reset failed 303 09 LED test LEDs failed to light 301 05 Kybd short test kybd reset failed 304 01 Keyboard repeat key test failed 302 xx Failed individual key test 304 02 Unable to enter mode 3 302 01 Kybd long test failed 304 03 Incorrect scan code from keyboard 303 01 LED test 8042 self test failed 304 04 No Make code observed 303 02 LED test reset test failed 304 05 Cannot disable repeat key feature 303 03 LED test reset failed 304 06 Unable to return to Normal mode 303 04 LED test LED command test failed A 4 Compaq Personal Computers Changed November 2000
80. e E 4 22 4 6 3 STANDARD CMOS 4 22 4 7 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT e rettet ttr ee tete eerte eee iet bebe tnt 4 31 4 7 1 SECURITY etm ter pt eee p Re prete tata 4 31 4 7 2 POWER MANAGEMENT ois os ee rite tio e ete ee n 4 32 4 7 3 SYSTEM STATUS o Ree ete EUR I RERO aee E EESE 4 33 4 7 4 TEMPERATURE SENSING AND 4 34 4 8 REGISTER MAP AND MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS eene 4 35 4 8 1 SYSTEM UO MAP 5 sinapis rnb UE AD ES 4 35 4 8 2 82801 ICH GENERAL PURPOSE FUNCTIONS 2 4 36 4 8 3 CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS 4 37 CHAPTER 5 INPUT OUTPUT 1 sente 5 1 INTRODUCGTIQN D pt UE BU UIN IU 5 1 52 ENHANCED IDE INTERFACE n Bee itte cere ener Eeken o soas oE ee inte 5 1 5 2 1 IDE PROGRAMMING riepa 2 ies erc dere eie 5 1 5 2 2 IDE CONNECTIOR og tette pit Deme te ER Dr 5 3 5 3 DISKETTE DRIVEANTEREAGE se trier ete fiiere Hp inii atr t a ite 5 4 5 3 1 DISKETTE DRIVE 5 5 5 3 2 DISKETTE DRIVE 0 500000 tette trennen ne 5 7 54 SERIAL INTERFACE tte e ep rp Cie PE ROS DE Eta 5 8 5 4 1 RS
81. for systems employing the Remote System Alert RSA method of providing alerts to a network I 5 Description 5051 5052 5053 5054 5055 5056 MDCLK SOS present lt e Mirac di Figure K 4 AOL SOS Connector 7 pin Header K 6 Compaq Personal Computers Original December 2000 Technical Reference Guide K 4 3 SMBUS CONNECTOR Figure K 5 shows the SMBus connector This connector is used for systems employing AOL functionality and requiring a cable connection for SMBus activity NOTE Compaq desktop units do not require a cable connection SMBus activity I 5 Description SMBus Data SMBus CS SMBus Clock Not connected Figure 5 AOL SOS Connector 4 pin Header K 4 4 WOL CONNECTOR Figure K 6 shows the WOL connector This connector is used for systems employing remote wake up I 5 Description 5 VDC aux Ground Wake SI 2 3 Figure 6 WOL Connector 3 Header Compaq Personal Computers K 7 Original December 2000 Appendix K Compaq PCI 10 100 Ethernet Adapter 5 ADAPTER SPECIFICATIONS Table K 1 Adapter Specifications Parameter Modes Supported 10BASE T half duplex 10 MB s 10Base T full duplex 20 MB s 100BASE TX half duplex 100 MB s 100Base TX full duplex 200 MB s Encryption Standards 82550 only DES 3DES HMAC SHA 1 MD5 Standards Compl
82. format a track 17xx 59 Failed to read sector buffer 17xx 10 Failed diskette sector wrap during read 17xx 60 Failed uncorrectable ECC error 17xx 19 Cntir failed to deallocate bad sectors 17xx 62 Failed correctable ECC error 17 40 Cylinder 0 error 17 63 Failed soft error rate 17 41 17 65 Exceeded max bad sectors per track 17 42 Failed to recalibrate drive 17xx 66 Failed to initialize drive parameter 17xx 43 Failed to format a bad track 17xx 67 Failed to write long 17 44 Failed controller diagnostics 17xx 68 Failed to read long 17x45 Failed to get drive parameters from ROM 17xx 69 Failed to read drive size 17x46 Invalid drive parameters from ROM 17 70 Failed translate mode 17 47 Failed to park heads 17 71 Failed non translate mode 17 48 Failed to move hard drive table to RAM 17 72 Bad track limit exceeded 17xx 49 Failed to read media in file write test 17 73 Previously exceeded bad track limit 17xx 50 Failed write test 1700 Hard drive ID test 1719 xx Hard drive power mode test 1701 xx Hard drive format test 1720 xx SMART drive detects imminent failure 1702 xx Hard drive read test 1721 xx SCSI hard drive imminent failure 1703 xx Hard drive read write compare test 1724 xx Net work preparation test 1704 xx Hard drive random seek test 1736 xx Drive monitoring test 1705 xx Hard drive controller test 1771 xx Pri IDE controller address conflict 1706
83. inoperative 112 02 Speed test Mixed mode out of range 105 01 Port 61 bit 6 not at zero 112 03 Speed test Fast mode out of range 105 02 Port 61 bit 5 not at zero 112 04 Speed test unable to enter Slow mode 105 03 Port 61 bit 3 not at zero 112 05 Speed test unable to enter Mixed mode 105 04 Port 61 bit 1 not at zero 112 06 Speed test unable to enter Fast mode 105 05 Port 61 bit 0 not at zero 112 07 Speed test system error 105 06 Port 61 bit 5 not at one 112 08 Unable to enter Auto mode in speed test 105 07 Port 61 bit 3 not at one 112 09 Unable to enter High mode in speed test 105 08 Port 61 bit 1 not at one 112 10 Speed test High mode out of range 105 09 Port 61 bit 0 not at one 112 11 Speed test Auto mode out of range 105 10 Port 61 I O test failed 112 12 Speed test variable soeed mode inop 105 11 Port 61 bit lt 7 gt not at zero 113 01 Protected mode test failed 105 12 Port 61 bit lt 2 gt not at zero 114 01 Speaker test failed 105 13 No int generated by failsafe timer 116 xx Way 0 read write test failed 105 14 NMI not triggered by failsafe timer 162 xx Sys options failed mismatch in drive type 106 01 Keyboard controller test failed 163 xx Time and date not set 107 01 CMOS RAM test failed 164 xx Memory size 108 02 CMOS interrupt test failed 199 00 Installed devices test failed 108 03 CMOS not properly initialized int test 109 01 CMOS clock load data test failed 109 02 CMOS clock rollover test failed 109 03 C
84. low insertion force socket LPC Low pin count LSI large scale integration LSb LSB least significant bit least significant byte LUN logical unit SCSI m Meter MCH Memory controller hub MMX multimedia extensions MPEG Motion Picture Experts Group ms millisecond MSb MSB most significant bit most significant byte mux multiplex MVA motion video acceleration MVW motion video window n variable parameter value NIC network interface card controller NiMH nickel metal hydride NMI non maskable interrupt NRZI Non return to zero inverted ns nanosecond NT nested task flag NTSC National Television Standards Committee NVRAM non volatile random access memory OS operating system PAL 1 programmable array logic 2 phase altering line PC Internet Device PCA Printed circuit assembly PCI peripheral component interconnect PCM pulse code modulation PCMCIA Internet Device Memory Card International Association PF parity flag PIN personal identification number PIO Programmed POST power on self test PROM programmable read only memory PTR pointer RAM random access memory RAS row address strobe rcvr receiver RDRAM Direct Rambus DRAM RF resume flag RGB red green blue monitor input RH Relative humidity RIMM RDRAM inline memory module RMS root mean square ROM read only memory RPM revolutions per minute RTC real time clock Continued Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 1 5 Featuri
85. mode enable disable This option is not available under ACPI enabled operating systems Note Energy Saver Options will not appear if the energy saver mode is disabled Advanced Power On Options Allows user to set Advanced POST mode QuickBoot FullBoot or FullBoot users only every 1 30 days POST messages enable disable Safe POST enable disable F10 prompt enable disable F12 prompt enable disable Option ROM prompt enable disable Remote wakeup boot sequence remote server local hard drive After power loss off on If you connect your computer to an electric power strip and would like to turn on power to the computer using the switch on the power strip set this option to on Note If you turn off power to your computer using the switch on a power strip you will not be able to use the suspend sleep feature or the Remote Management features UUID Universal Unique Identifier enable disable Onboard Devices Allows you to set resources for or disable onboard System devices diskette controller serial port parallel port PCI Devices Lists currently installed PCI devices and their IRQ settings Allows you to reconfigure IRQ settings for these devices or to disable them entirely Continued 7 10 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Table 7 3 Setup Utility Functions Continued Heading Option Advanced Bus Options
86. of a 32 bit path AD31 00 lines that uses a multiplexed scheme for handling both address and data transfers A bus transaction consists of an address cycle and one or more data cycles with each cycle requiring a clock PCICLK cycle High performance is realized during burst modes in which a transaction with contiguous memory locations requires that only one address cycle be conducted and subsequent data cycles are completed using auto incremented addressing Four types of address cycles can take place on the PCI bus I O memory configuration and special Address decoding is distributed left up to each device on the PCI bus 4 2 11 I O and Memory Cycles For I O and memory cycles a standard 32 bit address decode AD31 0 for byte level addressing is handled by the appropriate PCI device For memory addressing PCI devices decode the AD31 2 lines for dword level addressing and check the AD1 0 lines for burst linear incrementing mode In burst mode subsequent data phases are conducted dword at a time with addressing assumed to increment accordingly four bytes at a time 4 2 1 2 Configuration Cycles Devices on the PCI bus must comply with PCI protocol that allows configuration of that device by software In this system configuration mechanism 1 as described in the PCI Local Bus specification Rev 2 1 is employed This method uses two 32 bit registers for initiating a configuration cycle for accessing the configuration space of a PC
87. or long word format In addition to the AC 97 link bus the audio controller provides a Sony Philips Digital Interface SPDIF output that is applied to the tip connection of the headphone line out jack The SPDIF signal format also known as IEC 958 is a stereo digital signal specification becoming common to consumer products 5 28 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 5 8 3 AC97 LINK BUS The audio controller and the audio codec communicate over a five signal AC97 Link Bus Figure 5 12 The AC97 Link Bus includes two serial data lines SD OUT SD IN that transfer control and PCM audio data serially to and from the audio codec using a time division multiplexed TDM protocol The data lines are qualified by a 12 288 MHz signal driven by the audio codec Data is transferred in frames synchronized by the 48 KHz SYNC signal which is derived from the clock signal and driven by the audio controller The SYNC signal is high during the frame s tag phase then falls during T17and remains low during the data phase frame consists of one 16 bit tag slot followed by twelve 20 bit data slots When asserted typically during a power cycle the RESET signal not shown will reset all audio registers to their default values T19 138 T39 12 288 MHz SYNC 48KHz
88. path from the audio controller to the audio codec as SD OUT data and is decoded and processed by the digital to analog converter DAC The codec supports simultaneous record and playback of stereo left and right audio The Sample Rate Generator may be set for sampling frequencies up to 48 KHz Analog audio may then be routed through 3D stereo enhancement processor or bypassed to the output selector SEL The integrated analog mixer provides the computer control console functionality handling multiple audio inputs Audio Format CDU Output Amps ET PB S 4 Data Audio Master S E DAC 4 4 E La 32 L Gain Mute 4 X Mic In l e R Rec ec Data Gain gt ADC Mute Gain Mute 97 l Link Bus Gain Mute Sample AC97 Audio cum ps Controller Mixer Gain Mute Gain Mute 1 1 Figure 5 11 54297 Audio Codec Functional Block Diagram inputs and outputs are two channel stereo except for the microphone input which is inputted as a single channel but mixed internally onto both left and right channels The microphone input is the d
89. s APM compliant BIOS and Magic Packet compliant hardware This environment is not dependent on operating system OS intervention allowing a unit plugged into a live AC outlet to be turned on remotely over the network 1 remote wake up even if the OS has not been installed In APM mode the controller will respond upon receiving a Magic Packet which is a packet where the node s address is repeated 16 times Upon Magic Packet reception the adapter asserts the PME signal on the PCI bus resulting in the system unit s power control logic turning on the system and initiating the boot sequence After the boot sequence the BIOS clears the PME signal so that subsequent wake up events will be detected ACPI ENVIRONMENT The Advanced Configuration and Power Interface ACPI functionality of system wake up is implemented through an ACPI compliant OS such as Windows NT 5 0 and is the default power management mode The following wake up events may be individually enabled disabled through the software driver supplied with the adapter Magic Packet Packet with node address repeated 16 times in data portion Individual address match Directed acket with matching user defined byte mask Multicast address match Directed packet with matching user defined sample frame address resolution protocol packet Flexible packet filtering Packets that match defined CRC signature NBT query under Ipv4 IPX Diagnostic
90. selected image s palette The splash screen image requirements are as follows Format Windows bitmap with 4 bit RLE encoding Size 424 width x 320 height pixels Colors 16 4 bits per pixel File Size 64 KB The Image Flash utility can be invoked at a command line for quickly flashing a known image as follows gt Flashi exe Image Filename Background Color Foreground Color The utility checks to insure that the specified image meets the splash screen requirements listed above or it will not be loaded into the ROM Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 7 3 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 7 BIOS ROM 7 3 7 3 1 7 3 2 BOOT FUNCTIONS The BIOS supports various functions related to the boot process including those that occur during the Power On Self Test POST routine BOOT DEVICE ORDER The default boot device order is as follows CD ROM drive EL Torito CD images Diskette drive Hard drive C Network boot Suppe The order can be changed in the ROM based Setup utility accessed by pressing F10 when so prompted during POST NETWORK BOOT F12 SUPPORT The BIOS supports booting the system to a network server The function is accessed by pressing the F12 key when prompted at the lower right hand corner of the display during POST Booting to a network server allows for such functions as Flashing a on
91. state Can remain in this state for up to 10 us Brought out of Nap only by command over the SIO serial bus Standby 250 mW MCH 20 ns Idle power state automatically entered after a transaction Available to receive row packets Transitions to Active or Nap state upon receipt of specific command on ROW bus Active 500 mW MCH Full power state Available to receive control packets and transmit or receive data packets NOTES 1 Per RDRAM device 2 Transition to Active state 3 3 4 RDRAM CONFIGURATION CONTROL The Rambus architecture employs a CMOS level serial bus SIO SCK CMD similar to that used on SDRAM equipped systems This bus is used for status and control of RDRAM configuration parameters as well as bringing RDRAM devices out of Powerdown and Nap states The SIO signal is bi directional and daisy chained through all RDRAM devices alternating from SIOO to SIO1 between devices The SCK and CMD signals are applied in parallel to all RDRAM devices The SCK signal operates at 1 MHz during configuration and at 100 MHz when commands are issued to switch RDRAM devices from Powerdown or Nap states 3 8 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide The memory controller and RDRAM are configured by BIOS during POST Refer to Chapter 8 for the configuration procedure perform
92. supports hot plugging of compatible devices making possible system configuration changes without powering down or even rebooting systems NOTE It is recommended to run the Windows 98 or later operating system when using USB peripherals especially a USB keyboard and USB mouse Problems may be encountered when using USB devices with a system running Windows 95 although some peripherals may operate satisfactorily As shown in Figure 5 7 the USB interface is provided by the 82801 ICH2 component and a USB hub component All models provide four series A USB ports on the rear panel For more information on the USB interface refer to the following web site http www usb org Rear Panel ig USB Port A VF 1 Tx Rx Data USB Port B Tx Rx Data USB Port C VF 2 Tx Rx Data USB Port D Figure 5 6 USB I F Block Diagram USB DATA FORMATS The USB I F uses non return to zero inverted NRZI encoding for data transmissions in which a 1 is represented by no change between bit times in signal level and a 0 is represented by a change in signal level Bit stuffing is employed prior to NRZI encoding so that in the event a string of 175 is transmitted normally resulting in a steady signal level a 0 is inserted after every six consecutive 1 s to ensure adequate signal transitions in the data stream 5 22 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring
93. the enabled disabled status Enable Disable Timer Based Request Enables or disables the BIOS s generation of global Standby and global Suspend requests based on inactivity timers 7 20 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 7 7 3 1 Staying Awake in APM There are two Time out to Standby timers used in APM the System Timer and the IDE had Drive Timer System Timer In POST the ROM enables a timer in the ICH2 that generates an SMI once per minute When the ROM gets the SMI it checks status bits in the ICH2 for activity at any of the following devices Keyboard Mouse Serial port s Parallel port IDE primary controller 9999 NOTE The secondary controller is NOT included in order to support auto sense of a CD ROM insertion auto run in case Windows or NT is running Note also that management of SCSI drives is the responsibility of the SCSI driver Any IDE hard drive access resets the hard drive timer If any of the activity status bits are set when the ROM gets the 1 minute SMI it resets its time out minute countdown according to the value 0 default 5 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 120 180 or 240 minutes selected in the Setup utility F10 IDE Hard Drive Timer During POST an inactivity timer in the IDE hard drive controller is set to control hard drive spin down This activity is indepe
94. the scanning process begins The keyboard processor includes a 16 byte FIFO buffer for holding scan codes until the system is ready to receive them Response and typematic codes are not buffered If the buffer is full 16 bytes held a 17 byte of a successive scan code results in an overrun condition and the overrun code replaces the scan code byte and any additional scan code data and the respective key strokes are lost Multi byte sequences must fit entirely into the buffer before the respective keystroke can be registered 2 Compaq Personal Computers Changed July 2000 Technical Reference Guide C 2 1 PS 2 TYPE KEYBOARD TRANSMISSIONS The PS 2 type keyboard sends two main types of data to the system commands or responses to system commands and keystroke scan codes Before the keyboard sends data to the system specifically to the 8042 type logic within the system the keyboard verifies the clock and data lines to the system If the clock signal is low 0 the keyboard recognizes the inhibited state and loads the data into a buffer Once the inhibited state is removed the data is sent to the system Keyboard to system transfers in the default mode consist of 11 bits as shown in Figure C 2 To pi Tche cock 11 4 Tht LSb MSb Start Dat Dat Dat Dat Dat Dat Dat Dat Parity Stop Data Bit a
95. to port 64h 2 Write each character of the password in 9 bit scan code translated format to port 60h 3 Write OOh to port 60h A6h Enable security This command places the 8042 in password lock mode following the A5h command The correct password must then be entered before further communication with the 8042 is allowed A7h Disable pointing device This command sets bit lt 5 gt of the 8042 command byte pulling the clock line of the pointing device interface low A8h Enable pointing device This command clears bit 5 of the 8042 command byte activating the clock line of the pointing device interface A9h Test the clock and data lines of the pointing device interface and place test results in the output buffer 00h No error detected 01h Clock line stuck low 02h Clock line stuck high 03h Data line stuck low 04h Data line stuck high AAh Initialization This command causes the 8042 to inhibit the keyboard and pointing device and places 55h into the output buffer ABh Test the clock and data lines of the keyboard interface and place test results in the output buffer 00h No error detected Oth Clock line stuck low 02h Clock line stuck high 03h Data line stuck low 04h Data line stuck high ADh Disable keyboard command sets bit lt 4 gt of the 8042 command byte AEh Enable keyboard command clears bit lt 4 gt of the 8042 command byte Rea
96. 0 1 0200002 0 enne enne J 3 TABLE J 2 MONITOR POWER MANAGEMENT 5 1 4 TABLE 1 3 DB 15 MONITOR CONNECTOR 1 5 TABLE K 1 ADAPTER K 8 TABLE L 1 SCSI HOST ADAPTER CARD CONTROL REGISTER 40 L 3 TABLE L 2 ULTRA SCSI HOST ADAPTER CARD 8 L 3 TABLE L 3 EXTERNAL 50 PIN ULTRA SCSI CONNECTOR L 4 TABLE L 4 INTERNAL 50 PIN ULTRA SCSI CONNECTOR nnne nnne L 5 TABLE L 5 ULTRA160 SCSI CONNECTOR eene enenemenennnen ener nnns nsns nsn ise nsns nsns nsns nsu L 6 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide This page is intentionally blank xvi Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 1 2 XXX XNNN NNX N NNNxxx Y L ABOUT THIS GUIDE This guide provides technical information about Compaq Deskpro Personal Computers that feature the Intel Pentium 4 processor and the Intel 850 chipset This document includes information regarding system design function and features that can be used by programmers engineers technicians and system administrators This guide and any
97. 0 52 71 1 9 5 5 72 4 6 6B FO 6B 6 6B na 6 73 5 4C CC 6 73 F0 73 6 73 na 6 74 6 4D CD 6 74 0 74 6 74 na 6 75 Shift left 2A AA 12 0 12 12 0 12 76 Z 2C AC 1A FO 1A 1A F0 1A 77 X 2D AD 22 0 22 22 F0 22 78 C 2E AE 21 0 21 21 F0 21 79 V 2F AF 2A F0 2A 2A F0 2A 80 B 30 BO 32 0 32 32 F0 32 Continued Notes listed at end of table Compaq Personal Computers C 13 Changed July 2000 Appendix Keyboard Table C 2 Keyboard Scan Codes Continued Key Make Break Codes Hex Pos Legend Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 81 N 31 B1 31 FO 31 31 F0 31 82 M 32 B2 83 33 B3 41 FO 41 41 0 41 84 34 B4 49 0 49 49 0 49 85 35 B5 4A FO 4A 4A F0 4A 86 Shift right 36 B6 59 F0 59 59 F0 59 87 EO 48 0 C8 EO 75 E0 FO 75 63 F0 63 EO AA EO 48 E0 EO 2A 4 EO FO 12 75 E0 FO 75 EO 12 5 2A EO 48 0 C8 AA 6 12 75 E0 75 FO 12 6 88 1 4 6 69 69 6 69 6 89 2 50 00 6 72 F0 72 6 72 na 6 90 3 51 D1 6 7AIFO 7A 6 7 6 91 Enter 1C E0 9C 79 FO 79 6 92 Ctrl left 1D 9D 14 0 14 11 0 11 93 Alt left 38 B8 11 FO 11 19 F0 19 94 Space 39 B9 29 F0 29 29 F0 29 95 Alt right 0 38 E0 B8 EO 11 0 EO 11 39 na 96 Ctrl right EO 1D EO 9D EO 14 0 EO 14 58 na
98. 00 C 5 RE C 4 NATIONAL 102 KEY KEYBOARD KEY 85 41 20122 ener C 5 C 5 U S ENGLISH WINDOWS 101 W KEv KEYBOARD KEY C 6 RE C 6 NATIONAL WINDOWS 102W KEY KEYBOARD KEY POSITIONS seen C 6 RE C 7 7 BUTTON EASY ACCESS KEYBOARD 0 00000000000000000 00808 C 7 C 8 8 BUTTON EASY ACCESS KEYBOARD 4 4 2 2 2 40200202 0 ener enne nennen C 7 REC 9 PS 2 KEYBOARD CABLE CONNECTOR C 16 RE C 10 USB KEYBOARD CABLE CONNECTOR MALE C 16 D 1 COMPAQ NVIDIA TNT2 PRO AGP GRAPHICS CARD P N 198998 B21 LAYOUT D 1 RE D 2 NVIDIA TNT2 PRO GRAPHICS CARD BLOCK 22 2 20 66 00000000011 D 2 RE D 3 VGA MONITOR CONNECTOR FEMALE DB 15 AS VIEWED FROM D 5 RE E 1 COMPAQ NVIDIA GEFORCE2 GTS AGP GRAPHICS CARD P N 179642 001 LAYOUT E 1 RE E 2 NVIDIA GEFORCE2 GTS GRAPHICS CARD BLOCK DIAGRAM E 2 RE E 3 VGA MONITOR CONNECTOR FEMALE DB 15 AS VIEWED FROM REAR E 5 RE E 4 FEATURE CONNECTOR 26 PIN HEADER ccccsesseceesseeeceessececsnececeeaececsesaeceeseeeceeaeeeceenaeeess E 6 RE F 1 COMPAQ LUCENT 90 56K PCI MODEM PCA 152972
99. 00 Appendix Compaq Lucent V 90 56K PCI Modem F 2 Card Edge Connector FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION The Compaq Lucent V 90 56K PCI modem provides data communication over a standard telephone network at transfer rates of up to 56 kilobits per second The modem also supports facsimile fax transfers at up to 14 4 kilobits per second Auto detection of operating speed and compression mode is also provided This modem is of the controllerless type meaning that while the UART DSP and DAA functions Figure F 2 are provided by hardware the operational functions are largely handled by the modem driver The modem driver is automatically loaded upon modem activity and automatically unloaded when the modem activity ceases 34 RJ 11 Connector PCI TX Data Bus 16550 PCI DAA CD yp art C DSP Circuitry RX Data Figure F 2 Compaq Lucent V 90 56K PCI Modem Block diagram The Compaq Lucent V 90 56K PCI Modem includes the following key features ITU T V 90 56 Kbs and K56Flex support w auto negotiation of mode 14400 bps send receive fax support ITU T V 42 error correction LAPM and MNP V 42bis and MNP Class 5 data compression TIA EIA 602 standard AT comment set 115 2 kbps UART speed PCI 2 2 compliant PC99 compliant ACPI power management support Windows 95 98 4 0 support 9 9 9 9 9 9 999 Modem operation begins when program in virtual ma
100. 00 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide Chapter 4 SYSTEM SUPPORT 4 1 INTRODUCTION This chapter covers subjects dealing with basic system architecture and covers the following topics PCI bus overview 4 2 page 4 2 AGP bus overview 4 3 page 4 10 System resources 4 4 page 4 15 System clock distribution 4 5 page 4 20 Real time clock and configuration memory 4 6 page 4 20 System management 4 7 page 4 31 Register map and miscellaneous functions 4 8 page 4 35 This chapter covers functions provided by off the shelf chipsets and therefore describes only basic aspects of these functions as well as information unique to the sytems covered in this guide For detailed information on specific components refer to the applicable manufacturer s documentation Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 4 1 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 4 System Support 4 2 4 2 PCI BUS OVERVIEW NOTE This section describes the PCI bus in general and highlights bus implementation in this particular system For detailed information regarding PCI bus operation refer to the PCI Local Bus Specification Revision 2 2 This system implements a 32 bit Peripheral Component Interconnect PCI bus spec 2 2 operating at 33 MHz The PCI bus handles address data transfers through the identifi
101. 00 Personal Computers vii Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide APPENDIX COMPAQ MATROX MILLENNIUM 6450 GRAPHICS INTRODUCTION ette eei e tr p EE o eite 1 H 2 FUNCTIONAL H 2 H 3 DISPLAY MODES nie ette te Pp e PEDE rre HAS e Erebi reete SES H 3 H 4 SOFTWARE SUPPORT INFORMATION 2 22220201000 0 000 000 4 H 5 POWER MANAGEMENT AND 4 CONNECTORS ence eite ertet ete D H 5 H 6 1 MONITOR CONNECTOR sese H 5 62 VIDEO FEATURE CONNECTOR nette iste pier ERE Een retenta H 6 APPENDIX I COMPAQ INTEL NETWORK INTERFACE CONTROLLER ADAPTERS 11 eas 1 1 1 2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION een elei pee ederet edes I 2 121 AOL FUNCTIONS eeiam 1 3 2 22 WAKE UP FUNCTIONS tiep ce eed I 3 L2 3 JPSEC PUNCTION e RUE test Endo I 4 L3 POWER MANAGEMENT 5 2 22 040422220404000 0000 nete treten nene I 5 131 ENVIRONMENT ptite notre e iere perpe the
102. 1 graphics subsystem 2 13 graphics 3D D 2 2 G 2 H 2 J 2 Hard drive activity indicator 4 39 Hub link bus 4 7 I O controller LPC47B34x 4 37 I O map 4 35 IDE interface 5 1 IDSEL 4 4 index addressing 1 2 interface audio 2 14 5 26 diskette drive 5 4 IDE 5 1 keyboard pointing device 5 16 parallel 2 12 5 11 serial 2 12 5 8 USB 2 12 5 22 interrupts maskable IRQn 4 15 nonmaskable NMI SMD 4 17 interrupts PCI 4 7 IPSEC I 4 K56Flex F 2 key keyboard functions C 8 keyboard C 1 keyboard micro processor C 2 keyboard layouts C 5 keyboard USB C 4 keyboards Easy Access C 7 keys Easy Access C 10 keys Windows C 9 LED indications 6 3 6 4 LED indications status 4 33 4 39 LED HD 4 39 LED network status K 2 LED Power 4 39 LEDs system board 6 3 Low Pin Count LPC Bus 4 7 low voltages 6 6 LPC bus 4 7 LPCA7B34x I O controller 4 37 mass storage 2 12 memory detection 7 5 memory map 3 9 memory system RAM 2 12 microphone 5 26 monitor power control D 4 E 4 G 4 H 4 J 4 mouse interface 5 18 network interface controller card I 1 network support 5 33 NIC card I 1 NLX card K 1 notational conventions 1 1 1 2 operational status indications LED 4 33 option ROM 4 7 options 2 3 packet Rambus 3 7 parallel interface 2 12 5 11 password clearing 4 21 password power on 4 31 PC600 700 800 3 6 PCI bus 4 2 PCI Configuration Space 4 5 PCI interrupts 4
103. 1 Type 0000 none 0001 Type 1 0010 Type 2 0011 3 0100 Type 4 0101 5 0110 Type 6 0111 Type 7 Primary Controller 1 Hard Drive 2 Type 0000 none 0001 Type 1 0010 Type 2 0011 3 0100 Type 4 0101 5 0110 Type 6 0111 Type 7 1000 Type 8 1001 Type 9 1010 Type 10 1011 Type 11 1100 Type 12 1101 Type 13 1110 Type 14 1111 other use bytes 19h 1000 Type 8 1001 Type 9 1010 Type 10 1011 11 1100 Type 12 1101 Type 13 1110 Type 14 1111 other use bytes 1Ah 4 24 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide Configuration Byte 13h Security Functions Default Value 00h Function QuickBlank Enable After Standby 0 Disable 1 Enable Administrator Password 0 Not present 1 Present Diskette Boot Enable 0 Enable 1 Disable 2 QuickLock Enable 0 Disable 1 Enable Network Server Mode Security Lock Override 0 Disable 1 Enable Password State Set by BIOS at Power up 0 Not set 1 Set Configuration Byte 14h Equipment Installed Default Value standard configuration 03h of Diskette Drives Installed 00 1 drive 10 2 3 drives 01 2 drives 11 4 drives Reserved 1 Coprocessor Present 0 Coprocessor not installed 1 Coprocessor installed Disk
104. 1000000000 2 1 FRONT CABINET VIEWS Pe EE 2 4 522220 peek deret 2 5 CHASSIS LAYOUT LEFT SIDE VIEW 11 21 12 000000000000000000000000 e 2 6 SYSTEM BOARD HAY OUT emiten enu RI ets 2 7 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE BLOCK 2 9 PROCESSOR ASSEMBLY AND 1 00 200200000100000000000000 2 10 PROCESSOR MEMORY SUBSYSTEM ARCHITECTURE eene ennemi seen 3 1 PENTIUM 4 PROCESSOR INTERNAL 0 1 1022520 0 600000000000 3 3 SDRAM RDRAM BANDWIDTH 0 0 00000 11 3 5 RAMBUS CHANNEL SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION AND KEY 3 6 RAMBUS TRANSACTIONS SINGLE 3 7 SYSTEM MEMORY serere tete teet etie dde ege e eerte o ed 3 9 PCI BUS DEVICES AND FUNCTIONS 4 2 CONFIGURATION CYCLE rici REPRE 4 4 PCI CONFIGURATION SPACE 2 14 2 21000000200000001000000000000000000000000000 4 5 PCI BUS CONNECTOR 32 BIT TYPE eene ener 4 9 AGP DATA TRANSFER PEAK TRANSFER RATE 266 4 11 AGP 2X DATA
105. 16188 001 Compag Intel PRO 100 S Management Adapter SP 215774 001 Each adapter card installs in a PCI slot to provide a system with network interface capability Unless otherwise indicated the following information applies to both adapter cards Speed LED WOL RJ 45 Connector Network Connector 80 825 Link Activity n di NIC LED NOTES PRO 100 Management Adapter 108897 PRO 100 S Management Adapter 213464 Figure I 1 Intel 100 or PRO 100 S Management Adapter Card Layout This appendix covers the following subjects Functional description 1 2 page 1 2 Power management 1 3 page I 4 Adapter programming 1 4 page I 5 Network connector 1 5 page I 6 Adapter specifications 1 6 page I 6 Compaq Personal Computers IH Original December 2000 Appendix Network Interface Controller Adapters I 2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION The Intel PRO 100 and the PRO 100 S Management Adapters are based on the Intel 82559 and 82550 Ethernet Controllers respectively supported by firmware in flash ROM Figure I 2 Each adapter can operate in half or full duplex modes and provides auto negotiation of both mode and speed Half duplex operation features an Intel proprietary collision reduction mechanism while full duplex operation follows the IEEE 802 3x flow control specification Transmit and receive FIFOs of three kilobytes each reduce the ch
106. 1920 x 1200 8 256 85 N A 1920 x 1200 16 65K 85 18 5 MB 1920 x 1200 32 16 7M 85 5 0 MB NOTE 1 Values reflect hardware capability May be restricted to lower frequency by operating system Compaq Personal Computers J 3 Original December 2000 Appendix 7 Compaq NVIDIA Quadro2 MXR Graphics Card 9 4 SOFTWARE SUPPORT INFORMATION The NVIDIA Quadro2 MXR graphics card is fully compatible with software written for legacy video modes VGA EGA CGA and needs no driver support for those modes Drivers are provided with or available for the card to provide extended mode support for the current operating systems and programming environments such as Windows 3 1 95 98 2000 ME Windows NT 4 0 3 51 Whistler Linux OS 2 Quick Draw MS Direct Draw and Direct X Direct 3D OpenGL 99999999 9 5 POWER MANAGEMENT AND CONSUMPTION This controller provides monitor power control for monitors that conform to the VESA display power management signaling DPMS protocol This protocol defines different power consumption conditions and uses the HSYNC and VSYNC signals to select a monitor s power condition Table J 2 lists the monitor power conditions Table J 2 Monitor Power Management Conditions HSYNC VSYNC Power Mode Description Active Active On Monitor is completely powered up If activated the inactivity counter counts down during system inactivity and if allowed to timeout generates an SMI to initiate the Suspend mode A
107. 2 9 with lines AO A1 and A10 defining the offset address of the control register Registers used for FIFO operations are accessed at their base address 400h 1 if configured for LPT1 then 3781 400h 778h The ECP mode includes several sub modes as determined by the Extended Control register Two submodes of ECP allow the parallel port to be controlled by software In these modes the FIFO is cleared and not used and DMA and RLE are inhibited 5 12 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 5 5 4 PARALLEL INTERFACE PROGRAMMING Programming the parallel interface consists of configuration which typically occurs during POST and control which occurs during runtime 5 5 4 1 Parallel Interface Configuration The parallel interface must be configured for a specific address range LPT1 LPT2 etc and also must be enabled before it can be used When configured for EPP or ECP mode additional considerations must be taken into account Address selection enabling and EPP ECP mode parameters of the parallel interface are affected through the PnP configuration registers of the LPC47B357 controller Address selection and enabling are automatically done by the BIOS during POST but can also be accomplished with the Setup utility and other software The parallel interface configuration registers are listed in the fo
108. 2 or 3 respectively The NMI Enable Register 070h lt 7 gt is used to enable disable the NMI signal Writing 80h to this register masks generation of the NMI Note that the lower six bits of register at I O port 70h affect RTC operation and should be considered when changing NMI generation status SMI Generation The SMI System Management Interrupt is typically used for power management functions When power management is enabled inactivity timers are monitored When a timer times out SMI is asserted and invokes the microprocessor s SMI handler The SMI handler works with the APM BIOS to service the SMI according to the cause of the timeout Although the SMI is primarily used for power managment the interrupt is also employed for the QuickLock QuickBlank functions as well 4 18 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 4 4 2 DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS Direct Memory Access DMA is a method by which a device accesses system memory without involving the microprocessor Although the DMA method has been traditionally used to transfer blocks of data to or from an ISA I O device PCI devices may also use DMA operation as well The DMA method reduces the amount of CPU interactions with memory freeing the CPU for other processing tasks NOTE This section describes DMA in general For detailed information regarding
109. 232 INTERFACE eret PR IER E EIE RR 5 8 5 4 2 SERIAL INTERFACE 2 95 5 9 5 5 PARALLEL INTERFACE eurem BEBE ESSI IRE eR 5 11 5 5 1 STANDARD PARALLEL PORT MODE eerte rennen 5 11 5 5 2 ENHANCED PARALLEL PORT 5 12 5 5 3 EXTENDED CAPABILITIES PORT MODE 5 12 5 5 4 PARALLEL INTERFACE eene nennen nennen 5 13 5 5 5 PARALLEL INTERFACE 5 15 iv Compaq Deskpro EXS Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 5 6 KEYBOARD POINTING DEVICE eren nennen nennen 5 16 5 6 1 KEYBOARD INTERFACE 5 16 5 6 2 POINTING DEVICE INTERFACE OPERATION eene eee 5 18 5 6 3 KEYBOARD POINTING DEVICE INTERFACE 5 18 5 6 4 KEYBOARD POINTING DEVICE INTERFACE CONNECTOR 5 21 57 UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS 5 22 5 7 1 USB DATA FORMATS e Ree Renee ee e 5 22 5 7 2 USB PROGRAMMING e tr Rie ERR DERE nes 5 24 3 7 3 USB CONNECTOR disset tete Ucet cR ERR YEA EE eee 5 25 5 7 4 USB CABLE DATA enar et eee iet be ties aii dies 5 25 5 8 AUDIO SUBSYSTEM teet ed OC ee dede pee e meets 5 26 5 8 1 FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS
110. 4 VIDEO IN CONNECTOR E 6 TABLE F 1 OPERATIONAL MODEG cccsesccceesssceceessececesscececseeeceesueeecessececseeecsesseeccnssseecenseeeesenseeecsesseeens 3 TABLE G 1 ELSA GLORIA II GRAPHICS DISPLAY 8 0 0 G 3 TABLE G 2 MONITOR POWER MANAGEMENT 8 44000 2 01 00000000000000000000000000000 G 4 TABLE G 3 DB 15 MONITOR CONNECTOR 2 220 2 00000000000000000000020 00 nts eterna rear nennen G 5 TABLE G 4 VIDEO IN CONNECTOR G 6 xiv Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide TABLE H 1 MATROX MILLENNIUM G450 GRAPHICS DISPLAY MODES H 3 TABLE H 2 MONITOR POWER MANAGEMENT nsns ese s nsns enun H 4 TABLE H 3 DB 15 MONITOR CONNECTOR H 5 TABLE H 4 VIDEO IN CONNECTOR H 6 1 1 NIC CONTROLLER PCI CONFIGURATION 5 1 6 TABLE T2 NIC CONTROE ettet ree ee cct o eee toc ote 1 6 TABLE I 3 ADAPTER OPERATING SPECIFICATIONS 1 7 TABLE 1 1 NVIDIA QUADRO2 MXR GRAPHICS DISPLAY MODES 0
111. 4 4 SYSTEM MEMORY ertet e RETE Erie qe eb 2 12 2 4 5 MASS STORAGE eene nA eU REED ENS 2 12 2 4 6 SERIAL PARALLEL rtr teeth hen reeni 2 12 2 4 7 UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS INTERFACE eene eene 2 12 2 4 8 GRAPHICS SUBSYSTEM 2 t 2 13 2 4 9 AUDIO SSUBSYSTEM aes mede emi bete is 2 14 2 5 SPECIFICATIONS pre beo RERIGO I re torte 2 14 CHAPTER 3 PROCESSOR MEMORY SUBSYSTEM 2 1 2 21 sine 3 1 INTRODUCTION 2 neon 3 1 32 PENTIUM 4 PROCESSOR ip e e RR RE DR Ep OPE DERE RERO P 3 2 32 1 PROCESSOR OVERVIEW cette docct tust ere ier P eb 3 2 3 2 2 5 5 eines 3 4 3 3 MEMORY SUBSYSTEM je coche Seis eet Bele ea eine aa ee 3 5 3 3 1 RAMBUS ATTRIBUTES eter te Re HEURE de 3 6 3 3 2 RAMBUS CHANNEL TRANSACTIONS 3 7 3 3 3 RDRAM POWER MANAGEMENT eren eene trennen nenne ene ene 3 8 3 3 4 RDRAM CONFIGURATION CONTROL eterne nennen rennen enne 3 8 34 SUBSYSTEM CONFIGURATION three tenerte reir 3 10 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers iii Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide CHAPTER 4 SYSTEM 8 1 2 2042
112. 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide Configuration Byte 2Dh Additional Flags Default Value 00h Bit Function Memory Test 0 Test memory on power up only 1 Test memory on warm boot POST Error Handling BIOS Defined 0 Display Press F1 to Continue on error 1 Skip F1 message Reserved Configuration Byte 2Eh 2Fh Checksum These bytes hold the checksum of bytes 10h to 2Dh Configuration Byte 30h 31h Total Extended Memory Tested This location holds the amount of system memory that checked good during the POST Configuration Byte 32h Century This location holds the Century value in a binary coded decimal BCD format Configuration Byte 33h Miscellaneous Flags Default Value 80h Memory Above 640 KB 0 No 1 Yes 6 Weitek Numeric Coprocessor Present 0 Not installed 1 Installed Standard Numeric Coprocessor Present 0 Not installed 1 Installed Reserved Configuration Byte 34h International Language Support Default Value 00h Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 4 29 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 4 System Support Configuration Byte 35h APM Status Flags Default Value 11h Power Conservation State 00 Ready 01 Standby 10 Suspend 11 Off 32 bit Connection 0 Disconnected 1 Connected 16 bit Connection 0 Disconnected 1 Connected Real Mode
113. 41333 40000 38667 37333 36000 34667 33333 32000 30667 29333 28000 bps ITU T V 34Annex12 Data 33600 31200 bps ITU T V 34 Data 28800 26400 24000 21600 19200 16800 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 bps ITU T V 32bis Data 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 bps ITU T V 32 Data 9600 4800 bps ITU T V 17 Group 3 Fax 14400 12000 bps ITU T V 29 Group 3 Fax 9600 7200 bps ITU T V 27ter Group 3 Fax 4800 2400 bps ITU T V 22bis Data 2400 bps ITU T V 23 Data 1200 75 bps ITU T V 22 Data 1200 bps ITU T V 21 Group 3 Fax 300 bps BELL 212A Data 1200 baud BELL 102 Data 300 baud NOTE For 56K operation to occur with this device the following criteria must be met Distant end modem must support 56K modem technology and be digitally terminated Transmission path must contain no more than one analog to digital conversion The criteria for 56K operation see note under table F 1 are likely to be met when connecting to an internet service provider ISP through a local phone number Note also that the 56K transfer rate applies only to receive data 1 downloads Data will be transmitted uploaded at a maximum rate of 33 6 Kb s Compaq Personal Computers F 3 Original December 2000 Appendix Compaq Lucent 90 56K PCI Modem F 4 F 4 1 F 4 2 F 5 F 6 POWER MANAGEMENT The modem supports both APM and ACPI power management environments using methods defined in t
114. 51 KHz to 48 KHz Resolution 16 bit Nominal Input Voltage Mic In w 20 db gain 0 1 Vrms Line In 1 0 Vrms Impedance Mic In 1 K ohms nom Line In 10 K ohms min Line Out codec output 730 ohms Signal to Noise Ratio input to Line Out 70 db nom Max Power Output with 1096 THD 3 watts into 16 ohms Input Gain Attenuation Range 46 5 db Master Volume Range 94 5 db Frequency Response Codec 20 20 KHz Speaker 450 4000 Hz 5 32 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 5 9 5 9 1 5 9 2 Technical Reference Guide NETWORK SUPPORT These systems include specific features to support network interface PCI cards that may be installed These features including network alert functions with system off support are described in the following subsections PCI VER 2 2 SUPPORT These systems support the Power Management Event PME signal and provided 3 3 VDC auxiliary power for all PCI slots Network interface cards compliant with PCI specification ver 2 2 may be installed to providE system off network support without additional cable connections In a powered down state the compliant network card receives 3 3 volts of auxiliary DC power on pin 14 of the PCI connector and uses PCI pin A19 for the PME signal that is routed to general purpose input 13 of the LPC47B357 I O controller Network activity causing the NIC card to assert
115. 6 7M 85 Hz Primary 800 x 600 32 16 7M 85 Hz Primary Secondary 1024 x 768 8 256 85 Hz Primary 1024 x 768 16 65K 85 Hz Primary Secondary 1024 x 768 24 16 7M 85 Hz Primary 1024 x 768 32 16 7M 85 Hz Primary Secondary 1152 x 864 8 256 75 Hz Primary 1152 x 864 16 65K 75 Hz Primary Secondary 1152 x 864 24 16 7M 75 Hz Primary 1152 x 864 32 16 7M 75 Hz Primary Secondary 1280 x 960 8 256 85 Hz Primary 1280 x 960 16 65K 85 Hz Primary Secondary 1280 x 960 24 16 7M 85 Hz Primary 1280 x 960 32 16 7M 85 Hz Primary Secondary 1280 x 1024 8 256 85 Hz Primary 1280 x 1024 16 65K 85 Hz Primary Secondary 1280 x 1024 24 16 7M 85 Hz Primary 1280 x 1024 32 16 7M 85 Hz Primary Secondary 1600 x 1200 8 256 85 Hz Primary 1600 x 1200 16 65K 85 Hz Primary Secondary 1600 x 1200 24 16 7M 85 Hz Primary 1600 x 1200 32 16 7M 85 Hz Primary Secondary 1800 x 1440 8 256 85 Hz Primary 1800 x 1440 16 65K 85 Hz Primary 1800 x 1440 24 16 7M 85 Hz Primary 1856 x 1392 8 256 85 Hz Primary 1856 x 1392 16 65K 85 Hz Primary 1856 x 1392 24 16 7M 85 Hz Primary 1920 x 1440 8 256 85 Hz Primary 1920 x 1440 16 65K 85 Hz Primary 1920 x 1440 24 16 7M 85 Hz Primary 2048 x 768 8 256 75 Hz Primary 2048 x 768 16 65K 75 Hz Primary NOTE 1 Value reflects hardware capabilities only May be restricted by operating system Compaq Personal Computers H 3 Original November 2000 Appendix Compaq Matrox Millennium G450 Graphics H 4 SOFTWARE SUPPOR
116. 7 PAD15 CBE1 08 GNT REQ PAD24 PAD25 VDDQ VDDQ 09 VDD3 VDD3 GND GND PAD13 PAD14 10 ST1 STO AD STB1 AD STB1 PAD11 PAD12 11 Reserved ST2 CBE3 PAD23 GND GND 12 PIPE RBF VDDQ VDDQ PADO9 PAD10 13 GND GND PAD22 PAD 1 CBEO PADO8 14 WBF Reserved PAD20 PAD19 VDDQ VDDQ 15 SBA1 SBAO GND GND AD STBO AD STBO 16 VDD3 VDD3 PAD18 PAD17 PADO6 PADO7 17 SBA3 SBA2 PAD16 CBE2 GND GND 18 SB STB SB VDDQ VDDQ PADO4 PADO5 19 GND GND FRAME IRDY PADO2 PAD03 20 SBA5 SBA4 KEY KEY VDDQ VDDQ 21 SBA7 DBA6 KEY KEY PADOO PADO1 22 Reserved Reserved KEY KEY VREFGC VREFCG NOTES NC Not connected VDDQ 1 5 VDC as determined by system board grounding of Type Det signal 02 4 14 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 4 4 SYSTEM RESOURCES This section describes the availability and basic control of major subsystems otherwise known as resource allocation or simply system resources System resources are provided on a priority basis through hardware interrupts and DMA requests and grants 4 4 1 INTERRUPTS The microprocessor uses two types of hardware interrupts maskable and nonmaskable A maskable interrupt can be enabled or disabled within the microprocessor by the use of the STI and CLI instructions nonmaskable interrupt cannot be masked off within the microprocessor although it may be inhibited by hardware or s
117. 8086h 2442h 0 31 1Fh 2 SMBus Controller 8086h 2443h 0 31 1Fh 3 USB I F 2 8086h 2444h 0 31 1Fh 4 AC97 Audio Controller 1 8086h 2445h 0 31 1Fh 5 AC97 Modem Controller 1 8086h 2446h 0 31 1Fh 6 Network Interface Controller 1 8086h 2449h 2 2 8 08h 0 ES1373 Audio Controller 1274h 1373h 2 2 31 1Fh 0 AD22 PCI Connector 1 PCI slot 1 3 2 2 4 04h 0 AD20 PCI Connector 2 CI slot 2 3 2 2 9 09h 0 AD25 PCI Connector 3 PCI slot 3 3 2 2 10 0Ah 0 AD26 PCI Connector 3 PCI slot 4 3 2 2 11 0Bh 0 027 3 810 5 3 2 2 13 0 029 NOTES 1 Not implemented on these systems 2 Value in standard configuration Can change if an AGP card with an additional bridge is installed 3 Card specific Refer to appendices 4 4 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Configuration Space Header Technical Reference Guide The register index CF8h bits lt 7 2 gt identifies the 32 bit location within the configuration space of the PCI device to be accessed PCI devices can contain up to 256 bytes of configuration data Figure 4 3 of which the first 64 bytes comprise the configuration space header 31 24 23 16 15 8 7 0 Device Specific Area Min Lat Min GNT Int Pin Int Line Reserved Reserved Expansion ROM Base Address Subsystem ID Su
118. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SOURCES eene ener 1 1 1 2 MODEL NUMBERING 1 1 1 3 NOTATIONAL CONVENTIONS essent ennt net eene 1 2 1 3 1 VA UES SMEs eade 1 2 1 3 2 RANGES EE 1 2 1 3 3 SIGNAL EABELS ice a n d RR RU nitet 1 2 1 3 4 REGISTER NOTATION AND USAGE 1 2 1 3 5 NOTATION eret nee tenenda 1 2 14 COMMON ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS eee eene 1 3 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM 121 1 22 2 2 2 tata sae ta 2 1 INTROD UZCTION 5 2 Bae Ah BSG ore i ete Sees 2 1 2 2 FEATURES AND OPTIONS eie epe eee eee REC 2 2 2 2 1 STANDARD FEATURES 2 2 2 2 2 OPTIONS 2 3 232 MECHANICAL DESIGN eet emn e emet eg tete ttn 2 4 2 3 1 oder ete ERA PP e tei 2 4 2 3 2 CHASSIS DAY OUT aiit t ie DOE REFS EHE 2 6 2 3 3 BOARD LAYOUT ket Et dien CU RU ruentes 2 7 244 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE oe eo e e t eite a ech d Ee INN 2 8 2 4 1 PENTIUM 4 PROCESSOR 5 eite pedea Es eius 2 10 2 4 2 CHIPSET EE DR Oe POR peret 2 11 2 4 3 adiicere cete sederet 2 11 2
119. AMDAC 32 bit Z stencil buffer eliminates hidden screen portions for faster loading 32 bit color for increased image quality 30 fps full screen DVD playback Dual monitor support with a PCI graphics card 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 D 2 Compaq Personal Computers Original July 2000 Technical Reference Guide D 3 DISPLAY MODES The graphics display modes supported by the NVIDIA TNT2 Pro Graphics are listed in Table D 1 Table D 1 NVIDIA TNT2 Pro Graphics Display Modes Resolution Bits per pixel Color Depth Max Refresh Frequency Hz 640 x 480 8 256 85 640 x 480 16 65K 85 640 x 480 24 16 7M 85 800 x 600 8 256 85 800 x 600 16 65K 85 800 x 600 24 16 7M 85 1024 x 768 8 256 85 1024 x 768 16 65K 85 1024 x 768 24 16 7M 85 1152 x 864 8 256 85 1152 x 864 16 65K 85 1152 x 864 24 16 7M 85 1280 x 1024 8 256 85 1280 x 1024 16 65K 85 1280 x 1024 24 16 7M 85 1600 x 1200 8 256 85 1600 x 1200 16 65K 85 1600 x 1200 24 16 7M 85 1800 x 1440 8 256 85 1800 x 1440 16 65K 85 1800 x 1440 24 16 7M 85 1920 x 1080 8 256 85 1920 x 1080 16 65K 85 1920 x 1080 24 16 7M 85 1920 x 1200 8 256 75 Compaq Personal Computers D 3 Original July 2000 Appendix Compaq NVIDIA TNT2 Pro Graphics 0 4 SOFTWARE SUPPORT INFORMATION The NVIDIA TNT2 Pro graphics card is fully compatible with software written for legacy video modes VGA EGA CGA and needs no driver support for tho
120. ANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 7 17 7 7 1 INDEPENDENT PM 8 7 17 77 2 ACPISUPBPORT eis ee ee edm 7 19 7 1 3 APM 1 27 SUPPORT POST 7 19 7 8 USB LEGACY SUPPORT epi eb be eni ee eo ea 7 23 A APPENDIX A ERROR MESSAGES AND 8 2 1 2 2 sins JINTRODUCIION ied 1 A2 BEEP KEYBOARD LED CODES eet pe ERG RO ER Ts 1 POWER ON SELF TEST POST 55 5 02 A 2 4 SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES 1XX XX A 3 A 5 MEMORY ERROR MESSAGES 2 4 KEYBOARD ERROR MESSAGES 0 4 7 PRINTER ERROR MESSAGES 4 A 5 A 8 VIDEO GRAPHICS ERROR MESSAGES A 5 9 DISKETTE DRIVE ERROR MESSAGES A 6 A 10 SERIAL INTERFACE ERROR MESSAGES 11 A 6 11 MODEM COMMUNICATIONS ERROR MESSAGES 12 7 A 12 SYSTEM STATUS ERROR MESSAGES 16 A 8 A 13 HARD DRIVE ERROR MESSAGES A 8 14 HARD DRIVE ERROR MESSAGES 19
121. Bh Sec Master Latency Timer 00h 02 03h Device ID 2532h 1Ch Base Address FOh 04 05h Command 0000h 1Dh Limit Address 00h 06 07h Status 0020h 1E 1Fh Sec PCI PCI Status 02A0h 08h Revision ID 00h 20 21h Memory Base Address FFFOh OBh Class Code 0406h 22 23h Memory Limit Address 0000h 01h 24 25h Prefetch Mem Base Addr FFFOh 18h Primary Bus Number 00h 26 27h Prefetch Mem Limit Addr 0000h 19h Secondary Bus Number 00h 3Eh Bridge Control 00h 1Ah Subordinate Bus Number 00h 3F FFh Reserved 00h NOTE Assume unmarked locations gaps as reserved Refer to Intel documentation for detailed register descriptions The AGP graphics adapter actually its resident controller is configured as a standard PCI device Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 4 13 Chapter 4 System Support 4 3 3 AGP CONNECTOR A1 A41 A46 A66 B1 B41 B46 B66 Figure 4 8 1 5 Volt AGP Bus Connector Table 4 6 AGP Bus Connector Pinout Pin ASignal B Signal A Signal B Signal 01 412 GND GND KEY KEY 02 Type Det 5 0 VDC Reserved VDD3 Aux TRDY DEVSEL 03 Reserved 5 0 VDC VDD3 VDD3 STOP VDDQ 04 USB USB PAD30 PAD31 PME PERR 05 GND GND PAD28 PAD29 GND GND 06 INTA INTB VDD3 VDD3 PAR SERR 07 RESET CLK PAD26 PAD2
122. C47B357 Controller Keyboard Diskette 1 i i Mouse 1 vl 5 33 2 32 Bit PCI Bus Subsystem Intel PRO 100 Power Mgmt Supply PCI Slot 5 Adapter Card Slot 3 E Some Deskpro Workstation 300 models Some Deskpro EXS models Figure 2 6 System Architecture Block diagram Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 2 9 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 2 System Overview 2 4 4 PENTIUM 4 PROCESSOR These systems feature the Intel Pentium 4 processor featuring Intel s NetBurst Micro Architecture This processor is backward compatible with software written for the Pentium Pentium MMX Pentium Pro Pentium and x86 microprocessors Key features of the Pentium 4 processor include Hyper Pipelined Technology for higher performance Rapid Execution Engine with increased throughput and reduced latency Quad pumped Front Side Bus FSB for balanced performance with RDRAM Execution Trace Cache for more efficient branch handling Improved dynamic execution for higher efficiency Additional Streaming SIMD Extensions SSE2 for increased video audio and speech processing full speed 256 KB ECC second level cache 99999 These systems emp
123. Command 0000h 2C 2Dh Subsystem Vender ID 0000h 06 07h PCI Status 0280h 2E 2Fh Subsystem ID 0000h 08h Revision ID 00h 30 3Fh Reserved 05 09h Programming 80h 40 43h Pri Sec IDE Timing 05 Sub Class 01h 44h Slave IDE Timing 00h OBh Base Class Code Oth 48h Sync DMA Control 00h ODh Master Latency Timer 00h 4A 4Bh Sync DMA Timing 0000h 00h 54h EIDE Config Register 00h NOTE Assume unmarked gaps are reserved and or not used 5 2 1 2 IDE Bus Master Control Registers The IDE interface can perform PCI bus master operations using the registers listed in Table 5 2 These registers occupy 16 bytes of variable I O space set by software and indicated by PCI configuration register 20h in the previous table Table 5 2 IDE Bus Master Control Registers Addr Size Default Offset Bytes Register Value 00h 1 Bus Master IDE Command Primary 00h 02h 1 Bus Master IDE Status Primary 00h 04h 4 Bus Master IDE Descriptor Pointer Pri 0000 0000h 08h 1 Bus Master IDE Command Secondary 00h OAh 2 Bus Master IDE Status Secondary 00h OCh 4 Bus Master IDE Descriptor Pointer Sec 0000 0000h NOTE Unspecified gaps are reserved will return indeterminate data and should not be written to 5 2 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 5 2 2 IDE CONNECTOR This system us
124. Compaq NVIDIA TNT2 Pro Graphics This page is intentionally blank D 6 Compaq Personal Computers Original July 2000 Technical Reference Guide Appendix E COMPAQ NVIDIA GeForce2 GTS AGP GRAPHICS CARD INTRODUCTION This appendix describes the Compaq NVIDIA GeForce2 GTS AGP Graphics Card used in the standard configuration on some models and also available as an option This card layout shown in the following figure installs a system s AGP slot The Compaq NVIDIA GeForce2 GTS graphics card P N 189998 B21 provides high 2D performance as well as 3D capabilities Feature Connector SDRAM RGB Monitor Connector NVIDIA NV15 Controller SDRAM Figure 1 Compaq NVIDIA GeForce2 GTS AGP Graphics Card P N 179642 001 Layout This appendix covers the following subjects Functional description D 2 page D 2 Display modes D 3 page D 3 Software support information D 4 page D 4 Monitor power management D 5 page D 4 Connectors D 6 page D 5 Compaq Personal Computers E 1 Original November 2000 Appendix Compaq NVIDIA GeForce2 GTS Graphics E 2 Card Edge Connector FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION The NVIDIA GeForce2 GTS SD Graphics Card provides high performance 2D and 3D display imaging The card s AGP design provides an economical approach to 3D processing by off loading 3D effects such as t
125. Connection 0 Disconnected 1 Connected Power Management Enable 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Configuration Byte 36h ECC POST Test Single Bit Errors Default Value 01h 7 Row 7 Error Detect Row6ErrorDetect Row 6 Error Detect Row 5 Error Detect 0 No single bit error detected 1 Single bit error detected Configuration Byte 37h 3Fh Power On Password These eight locations hold the power on password 4 30 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 47 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT This section describes functions having to do with security power management temperature and overall status These functions are handled by hardware and firmware BIOS and generally configured through the Setup utility 4 7 1 SECURITY FUNCTIONS These systems include various features that provide different levels of security Note that this subsection describes only the hardware functionality including that supported by Setup and does not describe security features that may be provided by the operating system and application software 4 7 1 1 Power On Password These systems include a power on password which may be enabled or disabled cleared through a jumper on the system board The jumper controls a GPIO input to the 82801 ICH that is checked during POST The password is stored in configuration memory CMOS and i
126. DMA enable active high lt 2 gt Reset active low lt 1 0 gt Drive select 00 Drive 1 01 Drive 2 10 Reserved 11 Tape drive 3F3h 3731 Tape Drive Register available for compatibility R W 3F4h 374h Main Status Register MSR R lt 7 gt Request for master host can transfer data active high lt 6 gt Transfer direction 0 write 1 read lt 5 gt non DMA execution active high lt 4 gt Command busy active high lt 3 2 gt Reserved lt 1 0 gt Drive 1 2 busy active high lt 7 gt Software reset active high lt 6 gt Low power mode enable active high lt 5 gt Reserved 0 lt 4 2 gt Precompensation select default 000 lt 1 0 gt Data rate select 00 500 Kb s 01 300 Kb s 10 250 Kb s 11 2 1 Mb s 3F5h 375h Data Register R W lt 7 0 gt Data 3F6h 376h Reserved 3F7h 377h Digital Input Register DIR R lt 7 gt DSK CHG status records opposite value of pin lt 6 0 gt Reserved 0 Contiguration Control Register lt 7 2 gt Reserved lt 1 0 gt Data rate select 00 500 Kb s 01 300 Kb s 10 250 Kb s 11 2 1 Mb s NOTE The most recently written data rate value to either DRSR or CCR will be in effect 5 6 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 5 3 2 DISKETTE DRIVE CONNECTOR This system uses a standard 34 pin con
127. EB 5 140 8 1 172 204 236 141 8D i 173 AD i 205 CD 237 ED 142 8E 174 206 T 238 EE 143 175 207 239 EF 144 90 176 208 L 240 FO 145 91 177 209 T 241 F1 146 92 178 B2 210 02 I 242 F2 2 147 93 6 179 B3 211 D3 243 F3 ES 148 94 180 84 212 D4 L 244 F4 149 95 5 181 5 213 D5 245 F5 150 96 182 B6 1 214 D6 T 246 F6 151 97 183 B7 1 215 D7 1 247 F7 x 152 98 y 184 B8 J 216 D8 248 F8 153 99 185 9 d 217 4 249 F9 154 9A 186 BA 218 250 FA 155 9B 187 1 219 DB i 251 FB N 156 9C 188 d 220 DC 252 n 157 9D 189 BD 1 221 DD 253 FD 2 158 9E 190 4 222 254 FE 159 9F f 191 BF 1 223 DF 255 FF Blank NOTES 1 Symbol not displayed Keystroke Guide Dec Keystroke s 0 Ctrl 2 1 26 Ctrl A thru Z respectively 27 Ctrl 28 Ctrl 29 Ctrl 30 Ctrl 6 31 Ctrl 32 Space Bar 33 43 Shift and key w corresponding symbol 44 47 Key w corresponding symbol 48 57 Key w corresponding symbol numerical keypad w Num Lock active 58 Shift and key w corresponding symbol 59 Key w corresponding symbol 60 Shift and key w corresponding symbol 61 Key w corresponding symbol 62 64 Shift and key w corresponding symbol 65 90 Shift and key w corresponding symbol or key w corresponding symbol and Caps Lock active 91 93 Key w corresponding symbol 94 95 Shift and key w corresponding symbol
128. FUNCTION 0 4 8 TABLE 4 4 PCI BUS CONNECTOR PINOUT ccccsessscecececeesessecececececsecaececececsensaaeseeececsensaaececececeeseneaeees 4 9 TABLE 4 5 PCI AGP BRIDGE CONFIGURATION REGISTERS FUNCTION 1 4 13 TABLE 4 6 AGP BUS CONNECTOR 40 4 4 0 4 14 TABLE 4 7 MASKABLE INTERRUPT PRIORITIES AND 8 4 16 TABLE 4 8 MASKABLE INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTERS 4 17 TABLE 4 9 DEFAULT CHANNEL ASSIGNMENTS AND REGISTER I O PORTS 4 19 TABLE 4 10 CLOCK GENERATION AND DISTRIBUTION eere 4 20 TABLE 4 11 CONFIGURATION MEMORY CMOS nn nes 4 22 TABLE 4 12 SYSTEM BOOT ROM FLASH STATUS LED INDICATIONS eese enne 4 33 TABLE 4 13 SYSTEM OPERATIONAL STATUS LED INDICATIONS eere ener nnne 4 33 TABLE 4 14 SYSTEMI O ehe terree ee terere 4 35 TABLE 4 15 82801 ICH GPIO REGISTER UTILIZATION DESKTOP AND MINITOWER ONLY 4 36 TABLE 4 16 LPCA7B357 CONTROL 5 8 4 37 TABLE 4 17 LPCA7B357 GPIO REGISTER UTILIZATION DESKTOP AND MINITOWER ONLY 4 38 TABLE 5 1 IDE PCI CONFIGURATION REGISTERS cccsessssscecececsessseececececeesssaeceeececeeseseseseceesenenseaeeeesens 5 2 TABLE 5 2 IDE BUS MASTER CONTROL REGI
129. GND Ground 16 GND Ground GND Ground 17 TERMPWR Termination Power TERMPWR Termination Power 18 TERMPWR Termination Power TERMPWR _ Termination Power 19 GND Ground Int Out Interrupt Out 20 GND Ground SBRST Burst 21 GND Ground ATN Attention 22 GND Ground GND Ground 23 GND Ground BSY Busy 24 GND Ground ACK Acknowledge 25 GND Ground RESET Reset 26 GND Ground MSG Message Activity 27 GND Ground SEL Select 28 GND Ground C D Control Data Transfer Indicator 29 GND Ground REQ Request 30 GND Ground Input Output Indicator 31 GND Ground DB8 Data Bit 8 32 GND Ground DB9 Data Bit 9 33 GND Ground DB10 Data Bit 10 34 GND Ground DB11 Data Bit 11 L 6 Compaq Personal Computers Original December 2000 INDEX 3D effects D 2 2 6 2 H 2 J 2 abbreviations 1 3 AC97 link bus 5 29 Accelerated Graphics Port AGP 4 10 ACPI I 5 K 5 acronyms 1 3 AGP 4 10 Alert On LAN 5 33 AOL 5 33 AOL requirements 5 34 5 36 APIC 4 16 I 5 K 5 APM BIOS support 7 19 arbitration PCI bus master 4 6 ASCII character set B 1 audio 5 26 audio controller AC97 5 28 audio subsystem 2 14 backplane 2 6 battery replacement 4 20 BIOS ROM 7 1 blinking LED 6 4 boot block ROM 7 2 boot status 4 33 cable lock 4 32 Celeron processor 2 10 chipsets 2 11 Client Management 7 12 clock generation 4 20 CMOS 4 20 CMOS archive 4 22 CMOS clearing 4 21 CMOS restoring 4 22 codec audio 5 30 Configuration Cycle 4 4
130. GND Ground GND Ground 15 GND Ground GND Ground 16 GND Ground ATN Attention 17 GND Ground GND Ground 18 GND Ground BSY Busy 19 GND Ground ACK Acknowledge 20 GND Ground SBRST Burst 21 GND Ground MSG Message Activity 22 GND Ground SEL Select 23 GND Ground C D Control Data Transfer Indicator 24 GND Ground REQ Request 25 GND Ground Input Output Indicator L 4 Compaq Personal Computers Original December 2000 L 5 2 INTERNAL 50 ULTRA SCSI CONNECTOR Technical Reference Guide The card provides one internal 50 pin header type Ultra SCSI connector Internal cabling to this connector should consists of an unshielded connector with a 50 conductor flat cable as specified in ANSI standard X3T9 2 375R Figure L 4 Internal 50 Pin Ultra SCSI Connector Pin 49 Pin 50 Pin 1 Pin 2 Table L 4 Internal 50 Pin Ultra SCSI Connector Pinout Pin Signal Function Pin Signal Function 1 GND Ground 2 DBO Data Bit 0 3 GND Ground 4 DB1 Data Bit 1 5 GND Ground 6 DB2 Data Bit 2 7 GND Ground 8 DB3 Data Bit 3 9 GND Ground 10 DB4 Data Bit 4 11 GND Ground 12 DB5 Data Bit 5 13 GND Ground 14 086 Data Bit 6 15 GND Ground 16 DB7 Data Bit 7 17 GND Ground 18 DBP Data Bus Pulse 19 GND Ground 20 GND Ground 21 GND Ground 22 CS Cable Sense 23 Open Open 24 Open Open 25 Open Open 26 TERMPWR _ Termination Power
131. Hz 47 63 Hz Power Supply Maximum Continuous Power watts watts Maximum Line Current Draw A A 2 14 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide Table 2 7 Physical Specifications Parameter Desktop Configuration Minitower Configuration Height 6 60 in 16 76 cm 17 65 in 44 83 cm Width 17 65 in 44 83 cm 6 60 in 16 76 cm Depth 17 11 in 43 46 cm 17 11 in 43 46 cm 26 Ib 11 8 kg 100 26 Ib 11 8 kg N A Weight nom 1 Maximum Supported Weight 2 NOTES 1 System weight may vary depending on installed drives peripherals 2 Assumes reasonable article s such as a display monitor and or another system unit Table 2 8 Diskette Drive Specifications Compag SP 179161 001 Parameter Measurement Media Type 3 5 in 1 44 MB 720 KB diskette Height 1 3 bay 1 in Bytes per Sector 512 Sectors per Track High Density 18 Low Density 9 Tracks per Side High Density 80 Low Density 80 Read Write Heads 2 Average Access Time Track to Track high low 3 ms 6 ms Average high low 94 ms 173ms Settling Time 15 ms Latency Average 100 ms Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 2 15 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 2 System Overview Table 2 9 48x CD ROM Drive Specifications SP 187217 B21
132. I device The configuration address register CCONFIG ADDRESS at OCF8h holds a value that specifies the PCI bus PCI device and specific register to be accessed The configuration data register CONFIG DATA at OCFCh contains the configuration data PCI Configuration Address Register PCI Configuration Data Register Port OCF8h R W 32 bit access only Port OCFCh R W 8 16 32 bit access Bit Function Bit Function 31 Configuration Enable 31 0 Configuration Data 0 Disabled 1 Enable 30 24 Reserved read write Os 23 16 Bus Number Selects PCI bus 15 11 PCI Device Number Selects PCI device for access 10 8 Function Number Selects function of selected PCI device 7 2 Register Index Specifies config reg 1 0 Configuration Cycle Type ID 00 Type 0 01 1 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 4 3 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 4 System Support Two types of configuration cycles are used A Type 0 zero cycle is targeted to a device on the PCI bus on which the cycle is running A Type 1 cycle is targeted to a device on a downstream PCI bus as identified by bus number bits lt 23 16 gt With three or more PCI buses a PCI bridge may convert a Type 1 to Type 0 if it s destined for a device being serviced by that bridge or it may forward the Type 1 cycle unmodified if it is
133. I functions The STO 3 signals are used for priority encoding with 000 for low priority and 001 indicating high priority T3 Be ae ea AD x 2 CLK UJ GNT TRDY N STO 2 00x x XXX x XXX X X Figure 4 5 AGP 1X Data Transfer Peak Transfer Rate 266 MB s Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 4 11 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 4 System Support AGP 2X Transfers During AGP 2X transfers clocking is basically the same as in 1X transfers except that the 66 MHz CLK signal is used to qualify only the control signals The data bytes are latched by an additional strobe AD STBx signal so that an 8 byte transfer occurs in one CLK cycle Figure 4 6 The first four bytes DnA are latched by the receiving agent on the falling edge of AD STBx and the second four bytes DnB are latched on the rising edge of AD STBx va i EL pape ban pos y pesf nos peny peo CLK AD_STBx GNT aL X 00x wx X Figure 4 6 2X Data Transfer Peak Transfer Rate 532 MB s AGP 4X Transfers The AGP 4X transfer rate allows sixteen bytes of data to be transferred in one clock cycle As in 2X transfers the 66 MHz CLK signal is used only for qualifying control signals while s
134. K 2 2 RSA FUNGTION nnne edet eade ede ees K 4 K 2 3 WAKE UP FUNCTIONS ner etr rrr a eee HIR Re Eleg etd K 4 POWER MANAGEMENT SUPPORT neony egie 5 3 1 APM ENVIRONMENT ege orb 5 K 32 5 4 CONNECTORS nine EPOR Pe ae settee stig cernere e ire pier K 6 4 1 55 54 Mi bebe 6 vii Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 42 AOR SOS CONNECTOR canit tees d et er tere ib co dee oriente nies K 6 K 4 3 SMBUS CONNECTOR depen hen dash Gea betel n ede K 7 44 2 eee tenere em Ge eee eet K 7 K 5 ADAPTER SPECIFICATIONS phe Deine ppp CORRI e rea uo K 8 APPENDIX L COMPAQ ADAPTEC SCSI HOST 4 02 0 0 0 2 entente tatu sonus ons Ld INTRODUCTION tit ete tede er P He qu e Red bd L 1 12 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION eee treten e L 2 13 5 5 5520 Re L 3 L 3 1 SCSL ADAPTER CONFIGURATION e
135. MOS not properly initialized clk test NOTE A 102 message code may be caused by one of a variety of processor related problems that may be solved by replacing the processor although system board replacement may be needed Compaq Personal Computers A 3 Changed November 2000 Appendix Error Messages and Codes 5 MEMORY ERROR MESSAGES 2 Table 4 Memory Error Messages Message Probable Cause 200 04 Real memory size changed 200 05 Extended memory size changed 200 06 Invalid memory configuration 200 07 Extended memory size changed 200 08 CLIM memory size changed 201 01 Memory machine ID test failed 202 01 Memory system ROM checksum failed 202 02 Failed RAM ROM map test 202 03 Failed RAM ROM protect test 203 01 Memory read write test failed 203 02 Error while saving block in read write test 203 03 Error while restoring block in read write test 204 01 Memory address test failed 204 02 Error while saving block in address test 204 03 Error while restoring block in address test 204 04 A20 address test failed 204 05 Page hit address test failed 205 01 Walking I O test failed 205 02 Error while saving block in walking I O test 205 03 Error while restoring block in walking I O test 206 xx Increment pattern test failed 207 xx ECC failure 210 01 Memory increment pattern test 210 02 Error while saving memory
136. MPLEMENTATION GENERIC REPRESENTATION 5 34 REMOTE SENSE ALERT IMPLEMENTATION GENERIC 5 35 RSA LOGIC BLOCK DIAGRAM 2 4 2 000100000000000000000000000000000000 5 35 POWER DISTRIBUTION AND CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM ccce enne nnne 6 1 POWER 2 6 5 Low VOLTAGE SUPPLY AND DISTRIBUTION 000 6 6 SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION DIAGRAM TYPICAL CONFIGURATION 6 7 HEADER PINOUTS ee terere TR UNE EON EAR OEE RARE ERE EX HERE Re buy 6 8 ASCIICHARAGTERSET 2 dome eit B 1 q Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU Technical Reference Guide C 1 KEYSTROKE PROCESSING ELEMENTS BLOCK DIAGRAM eene enne C 2 REC 2 PS 2 KEYBOARD TO S YSTEM TRANSMISSION TIMING DIAGRAM cernere C 3 REC 3 U S ENGLISH 101 KEY KEYBOARD KEY 85 0 2 0 1 0112 0 000
137. N 5 24 TABLE 5 18 USB CONTROL REGISTERS 2 tete nasse 5 24 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers xiii Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide TABLE 5 19 USB CONNECTOR PINOUT ccccssssccecececsessaececececsenseaececececsessnaececececeessaaeaecececeessaeaeeeeeens 5 25 TABLE 5 20 USB CABLEELENGTH DATA 5 iere r D ea 5 25 TABLE 5 21 AC 97 AUDIO CONTROLLER PCI CONFIGURATION 5 5 31 TABLE 5 22 AC 97 AUDIO CODEC CONTROL 5 31 TABLE 5 23 AUDIO SUBSYSTEM 8 4244 4000 5 32 TABLE2 24 AOE BVENTS ewe e ERU OVER EPER ELE R RENE R CA 5 33 TABLE 5 25 REMOTE SYSTEM ALERT EVENTS esses 5 36 6 2 e ERE EE C ET e deos 7 2 TABLE 7 2 BOOT ERROR CODES re rere eerte ert iecur Eee 7 5 TABLE 7 3 SETUP UTILITY 85 2 2222 000000000000000000000000000000000 0 sess ette tensa nennen 7 6 TABLE 7 4 CLIENT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS INT 15 7 12 TABLE 7 5 PNP BIOS FUNCTIONS
138. ON The Compaq PCI 10 100 NIC Adapter is based on the 3C905C Network Interface Controller supported by firmware in flash ROM Figure K 2 The adapter can operate in half or full duplex modes and provide auto negotiation of both mode and speed Full duplex operation follows the IEEE 802 3x flow control specification Transmit and receive FIFOs of three kilobytes each reduce the chance of overrun while waiting for bus access Each card includes an on board 5 3 3 VDC regulator circuit and WOL connector in support of Wake On LAN functionality WOL Conn 1 5 VDC Aux gt GND WOL 3 4 SMBus Data RJ 45 2 SMB CS Conn SMB Clock Speed 34 Ne TXIRX ARX 2 p Mag gt 32 Link 3C905C Activity PCI PCI Bus connector lt gt Ethernet Controller AOL SOS Conn Event 1 Event 2 Event 3 Event 4 Event 5 Event 6 MD Clock SOS Present NOOR Figure K 2 Compaq PCI 10 100 Ethernet Adapter Block diagram Key features of these adapters include 2 KB transmit and 2 KB receive FIFOs 32 bit DMA bus mastering PCI ver 2 2 compliant PME support 10 100BASE T half full duplex IEEE 802 3 Supports both 100BASE TX 100 5 4 Nway 10 100 auto negotiation support Both APM and ACPI power management support AOL SOS interface for Remote Sense Alert support D0 D3 power state wake event support
139. PEG 1 2 OpenGL Indeo Indeo OpenGL Direct 3D Special 3ROP BitBLT Transparent Shading DVD support 3ROP BitBLT Features Line Draw BLT rasterizer 24b dbl Dual RAMDAC Accelerators Color Expan Stretch BLT Digital vibrance buffered color Flat amp Gouraud Triangle Eng Polylines control planes shading Anti aliasing Polygons 32b render 8b stencil Anisotropic HDTV proc Fills 24b Z buffer 8b 24b Z buffer filtering FS Anti 32b render stencil stereo support Perspective aliasing 24b Z buffer 8b Anisotropic Texture 32b color amp stencil filtering Specular stencil Anisotropic Twin View arch highlighting Alpha planes filtering supporting 32b z buffer 128b TnT 2 head Win amp 2 head zoom Archit 2 head clone 2 head clone 2 head TV DVD max mode Aux VESA I F VESA I F VESA I F VESA I F VESA I F Outputs 1 RGB 1 RGB 1 RGB 1 DVI 1 RGB 2 RGB NOTE Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 2 13 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 2 System Overview 2 4 9 AUDIO SUBSYSTEM models feature an embedded Sound Blaster 128 PCI audio system using the AC 97 ver 2 1 specification based design The subsystem features a Creative Labs Inc ES1373 audio controller and a Cirrus Logic 54297 audio codec The output of the audio codec is applied to a 3 watt amplifier that drives the chassis internal speaker Standard microphone and line input jacks are provid
140. Protection System DPS self tests Note This selection will only appear when at least one drive capable of performing the IDE DPS self tests is attached to the system Boot Order Allows user to specify the order in which attached peripheral devices such as diskette drive hard drive CD ROM or network interface card are checked for a bootable operating system image Each device on the list may be individually excluded from or included for consideration as a bootable operating system source Note MS DOS drive lettering assignments may not apply after a non MS DOS operating system has started To boot one time from a device other than the default device specified in Boot Order restart the computer and press F9 when the F10 Setup message appears on the screen When POST is completed a list of bootable devices is displayed Use the arrow keys to select a device and press the Enter key Security Setup Password Allows user to set and enable setup administrator password Note If the setup password is set it is required to change Computer Setup options flash the ROM and make changes to certain plug and play settings under Windows Also this password must be set in order to use some Compaq remote security tools See the Troubleshooting Guide for more information Power On Password Allows user to set and enable power on password See the Troubleshooting Guide for more information Password Options Allows user to Enable disable netwo
141. RFACE models include two serial interfaces to transmit and receive asynchronous serial data with external devices The serial interface function is provided by the LPC47B357 I O controller component that includes two NS16C550 compatible UARTs Each UART supports the standard baud rates up through 115200 and also special high speed rates of 239400 and 460800 baud The baud rate of the UART is typically set to match the capability of the connected device While most baud rates may be set at runtime baud rates 230400 and 460800 must be set during the configuration phase RS 232 INTERFACE On the legacy light system the UART is associated with a DB 9 connector that complies with EIA standard RS 232 C The DB 9 connector is shown in the following figure and the pinout of the connector is listed in Table 5 7 Figure 5 3 Serial Interface Connector Male DB 9 as viewed from rear of chassis Table 5 7 DB 9 Serial Connector Pinout Pin X Signal Description Pin Signal Description 1 CD Carrier Detect 6 DSR Data Set Ready 2 RX Data Receive Data 7 RTS Request To Send 3 TX Data Transmit Data 8 CTS Clear To Send 4 DTR Data Terminal Ready 9 RI Ring Indicator 5 GND Ground The standard RS 232 C limitation of 50 feet or less of cable between the DTE computer and DCE modem should be followed to minimize transmission errors Higher baud rates may require shorter cables 5 8 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Person
142. SSES The chipset implements two data busses that are supplementary in operation to the PCI bus Hub Link Bus The chipset implements a Hub Link bus between the MCH and the ICH The Hub Link bus handles transactions at a 66 MHz rate using PCI type protocol and in fact operates as PCI bus 0 This bus is transparent to software and not accessible for expansion purposes 4 2 6 2 LPC Bus The 82801 ICH implements a Low Pin Count LPC bus for handling transactions to and from the 47B357 Super I O Controller as well as the 82802 FWH The LPC bus transfers data a nibble 4 bits at a time at a 33 MHz rate Generally transparent in operation the LPC bus becomes a factor primarily during the configuration of DMA channel modes see section 4 4 3 DMA Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 4 7 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 4 System Support 4 2 7 PCI CONFIGURATION 4 8 PCI bus operations require the configuration of certain parameters such as PCI IRQ routing DMA channel configuration RTC control port decode ranges and power management options These parameters are handled by the LPC I F bridge function PCI function 0 device 31 of the ICH component and configured through the PCI configuration space registers listed in Table 4 3 Configuration is provided by BIOS at power up but re configurable by software Table 4 3 LPC Bridge Configuration Registers ICH
143. STERS cceceessssecececeesesssaeceeececseseaeeecececsensaesesececeenenseaeees 5 2 TABLE 5 3 40 PIN PRIMARY IDE CONNECTOR PINOUT esee eee 5 3 TABLE 5 4 DISKETTE DRIVE CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION 5 6 5 5 TABLE 5 5 DISKETTE DRIVE INTERFACE CONTROL 5 8 eene 5 5 TABLE 5 6 34 PIN DISKETTE DRIVE CONNECTOR PINOUT 00020 20 200000000000000000000000 5 7 TABLE 5 7 DB 9 SERIAL CONNECTOR PINOUT 2 422 0200 000000000000000000000000000000000 0 5 8 TABLE 5 8 SERIAL INTERFACE CONFIGURATION REGISTERS cscsscsssececeesesseaececececsessaeeecececeessaseeeeeeees 5 9 TABLE 5 9 SERIAL INTERFACE CONTROL REGISTERS 5 10 TABLE 5 10 PARALLEL INTERFACE CONFIGURATION REGISTERS enne nnne 5 13 TABLE 5 11 PARALLEL INTERFACE CONTROL 5 14 TABLE 5 12 DB 25 PARALLEL CONNECTOR 04000000008 5 15 TABLE 5 13 8042 TO KEYBOARD 8 2 2 enne 5 17 TABLE 5 14 KEYBOARD INTERFACE CONFIGURATION 8 65 00 5 18 TABLE 5 15 CPU COMMANDS TO THE 8042 5 20 TABLE 5 16 KEYBOARD POINTING DEVICE CONNECTOR 5 21 TABLE 5 17 USB INTERFACE CONFIGURATIO
144. Sense 1 On Off pi Control SMBus ZA PS Fan ICH2 lt p Sensing J CMD Speed cup Fan Off Off On Off gt 8 Control Therm NOTE 1 Will be 12 VDC if chassis fan is connected and operating Figure 4 11 Fan Control Block Diagram An ASIC monitors a thermal diode internal to the processor and provides a Fan CMD signal that the Speed Control logic of the power supply uses to vary the speed of the fans through the negative power rail The turning off of the fans as the result from the system being placed into a Sleep condition is initiated by the ASIC asserting the Fan Off signal which results in the On Off Control logic shutting off the 12 volts to the fans Typical cooling conditions include the following Normal Low fan speed Hot processor ASIC directs Speed Control logic to increase speed of fan s Hot power supply Power supply increases speed of fan s Sleep state Fans turned off Hot processor or power supply will result in starting fans BN 4 34 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 4 8 4 8 1 Technical Reference Guide REGISTER MAP AND MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS This section contains the system I O map and information on general purpose functions of the ICH and I O controller SYSTEM MAP Table 4 14 lists the fixed addresses of the input output I O ports
145. T INFORMATION The Matrox Millennium G450 graphics card is fully compatible with software written for legacy video modes EGA and needs no driver support for those modes Drivers are provided with or available for the card to provide extended mode support for the current operating systems and programming environments such as Windows 2000 Windows NT 4 0 Autodesk AutoCAD R14 and 2000 Kintex 3D Studio Max 2D GDI MS DirectDraw DX6 7 ActiveX DirectX Direct3D OpenGL 1 1 and 1 2 999999 H 5 POWER MANAGEMENT AND CONSUMPTION This controller provides monitor power control for monitors that conform to the VESA display power management signaling DPMS protocol This protocol defines different power consumption conditions and uses the HSYNC and VSYNC signals to select a monitor s power condition Table H 2 lists the monitor power conditions Table H 2 Monitor Power Management Conditions HSYNC VSYNC Power Mode Description Active Active On Monitor is completely powered up If activated the inactivity counter counts down during system inactivity and if allowed to tiemout generates an SMI to initiate the Suspend mode Active Inactive Suspend Monitors high voltage section is turned off and CRT heater filament voltage is reduced from 6 6 to 4 4 VDC The Off mode inactivity timer counts down from the preset value and if allowed to timeout another SMI is generated and serviced resulting in the monitor being placed i
146. TES 1 On UATA 33 and higher modes re defined as STOP 2 On UATA 33 and higher mode reads re defined as DMARDY On UATA 33 and higher mode writes re defined as STROBE 3 On UATA 33 and higher mode reads re defined as STROBE On UATA 33 and higher mode writes re defined as DMARDY 4 Primary connector wired to IRQ14 secondary connector wired to IRQ15 5 Pin 39 is used for spindle sync and drive activity becomes SPSYNC DACT when synchronous drives are connected Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 5 3 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 5 Input Output Interfaces 5 3 DISKETTE DRIVE INTERFACE The diskette drive interface supports up to two diskette drives each of which use a common cable connected to a standard 34 pin diskette drive connector All models come standard with a 3 5 inch 1 44 MB diskette drive installed as drive A The drive designation is determined by which connector is used on the diskette drive cable The drive attached to the end connector is drive A while the drive attached to the second next to the end connector is drive B On all models the diskette drive interface function is integrated into the LPC47B357 super I O component The internal logic of the I O controller is software compatible with standard 82077 type logic The diskette drive controller has three operational phases in the following order Command phase The c
147. Technical Reference Guide For Compaq Deskpro EXS and Compaq Deskpro Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor And the Intel 850 Chipset COMPAQ This document is designed to allow printing as an 8 1 2 x 11 inch hardcopy that will fit into a standard 3 ring binder Provided below is a title block that can be copied and or cut out and placed into a slip or taped onto the edge of the binder COMPAQ Deskpro EXS and Deskpro Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor and the Intel 850 Chipset TR G Reader Feedback Please feel free to send any questions suggestions corrections or comments regarding this document please to the following email address PCG Training compaq com When responding please state the title and edition of the referenced document Technical Reference Guide NOTICE The information in this document is subject to change without notice COMPAQ COMPUTER CORPORATION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR TECHNICAL OR EDITORIAL ERRORS OR OMISSIONS HEREIN NOR FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE FURNISHING PERFORMANCE OR USE OF THIS MATERIAL IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF MANUFACTURERS TO ENSURE THAT DEVICES DESIGNED TO BE USED WITH COMPAQ PRODUCTS COMPLY WITH FCC CLASS B EMISSIONS REQUIREMENTS This guide contains information protected by copyright Except for use in connection with the described Compaq product no part o
148. The BIOS provides OEM defined power management functionality before the interface is established Once the interface is established the BIOS and the O S Driver coordinate power management activities The BIOS rejects an interface connect request if any real or protected mode connection already exists APM Protected Mode 16 bit Initializes the 16 bit protected mode interface between the O S and the BIOS This interface allows a protected mode caller to invoke the BIOS functions without first switching into real or virtual 86 mode This function must be invoked in real mode This is not currently used by any O S APM Protected Mode 32 bit linitializes the 32 bit protected mode interface between the O S and the BIOS This interface allows a protected mode O S to invoke the BIOS functions without the need to first switch into real or virtual 86 mode This function must be invoked in real mode APM Interface Disconnect Breaks the cooperative connection between the BIOS and the O S and returns control of the power management policy to the BIOS Power management parameter values timer values enable disable settings etc in effect at the time of the disconnect remain in effect CPU Idle The O S uses this call to tell BIOS that the system is idle CPU Busy Informs the BIOS that the O S has determined that the system is now busy The BIOS should restore the CPU clock rate to full speed Set Power State Sets th
149. The shield chassis ground and power ground should be tied together at the host end but left unconnected at the device end to avoid ground loops Color code Signal Insulation color Data Green Data White Vcc Red Ground Black Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 5 25 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 5 Input Output Interfaces 5 8 5 8 1 AUDIO SUBSYSTEM The systems covered in this guide come standard with an embedded Sound Blaster 128 audio subsystem FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS A block diagram of the audio subsystem is shown in Figure 5 10 The Ensonic ES1373 Audio Controller operating off the PCI bus accesses and controls a Cirrus Logic 54297 Audio Codec The codec provides the analog to digital ADC and digital to analog DAC conversions as well as the mixing functions control functions such as volume audio source selection and sampling rate are controlled through software over the PCI bus through the ES1373 Audio Controller Control data and digital audio streams record and playback are transferred between the Audio Controller and the Audio Codec over the AC97 Link Bus The analog stereo outputs from the codec are applied to a 3 watt mono amplifier that drives a 16 ohm speaker The interfaces allowing connection to external audio devices include Mic In This input uses a three conductor stereo 1 8 phone jack that is specifically design
150. Thermal Ground 7 o9 NOTE No polarity consideration required for connection to speaker header P6 or SCSI HD LED header P29 1 Separate cable connection for these two pins equivalent of header P29 on other systems Figure 6 5 Header Pinouts 6 8 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide Chapter 7 BIOS ROM 7 1 INTRODUCTION The Basic Input Output System BIOS of the computer is a collection of machine language programs stored as firmware in read only memory ROM The BIOS ROM includes such functions as Power On Self Test POST PCI device initialization Plug n Play support power management activities and the Setup utility The firmware contained in the BIOS ROM supports the following operating systems and specifications 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9999999999 99 DOS 6 2 Windows 3 1 and Windows for Workgroups 3 11 Windows 95 98 and 2000 Windows NT 3 5 and 4 0 OS 2 ver 2 1 and OS 2 Warp SCO Unix DMI 2 1 Intel Wired for Management WfM ver 2 2 Alert On LAN AOL and Wake On LAN WOL ACPI and OnNow APM 1 2 SMBIOS 2 3 1 PC98 99 and NetPC Boot Integrity Services BIS Video BIOS on systems with 815E based graphics or integrated nVIDIA AGP graphics Intel PXE boot ROM for the integrated LAN controller BIOS Boot Specification 1 01 Enhanced Disk Drive Specification 3 0 E
151. Thermal NOS EA CO 4 Ei Connector PCI Figure 5 14 RSA Logic Block Diagram Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 5 35 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 5 Input Output Interfaces Reportable RSA events are listed in the following table Table 5 25 Remote System Alert Events Event Description BIOS Failure System fails to boot successfully Thermal Condition CPU Thermal shutdown reported Heartbeat Indication of system s network presence sent approximately every 30 seconds in normal operation The current Remote System Alert implementation requirements are as follows 3Com Etherlink 3C905C TX NIC 7 pin AOL SOS cable 3Com EtherDisk Driver 5 x or later available from Compaq Client side utility software included with driver Server side utility software available from Compaq Management console running one of the following a HP OpenView Network Node Manager 6 x b Intel LANDesk Client Manager 5 36 Compaq Deskpro EXS Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide Chapter 6 POWER and SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION 6 1 INTRODUCTION This chapter describes the power supply and method of general power and signal distribution Topics covered in this chapter include Power supply assembly control 6 2
152. USB provides hot plugging unplugging Plug n Play functionality 2 12 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 2 4 8 GRAPHICS SUBSYSTEM Each of these systems provides an slot that accommodates a Type 1 or Type 2 AGP graphics adapter 1 5 V only Table 2 4 lists the key features of the types of graphics adapters available as standard in these systems Table 2 4 Standard AGP Graphics Card Comparison Matrox NVIDIA NVIDIA NVIDIA ELSA Millennium GeForce2 GTS TNT2 PRO Quadro2 MXR GLoria Il G450 Std Config In EXS Wkstn 300 Wkstn 300 Wkstn 300 Wkstn 300 Recommended Hi 2D Hi 2D Hi 2D Hi 2D Multi monitor for Entry 3D Entry 3D Entry 3D Mid 3D Hi 2D Bus Type AGP 4X AGP 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 32 16 32 64 32 SGRAM SDRAM SDRAM DDR SDRAM DAC Speed 350 MHz 300 MHz 350 MHz 350 MHz Max 2D Res 2048x1536 1920x1200 1920x1200 2048x1536 2048x768 of colors 16 7M 16 7M 16 7M 16 7M 65K Software Quick Draw Quick Draw Quick Draw Quick Draw Quick Draw Compatibility DOl DirectX DCl DirectX DOl DirectX DCl DirectX DCl DirectX Direct Draw Direct Draw Direct Draw Direct Draw Direct Draw 3D OGL Direct Show Direct Show ActiveX MPEG 1 2 MPEG 1 2 MPEG 1 2 MPEG 1 2 M
153. XS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 2 2 2 5 Technical Reference Guide The following items are available as options for all models and may be included in the standard configuration of some models System Memory Hard drives controllers Removeable media drives Graphics Monitors Audio Accessories PC800 64 MB RIMM non ECC ECC PC800 128 MB RIMM non ECC ECC PC800 256 MB RIMM non ECC ECC 20 40 GB UATA 100 hard drive Ultra 160 SCSI Controller 18 GB SCSI hard drive 8x 4x 32x CD RW drive 10x 40x Max DVD ROM drive LS 120 Super Disk drive PCI DXR DVD Decoder kit Compaq P700 17 CRT Compaq P900 19 CRT Compaq P1100 21 CRT Compaq 5010 15 Flat Panel Compaq TFT8020 18 Flat Panel PS115 Speakers PS330 Speakers Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 2 3 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 2 System Overview 2 3 MECHANICAL DESIGN The following subsections describe the mechanical physical aspects of the covered Compaq Deskpro models into a live AC outlet regardless of the Power On condition Always disconnect the power cable from the power outlet and or from the system unit before handling the system unit in any way The following information is intended primarily for identification purposes only Before servicing these
154. a a a a a a a Bit Bit Parameter Minimum Nominal Maximum Tcy clock cycle 60 us 80 clock low 30 us 41 us 50 us Tch clock high 30 us 40 us Th b t high before transmit 20 Figure 2 PS 2 Keyboard To System Transmission Timing Diagram The system can halt keyboard transmission by setting the clock signal low The keyboard checks the clock line every 60 us to verify the state of the signal If a low is detected the keyboard will finish the current transmission if the rising edge of the clock pulse for the parity bit has not occurred The system uses the same timing relationships during reads typically with slightly reduced time periods The enhanced keyboard has three operating modes Mode 1 PC XT compatible Mode 2 PC AT compatible default Mode 3 Select mode keys are programmable as to make only break only typematic Modes can be selected by the user or set by the system Mode 2 is the default mode Each mode produces a different set of scan codes When a key is pressed the keyboard processor sends that key s make code to the 8042 logic of the system unit The When the key is released a release code is transmitted as well except for the Pause key which produces only a make code The 8042 type logic of the system unit responds to scan code reception by asserting IRQI which is processed by the interrupt logic and serviced by the CPU with an interrupt service routine
155. a system without a functional operating system OS Installing an OS Installing an application These systems can if configured with a NIC with Preboot Execution Environment PXE option ROM boot with a NetPC compliant server 7 4 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 7 3 3 MEMORY DETECTION AND CONFIGURATION 7 3 4 This system uses the Serial Presence Detect SPD method of determining the installed RIMM configuration The BIOS communicates with an EEPROM on each RIMM through the SMBus to obtain data on the following RIMM parameters Presence Size Type PC800 capability 999 NOTE Refer to Chapter 3 Subsystem for the SPD format and RIMM data specific to this system The BIOS performs memory detection and configuration with the following steps 1 Program the buffer strength control registers based on SPD data and the RIMM slots that are populated 2 Determine the memory size for each RIMM and program the MCH accordingly 3 Enable refresh BOOT ERROR CODES The BIOS provides visual and audible indications of a failed system boot by using the keyboard LEDs and the system speaker The error conditions are as follows Table 7 2 Boot Error Codes Visual 1 Audible Meaning Num Lock LED blinks 1 short 2 long beeps System memory not prese
156. al Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 5 4 2 SERIAL INTERFACE PROGRAMMING Programming the serial interfaces consists of configuration which occurs during POST and control which occurs during runtime 5 4 2 1 Serial Interface Configuration The serial interface must be configured for a specific address range COMI1 2 etc and also must be activated before it can be used Address selection and activation of the serial interface are affected through the PnP configuration registers of the LPCA7B357 I O controller The serial interface configuration registers are listed in the following table Table 5 8 Serial Interface Configuration Registers Index Address Function R W 30h Activate R W 60h Base Address MSB R W 61h Base Address LSB R W 70h Interrupt Select R W FOh Mode Register R W NOTE Refer to LPC47B357 data sheet for detailed register information Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 5 9 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 5 Input Output Interfaces 5 4 2 2 Serial Interface Control The BIOS function INT 14 provides basic control of the serial interface The serial interface can be directly controlled by software through the I O mapped registers listed in Table 5 9 Table 5 9 Serial Interface Control Registers 1 COM2 Addr
157. ame functionality and are used by themselves in combination with other keys to perform specific hot key type functions for the Windows operating system The defined functions of the Windows logo keys are listed as follows Keystroke Function Window Logo Open Start menu Window Logo F1 Display pop up menu for the selected object Window Logo TAB Activate next task bar button Window Logo E Explore my computer Window Logo F Find document Window Logo CTRL F Find computer Window Logo M Minimize all Shift Window Logo M Undo minimize all Window Logo R Display Run dialog box Window Logo PAUSE Perform system function Window Logo 0 9 Reserved for OEM use see following text The combination keystroke of the Window Logo 1 0 keys are reserved for OEM use for auxiliary functions speaker volume monitor brightness password etc Key position 112 marked with an application window icon is used in combination with other keys for invoking Windows application functions Compaq Personal Computers 9 Changed July 2000 Appendix Keyboard 2 4 4 Easy Access Keystrokes The Easy Access keyboards Figures C 7 and C 8 include additional keys also referred to as buttons used to streamline internet access and navigation These buttons which can be re programmed to provide other functions have the default functionality described below 7 Button Easy Access Keyboard
158. ance of overrun while waiting for bus access Each card includes an on board 5 3 3 VDC regulator circuit and WOL connector in support of Wake On LAN functionality WOL Conn 1 5 VDC Aux 2 GND RJ 45 3 e Conn BIOS Intel 825xx TX RX Ethernet Controller Er see table below Link PCI ZA Activity Connector N Controller Type Featured on 82559 Intel 100 Management Adapter 82550 Intel PRO 100 S Management Adapter Figure I 2 Intel 100 Management Adapter Block diagram Key features of these adapters include 3 KB transmit and 3 KB receive FIFOs PCI ver 2 2 compliant PME support Dual mode support with auto switching between 10 5 and 100BASE TX Both APM and ACPI power management support D0 D3 power state wake event support Boot ROM with PXE and RPL support 99999 The 82559 and 82550 controllers feature high and low priority queues and provides priority packet processing for networks that support that feature The controller s micro machine processes transmit and receive frames independently and concurrently Receive runt undersized frames are not passed on as faulty data but discarded by the controller which also directly handles such errors as collision detection or data under run An EEPROM is used to store identification configuration and connection parameters The 82550 controller provides all the f
159. applicable addendums are available online at the following location http www compaq com support techpubs technical_reference_guides index html USING THIS GUIDE The chapters of this guide primarily describe the hardware and firmware elements and primarily deal with the system board and the power supply assembly The appendices contain general information about standard peripheral devices such as the keyboard ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SOURCES For more information on chipset components mentioned in this guide refer to the indicated manufacturers documentation which may be available at the following online sources Compaq Computer Corporation http www compaq com Intel Corporation http www intel com Standard Microsystems Corporation http www smsc com MODEL NUMBERING CONVENTION The model numbering convention for Compaq Deskpro units is as follows k J E NIC Modem blank none n NIC m modem Graphics blank integrated a AIMM v nVIDIA Removable storage b CD CDRW CD d DVD r CDRW z ZIP Memory in MB OS type 9 Dual install Win95 98 4 Win NT 4 0 6 Dual install Win NT 2000 Chipset type e 850 Hard drive size in GB Processor speed in MHz Processor type C Celeron P Pentium Form factor D Desktop M Minitower Deskpro series EX EXS WK Workstation Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 P
160. aps Lock and Ins keys is suppressed by the BIOS Typematic keys when held down longer than 500 ms send the make code repetitively at a 10 12 Hz rate until the key is released If more than one key is held down the last key pressed will be typematic C 2 4 4 Special Single Keystroke Functions The following keys provide the intended function in most applications and environments Caps Lock The Caps Lock key pos 59 when pressed and released invokes a BIOS routine that turns on the caps lock LED and shifts into upper case key positions 40 49 60 68 and 76 82 When pressed and released again these keys revert to the lower case state and the LED is turned off Use of the Shift key will reverse which state these keys are in based on the Caps Lock key Num Lock The Num Lock key pos 32 when pressed and released invokes a BIOS routine that turns on the num lock LED and shifts into upper case key positions 55 57 72 74 88 90 100 and 101 When pressed and released again these keys revert to the lower case state and the LED is turned off The following keys provide special functions that require specific support by the application Print Scrn The Print Scrn pos 14 key can when pressed generate an interrupt that initiates a print routine This function may be inhibited by the application Scroll Lock The Scroll Lock key pos 15 when pressed and released invokes a BIOS routine that turns on the scroll lock LED and inhibi
161. ation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 5 9 3 REMOTE SYSTEM ALERT SUPPORT These systems provide Remote System Alert RSA support for such NIC cards as the 3Com 3C905C TX NIC card The RSA function is similar to AOL in that the unit provides even while powered off system status alert messages to a network console However NIC cards implementing the RSA method do not use the SMBus for receiving alert information and therefore require in addition to the PCI connection an auxiliary AOL SOS cable connection with the system board Figure 5 13 NIC Card in PCI Slot AOL SOS Cable Network 2 A Cable AOL SOS Header P12 System Board Figure 5 13 Remote Sense Alert Implementation Generic Representation In the Remote Sense Alert implementation a NIC card receives event notification directly from the system s thermal sensors and the LPC47B357 I O controller over an AOL SOS cable connection Figure 5 14 During system off conditions the NIC card receives auxiliary power from the 3 3 VDC auxiliary power rail on the PCI bus System Board 1 AOLISOS Header SOS 47B357 BIOS Fail C 1 Cntlr Nc OS Fail Fail o9 OO Intrusion Or O NC O NG Ean Alet Alori 9 wr Aler m
162. available options 2 2 1 STANDARD FEATURES The following standard features are included on all models 9999999999999 99 Intel Pentium 4 processor in PPGA423 package Intel 850 chipset Dual channel Direct Rambus system memory Five 33 MHz 32 bit PCI slots One AGP slot Embedded Sound Blaster 128 PCI audio 3 5 inch 1 44 MB diskette drive 48x Max CD ROM drive IDE controllers with UATA 100 mode support Hard drive fault prediction One parallel two serial and four USB ports APM 1 2 power management support Plug n Play compatible with ESCD support Intelligent Manageability support Energy Star compliant Security features including e Flash ROM Boot Block Diskette drive disable boot disable write protect Power on password Administrator password Serial parallel port disable PS 2 Compaq Easy Access keyboard w Windows support PS 2 Compaq Scroll Mouse Table 2 1 shows the differences in standard features between the Deskpros Table 2 1 Standard Feature Difference Matrix Deskpro EXS Deskpro Workstation 300 Form Factor Minitower Convertible Minitower Standard Memory Type Installed Non ECC ECC Communication device 10 100 NIC amp V 90 56K Modem 10 100 NIC only Mass Storage Interface Type UATA100 Ultra 160 SCSI UATA100 Drive Type 20 or 40 MB 18 20 GB Standard AGP Graphics Card NVIDIA GeForce2 GTS NVIDIA TNT2 Pro NVIDIA Quadro2 MXR ELSA Gloria 11 or Matrox Millennium G450 2 2 Compaq Deskpro E
163. bsystem Vendor ID Card Bus CIS Pointer I Base Address Registers 5 Hdr Class Code Status Device ID Line Size Revision ID Lat Timer Command Vendor ID PCI Configuration Space Type 0 Data required by PCI protocol Not required Register Index FCh 40h 3Ch 38h 34h 30h 2Ch 28h 10h 08h 04h 00h Figure 4 3 PCI Configuration Space Mapping 16 15 8 7 0 31 24 23 Device Specific Area Bridge Control Int Pin Int Line Expansion ROM Base Address Reserved Limit Upper 16 Bits I O Base Upper 16 Bits Prefetchable Limit Upper 32 Bits Prefetchable Base Upper 32 Bits Prefetch Mem Limit Prefetch Mem Base Memory Limit Memory Base Secondary Status Limit I O Base Bus Sec Bus Pri Bus Base Address Registers BIST Har Lat Timer Line Size 5 Revision ID Status Command Device ID Vendor ID PCI Configuration Space Type 1 Each PCI device is identified with a vendor ID assigned to the vendor by the PCI Special Interest Group and a device ID assigned by the vendor The device and vendor IDs for the devices on the system board are listed in Table 4 1 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 4 5 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Register Index FCh
164. cation of devices and functions on the bus A device is typically defined as a component or slot that resides on the PCI bus although some components such as the MCH and ICH are organized as multiple devices A function is defined as the end source or target of the bus transaction A device may contain one or more functions In the standard configuration these systems use a hierarchy of three PCI buses Figure 4 1 The PCI bus 0 is internal to the MCH ICH chipset components and is not physically accessible The bus that services the AGP slot is designated as PCI bus 1 PCI slots reside on PCI bus 2 82850 Mem 1 Function Bus 0 AGP AGP Bus EE Function Hub Link I F T Hub Link Bus Hub Link I F 82801BA ICH2 Component A PCI Bus 0 PCI Bridge N N x Function EIDE USB SMBus LPC Controller VF Controller Bridge Function Function Function Function PCI Bus 2 ES1373 Audio Controller PCI Connector 1 Not used in these systems Figure 4 1 PCI Bus Devices and Functions Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 4 2 1 PCI BUS TRANSACTIONS The PCI bus consists
165. ces may be disabled individually through the Setup utility to guard against unauthorized access to a system In addition the ability to write to or boot from a removable media drive such as the diskette drive may be enabled through the Setup utility The disabling of the serial parallel and diskette interfaces are a function of the LPC47B357 I O controller The USB ports are controlled through the 82801 ICH 4 7 2 POWER MANAGEMENT These systems provide baseline hardware support of ACPI and APM compliant firmware and software Key power consuming components processor chipset I O controller and fan can be placed into a reduced power mode either automatically or by user control The system can then be brought back up wake up by events defined by the ACPI specification The ACPI wake up events supported by this system are listed as follows ACPI Wake Up Event System Wakes From Power Button Suspend or soft off RTC Alarm Suspend or soft off Wake On LAN w NIC Suspend or soft off PME Suspend or soft off Serial Port Ring Suspend or soft off USB Suspend only Keyboard Suspend only Mouse Suspend only 4 32 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 4 7 3 SYSTEM STATUS These systems provide a visual indication of system boot and ROM flash status through the keyboard LEDs as liste
166. chine VM attempts to access the com port designated for the modem s 16550 UART A callback procedure is initiated which loads the driver that takes over the trapping of the UART s I O ports A background timer is started that checks for transmit empty receiver ready states or any other interrupt condition The com port for the modem remains open until the DOS VM is terminated The driver will then unload itself and the com port will be released 2 Compaq Personal Computers Original December 2000 F 3 F 3 1 Technical Reference Guide OPERATING PARAMETERS The operating parameters consists of UART transfer rates and transmission modes UART TRANSFER RATES The transfer rate between the modem s UART and the PCI interface also known as the DTE to DCE transfer rate is selectable and generally set to match the modem s typical transmission mode The modem supports the standard rates of 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 14400 19200 28800 38400 57600 and 115200 bps as well as the high speed rate of 230400 bps 2 TRANSMISSION MODES The Compaq Lucent V 90 56K PCI Modem supports the transmission modes listed in table F 1 Table F 1 Operational Modes Mode Standard Transfer Type Transfer Rate see text below K56Flex see note Data 56000 54000 52000 50000 48000 46000 44000 42000 40000 38000 36000 34000 32000 bps ITU T V 90 see note Data 56000 54667 53333 52000 50667 49333 48000 46667 45333 42667
167. copyright notice Set Time and Date Allows you to set system time and date Save to Diskette Saves system configuration including CMOS to a blank formatted 1 44 MB diskette Restore from Diskette Restores system configuration including CMOS from a diskette Set Defaults and Exit Restores factory default settings which includes clearing any established passwords Ignore Changes and Exit Exits Computer Setup without applying or saving any changes Save Changes and Exit Saves changes to system configuration and exits Computer Setup Storage Device Configuration Lists all installed storage devices The following options appear when a device is selected Diskette Type For legacy diskette drives only Identifies the highest capacity media type accepted by the diskette drive Options are 3 5 1 44 MB 3 5 720 KB 5 25 1 2 MB 5 25 360 KB and Not Installed Drive Emulation LS 120 and ZIP drives only Allows you to select a drive emulation type for a storage device For example a Zip drive can be made bootable by selecting hard disk or diskette emulation Transfer Mode IDE devices only Specifies the active data transfer mode Options subject to device capabilities are PIO 0 Max PIO Enhanced DMA Ultra DMA 0 and Max UDMA Continued 7 6 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide Table 7 3 Setup Utility Funct
168. cted possible equipment Imminent Failure failure 1721 SMART SCSI Hard Drive SMART circuitry on a SCSI drive has detected possible equipment Detects Imminent Failure failure 1801 Microcode Patch Error A processor is installed for which the BIOS ROM has no patch Check for ROM update 1998 Master Boot Record Backup Backup copy of the hard drive master boot record is corrupted Use Has Been Lost Setup to restore the backup from the hard drive 1999 Master Boot Record Has If Master Boot Record Security is enabled this message indicates Changed Press Any Key To Enter that the MBR has changed since the backup was made Setup to Restore the MBR 2000 Master boot Record hard drive The hard drive has been changed Use Setup to create a backup of has changed the new hard drive A 2 Compaq Personal Computers Changed November 2000 Technical Reference Guide 4 SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES 1xx xx Table A 3 a Sytem Error Messages Message Probable Cause Message Probable Cause 101 Option ROM error 110 01 Programmable timer load data test failed 102 System board failure see note 110 02 Programmable timer dynamic test failed 103 System board failure 110 03 Program timer 2 load data test failed 104 01 Master int cntlr test fialed 111 01 Refresh detect test failed 104 02 Slave int cntlr test failed 112 01 Speed test Slow mode out of range 104 03 Int cntlr SW
169. ction 2 EPP mode function Data Strobe ECP modes Auto Feed or Host Acknowledge 3 EPP mode user defined ECP modes Fault or Peripheral 4 EPP mode Reset ECP modes Initialize or Reverse Req Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 5 15 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 5 Input Output Interfaces 5 6 5 6 1 KEYBOARD POINTING DEVICE INTERFACE The keyboard pointing device interface function is provided by the LPC47B357 controller component which integrates 8042 compatible keyboard controller logic hereafter referred to as simply the 8042 to communicate with the keyboard and pointing device using bi directional serial data transfers The 8042 handles scan code translation and password lock protection for the keyboard as well as communications with the pointing device This section describes the interface itself The keyboard is discussed in the Appendix C KEYBOARD INTERFACE OPERATION The data clock link between the 8042 and the keyboard is uni directional for Keyboard Mode 1 and bi directional for Keyboard Modes 2 and 3 These modes are discussed in detail in Appendix C This section describes Mode 2 the default mode of operation Communication between the keyboard and the 8042 consists of commands originated by either the keyboard or the 8042 and scan codes from the keyboard A command can request an action or indicate status The keyboard inter
170. ctive Inactive Suspend Monitors high voltage section is turned off and CRT heater filament voltage is reduced from 6 6 to 4 4 VDC The Off mode inactivity timer counts down from the preset value and if allowed to timeout another SMI is generated and serviced resulting in the monitor being placed into the Off mode Wake up from Suspend mode is typically a few seconds Inactive Inactive Off Monitors high voltage section and heater circuitry is turned off Wake up from Off mode is a little longer than from Suspend Compaq Personal Computers Original December 2000 Technical Reference Guide J 6 CONNECTORS There are two connectors associated with the graphics subsystem the display monitor connector and the Feature connector NOTE The graphic card s edge connector mates with the AGP slot connector on the system board This interface is described in chapter 4 of this guide The DB 15 disply monitor connector is provided for connection of a compatible RGB analog monitor The Feature connector allows the attachment of an optional card such as a video tuner J 6 1 MONITOR CONNECTOR Figure J 3 VGA Monitor Connector Female DB 15 as viewed from rear Table F 3 DB 15 Monitor Connector Pinout Pin Signal Description Signal Description 1 R Red Analog PWR 5 VDC fused 1 2 G Blue Analog GND Ground 3 B Green Analog NC Not Connected 4 NC Not Connected SDA DDC2 B Data 5 GND Ground 5
171. d 350 MHz Connector RAM DAC Figure G 2 ELSA GLoria II Graphics Card Block diagram The ELSA GLoria II Graphics Card includes the following features 64 SDRAM frame buffer using 128 bit 166 MHz access transfers with sideband addressing 2D drawing engine with 128 bit BitBLTs rectangle polygon fills line draws e Hardware cursor 8 16 32 bpp mode acceleration DVD support with e Hardware accelerated MPEG2 720 x 480 HDTV format support 7201 10801 720 1080 3D accelerator with Hardware transform and lighting Single pass dual textures 4 rendering pipelines Anistropic filtering 8 bit stencil buffer Specular lighting diffuse shading 16 24 bit Z buffering 350 MHz RAMDAC VESA compliancy DVI DFP connector DDC2B monitor support DPMS EPA Energy Star and ACPI compliant power management G 2 Compaq Personal Computers Original November 2000 Technical Reference Guide G 3 DISPLAY MODES The graphics display modes supported by the ELSA GLoria II Graphics are listed in Table G 1 Table G 1 ELSA GLoria Graphics Display Modes Max Vertical Memory Used Resolution Bits per pixel Color Depth Refresh Freq 1 For Texture 640 x 480 8 256 120 64 3 MB 640 x 480 16 65K 120 63 7 MB 640 x 480 32 16 7M 120 61 9 MB 800 x 600 8 256 120 63 6 MB 800
172. d Drive Timer During POST an inactivity timer each IDE hard drive is set to control hard drive spin down Although this activity is independent of the system timer the system will not go to sleep until the primary IDE controller has been inactive for the system time out time The hard drive timer can be configured through the Setup utility for being disabled or counting down 10 15 20 30 60 120 180 or 240 minutes after which time the hard drive will spin down Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 7 17 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 7 BIOS ROM 7 7 1 2 Going to Sleep in Independent PM When a time out timer expires Standby for that timer occurs System Standby When the system acquires the Standby mode the BIOS performs two duties 1 Blanks the screen 2 Turns off Vsync to reduce CRT heater voltage Since the hard drive inactivity timer is in the drive and triggered by drive access the system can be in Standby with the hard drives still spinning awake ZN NOTE The BIOS does not turn the fan s off as on previous products IDE Hard Drive Standby During hard drive standby the platters stop spinning Depending on drive type some hard drives will also cut power to some of the drive electronics that are not needed The drives can be in this state with the system still awake 7 7 1 3 Suspend Suspend is not supported in the Independent PM mode
173. d Workstation 300 Personal Computers 5 27 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 5 Input Output Interfaces 5 8 2 AUDIO CONTROLLER The Creative Technology Ltd Ensoniq ES1373 Audio Controller is a PCI device that includes the following features Compatible with software written for Sound Blaster 128 64 Voice wavetable synthesizer 4000 sound library Tone control and speaker equalization Multiple sampling rate support up to 48 KHz OPL FM and MPU 401 emulation support Supports Ensoniq s 3D Positional Audio algorithm Aureal A3D API support Microsoft DirectSound DirectSound 3D DirectMusic support DOS game compatibility AC 97 Link Bus S PDIF output ACPI power management 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 999 The ES1373 audio controller operates as a PCI bus master and slave device that includes an integrated cache designed to handle the memory bandwidth requirements of audio processing System memory is accessed as required to keep output cache full during playback and input cache relatively empty during record in accordance with the needs of the audio codec The integrated cache memory stores playback record data sample rate converter data and control register data A virtual 3 channel DMA controller handles cache memory operations The control registers are accessed using programmed I O on the PCI bus register reads are done as long words while register writes are performed in byte word
174. d in table 4 12 NOTE The LED indications listed in Table 4 12 are valid only for PS 2 type keyboards A USB keyboard will not provide LED status for the listed events although audible beep indications will occur Table 4 12 System Boot ROM Flash Status LED Indications NUM Lock CAPs Lock Scroll Lock Event LED LED LED System memory failure 1 Blinking Graphics controller failure 2 Blinking System failure prior to graphics cntlr initialization 3 Blinking ROMPAQ diskette not present faulty or drive prob On Off Off Password prompt Off On Off Invalid ROM detected flash failed Blinking 4 Blinking 4 Blinking 4 Keyboard locked in network mode Blinking 5 Blinking 5 Blinking 5 Successful boot block ROM flash On 6 On 6 On 6 NOTES 1 Accompanied by 1 short 2 long audio beeps 2 Accompanied by 1 long 2 short audio beeps 3 Accompanied by 2 long 1 short audio beeps 4 All LEDs will blink in sync twice accompanied by 1 long and three short audio beeps 5 LEDs will blink in sequence NUM Lock then CAPs Lock then Scroll Lock 6 Accompanied by rising audio tone Table 4 13 lists the operation status codes provided by the power LED on the front of the chassis Note that error or problem conditions are reported only by the power LED on the minitower Table 4 13 System Operational Status LED Indications Desktop Minitower System S
175. d input port of the 8042 This command directs the 8042 to transfer the contents of the input port to the output buffer so that they can be read at port 60h C2h Poll Input Port High This command directs the 8042 to place bits lt 7 4 gt of the input port into the upper half of the status byte on a continous basis until another command is received C3h Poll Input Port Low This command directs the 8042 to place bits lt 3 0 gt of the input port into the lower half of the status byte on a continous basis until another command is received DOh Read output port This command directs the 8042 to transfer the contents of the output port to the output buffer so that they can be read at port 60h Dih Write output port This command directs the 8042 to place the next byte written to port 60h into the output port only bit lt 1 gt can be changed D2h Echo keyboard data Directs the 8042 to send back to the CPU the next byte written to port 60h as if it originated from the keyboard No 11 to 9 bit translation takes place but an interrupt IRQ1 is generated if enabled D3h Echo pointing device data Directs the 8042 to send back to the CPU the next byte written to port 60h as if it originated from the pointing device An interrupt IRQ12 is generated if enabled D4h Write to pointing device Directs the 8042 to send the next byte written to 60h to the pointing device E0h Read test inputs Directs
176. d system responsiveness and higher execution throughput Internet and multimedia performance is improved further with additional streaming SIMD extensions SSE2 designed to expedite video speech encryption and photo processing tasks The 3 2 GB s throughput of the FSB matches that of the dual channel RDRAM used for system memory reducing latency and providing high balanced performance The 82850 Memory Controller Hub MCH includes an AGP 4X interface supporting a 1 5 VDC graphics card in the AGP slot The 82801 I O Controller Hub ICH2 and the LPC47B357 I O Controller components provide most of the input output functions listed previously These systems also include an AGP 4X graphics card in the slot and Intel 100 Management Adapter NIC card in a PCI slot Some models may also include a modem card and a SCSI host adapter installed in PCI slots Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide Pentium 4 Processor Graphics m MHz FSB Controller E Card 850 Chipset Channel A i RDRAM Bus PC800 V RIMM Pair s Channel B RDRAM Bus PC800 lt RIMM Pair s Hub Link Bus UATA 100 i Hard Drive 82801 2 Parallel Bus VF 2 VF LP
177. data may be separated by other operations Commands on AGP bus specify system memory accesses only Unlike the PCI bus commands involving I O and configuration are not required or allowed The system memory address space used in AGP operations is the same linear space used by PCI memory space commands but is further specified by the graphics address re mapping table GART of the north bridge component Data transactions on the AGP bus involve eight bytes or multiples of eight bytes The AGP memory addressing protocol uses 8 byte boundaries as opposed to PCI s 4 byte boundaries If a transfer of less than eight bytes is needed the remaining bytes are filled with arbitrary data that is discarded by the target Pipelined requests are defined by length or size on the AGP bus The PCI bus defines transfer lengths with the FRAME signal There are two basic types of transactions on the AGP bus data requests addressing and data transfers These actions are separate from each other 4 10 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 4 31 1 Technical Reference Guide Data Request Requesting data is accomplished in one of two ways either multiplexed addressing using the AD lines for addressing data or demultiplexed sideband addressing using the SBA lines for addressing only and the AD lines for data only Even though there are onl
178. de 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 41 W 11 91 1D FO 1D 1D FO 1D 42 E 12 92 24 0 24 24 F0 24 43 R 13 93 2D F0 2D 20 0 2D 44 T 14 94 2 0 2C 2C F0 2 45 Y 15 95 35 F0 35 35 FO 35 46 U 16 96 3C FO 3C FO 47 17 97 43 0 43 43 0 43 48 18 98 44 0 44 44 0 44 49 19 99 40 0 4D 4D FO 4D 50 9 54 54 51 1 1B 9B 5B FO 5B 5B FO 5B 52 Delete EO 53 E0 D3 EO 71 0 71 64 0 64 EO EO 53 E0 2A 4 EO FO 12 071 0 FO 71 EO 12 EO 2A 53 0 D3 EO AA 6 5 EO 12 EO 71 0 FO 71 EO FO 12 6 53 End EO 4 CF EO 69 0 FO 69 65 F0 65 AA 4F EO CF EO 2A 4 EO FO 12 EO 69 0 FO 69 EO 12 2A EO 4F EO CF EO AA 6 5 EO 12 EO 69 0 FO 69 FO 12 6 54 Page Down 51 0 D1 7 7A 6D FO 6D EO 51 E0 D1 EO 2A 4 EO 12 7A EO FO 7A EO 12 EO 51 E0 D1 EO AA 6 5 EO 12 7A EO 7A FO 12 161 55 7 47 7 161 6C FO 6C 6 6C na 6 56 8 48 C8 6 75 FO 75 6 75 na 6 57 9 49 C9 6 7D FO 7D 6 7D na 6 58 4 6 79 FO 79 6 7 0 7C 59 Caps Lock 58 0 58 14 0 14 60 1E 9E 1C F0 1C 1C F0 1C 61 S 1F 9F 1B F0 1B 1B F0 1B 62 D 20 A0 23 0 23 23 0 23 63 F 21 A1 2B F0 2B 2B F0 2B 64 G 22 A2 34 F0 34 34 F0 34 65 H 23 A3 33 F0 33 33 F0 33 66 J 24 A4 3B FO 3B FO 67 K 25 A5 42 F0 42 42 F0 42 68 L 26 A6 4B F0 4B 4B F0 4B 69 27 7 4C FO 4C 4C FO 4C 70 28 A8 52 0 52 52 F
179. dentical to the keyboard connector both physically and electrically The operation of the interface clock and data signal control is the same as for the keyboard The pointing device interface uses the 12 interrupt KEYBOARD POINTING DEVICE INTERFACE PROGRAMMING Programming the keyboard interface consists of configuration which occurs during POST and control which occurs during runtime 5 6 3 1 8042 Configuration The keyboard pointing device interface must be enabled and configured for a particular speed before it can be used Enabling and speed parameters of the 8042 logic are affected through the PnP configuration registers of the LPC47B357 I O controller Enabling and speed control are automatically set by the BIOS during POST but can also be accomplished with the Setup utility and other software The keyboard interface configuration registers are listed in the following table Table 5 14 Keyboard Interface Configuration Registers Index Address Function R W 30h Activate R W 70h Primary Interrupt Select R W 72h Secondary Interrupt Select R W FOh Reset and A20 Select R W 5 18 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 5 6 3 2 8042 Control The BIOS function INT 16 is typically used for controlling interaction with the keyboard Sub functions of INT 16 conduct the basic routines of handli
180. ding out a 24 bit row packet followed by a 40 bit column packet and then the 144 bit 128 bit for non ECC data packet being either written to or read from RDRAM Figure 3 5 Tn 1 Trc T Clock 2 m o Logic 0 1 8 V Vref 1 4 8 0 _ DQB 8 0 Logic 1 1 0 V Row Packet Column Packet __ Data Packet NOTE 1 Tn 5 ns 400 MHz PC800 1 2 1 42 ns 350 MHz 700 1 66 ns 9 300 MHz PC600 Figure 3 5 Rambus Transactions Single Channel The clock signal is driven by the source device 1 by the memory controller during writes by the RDRAM device during reads The row ROW and column COL signal lines are driven only by the memory controller and assume the functions provided by the RAS CAS signals of traditional memory buses The ROW and COL signals are also used for power management and defining the type read write of transaction The data lines DQAx DQBx are bi directional being driven the controller during writes and by the RDRAM during reads There is a specified delay period between related Row and Column packets Trc typically 7 clock cycles and related column and data packets Tcd typically 8 to 12 clock cycles Note that while Figure 3 5 illustrates a single Rambus transaction actual operation can involve pipelined transactions where back to back column packets are sent followed by back to bac
181. drive s warranty threshold data If data is returned indicating possible failure then the following message is displayed 1720 SMART Hard Drive detects imminent failure PNP SUPPORT The BIOS includes Plug n Play PnP support for PnP version 1 0A Table 7 5 lists the PnP functions supported Table 7 5 PnP BIOS Functions Function Register 00h Get number of system device nodes 01h Get system device node 02h Set system device node 03h Get event 04h Send message 50h Get SMBIOS Structure Information 51h Get Specific SMBIOS Structure The BIOS call INT 15 AX E841h BH 01h can be used by an application to retrieve the default settings of PnP devices for the user The application should use the following steps for the display function 1 Call PnP function 01 get System Device Node for each devnode with bit 1 of the control flag set get static configuration and save the results 2 Call INT 15 AX E841h BH Olh 3 Call PnP Get Static Configuration for each devnode and display the defaults 4 If user chooses to save the configuration no further action is required The system board devices will be configured at the next boot If the user wants to abandon the changes then the application must call PnP function 02 Set System Device Node for each devnode with bit 1 of the control flag set for static configuration with the results from the calls made prior to invoking this function Compaq Deskpro EXS
182. e no of 16 byte units OAh 1 Checksum should add up to 00h OBh 5 Reserved all Os 7 12 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide To support Windows NT an additional table to the BIOS32 table has been defined to contain 32 bit pointers for the DDC locations The Windows NT extension table is as follows Extension to BIOS SERVICE directory table next paragraph db 3205 510 2 number of entries in table db DDC DDC POST buffer sig dd 32 bit pointer dw byte size db SERB ESCD sig dd 32 bit pointer dw bytes size The service identifier for client management functions is CLM Once the service identifier is found and the checksum verified FAR call is invoked using the value specified at offset 04h to retrieve the CM services entry point The following entry conditions are used for calling the Desktop Management service directory INPUT OUTPUT EAX Service Identifier SCLM EBX 31 8 Reserved EBX 7 0 Must be set to 00h CS Code selector set to encompass the physical page holding entry point as well as the immediately following physical page It must have the same base CS is execute read DS Data selector set to encompass the physical page holding entry point as well as the immediately following physical page It must have the same
183. e PE I 5 I3 2 eei irn endi ni I 5 L4 ADAPTER PROGRAMMINQG eee nennen nennen nennen I 6 141 CONFIGURATION eet repeteret ee A epe terae E teg I 6 142 CONTROL ense oU D hee et ut pe eem I 6 L5 NETWORK CONNECTOR abeseer c tette ei reiecit err e i ne en ier eene I 7 L6 ADAPTER SPECIFICATIONS tert etit eee re ER I 7 APPENDIX J COMPAQ NVIDIA QUADRO2 MXR AGP GRAPHICS J 1 TE 1 2 eet eeeeetett ep oerte ip eroe tpe rhet eee tus J 2 J 3 DISPLAY t rrr REESE edis J 3 J 4 SOFTWARE SUPPORT INFORMATION eese nennen eene ener tenete nene J 4 J 5 POWER MANAGEMENT AND CONSUMPTION rene eene nennen nene J 4 J 6 CONNECTORS inet RERUM RUE ui RE E J 5 J 6 1 MONITOR CONNECTOR 6 eet eter Ite eee tiae ce tude de baee ene J 5 APPENDIX K COMPAQ PCI 10 100 ETHERNET ADAPTER 0 0 20 4 2 nins ntn INTRODUCTION erre Rr ERU I r PEETS E E K 1 K2 FUNCIIONAIEDESCRIETION nete emitter RE eR ten is K 2 K 2 1 AOL FUNCTION rere te ira ee Ree GTA ie tess K 3
184. e standard source configuration for maskable interrupts and their priorities in 8259 mode If more than one interrupt 15 pending the highest priority lowest number is processed first Table 4 7 Maskable Interrupt Priorities and Assignments Priority Signal Label Source Typical 1 IRQO Interval timer 1 counter O 2 IRQ1 Keyboard 3 IRQ8 Real time clock 4 IRQ9 Microtower game MIDI port desktop or minitower unused 5 IRQ10 Unused 6 IRQ11 Unused 7 IRQ12 Mouse 8 IRQ13 Coprocessor math 9 IRQ14 IDE primary I F 10 IRQ15 IDE secondary I F 11 IRQ3 Serial port COM2 12 IRQ4 Serial port COM1 13 IRQ5 Unused 14 IRQ6 Diskette drive controller 15 IRQ7 Parallel port LPT1 IRQ2 NOT AVAILABLE Cascade from interrupt controller 2 APIC Mode The Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller APIC mode enhances interrupt processing performance with the following advantages Eliminating the processor s interrupt acknowledge cycle by using a separate APIC bus Programmable interrupt priority Additional interrupts total of 24 Eight PCI interrupts are available in APIC mode The PCI interrupts are evenly distributed to minimize latency and are hard wired as follows ICH2 PCI PCI PCI PCI PCI AGP USB USB Audio IRQ Slot 1 Slot2 Slot3 Slot4 Slot 5 Slot Cntlr 1 Cntlr 2 Cntlr INTA INTA INTD INTC INTB INTD
185. e system BIOS ROM If the BIOS ROM fails the flash check the boot block code provides the minimum amount of support necessary to allow booting the system from the diskette drive and re flashing the system ROM with a ROMPAQ diskette Note that if an administrator password has been set in the system the boot block will prompt for this password by illuminating the caps lock keyboard LED and displaying a message if video support is available A PS 2 keyboard must be used during bootblock operation Since video may not be available during the initial boot sequence the boot block routine uses the Num Lock Caps Lock and Scroll Lock LEDs of the PS 2 keyboard to communicate the status of the ROM flash as follows Table 7 1 Boot Block Codes Num Lock Cap Lock Scroll Lock LED LED LED Meaning Off On Off Administrator password required On Off Off Boot failed Reset required for retry Off Off On Flash failed On On On Flash complete 7 2 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 7 2 2 CHANGEABLE SPLASH SCREEN The splash screen image displayed during POST is stored in the BIOS ROM and may be replaced with another image of choice by using the Image Flash utility Flashi exe The Image Flash utility allows the user to browse directories for image searching and pre viewing Background and foreground colors can be chosen from the
186. e system or device specified in the power device ID into the requested power state Enable Disable Power Management Enables or disables all APM BIOS automatic power management When disabled the BIOS does not automatically power manage devices enter the Standby State enter the Suspend State or take power saving steps in response to CPU Idle calls Restore Power On Defaults Re initializes all power on defaults Get Power Status This call returns the system current power status Get PM Event Returns the next pending PM event or indicates if no PM events are pending Get Power State Returns the device power state when a specific device ID is used Enable Disable Device PM Enables or disables APM BIOS automatic power management for a specified device When disabled the APM BIOS does not automatically power manage the device APM Driver Version The 5 uses this call to indicate its level of support to the BIOS The BIOS returns the APM connection version number Engage Disengage PM Engages or disengages cooperative power management of the System or device Get Capabilities Returns the features which this particular APM 1 2 BIOS implementation supports Get Set Disable Resume Timer This call gets sets or disables the system resume timer Enable Disable Resume on Ring Enables or disables the system s resume on ring indicator functionality It also returns
187. ector 10 CD audio input header 24 Battery 11 CPU power connector 25 3 3V aux power LED 12 Processor socket 26 AOL SOS header 13 Channel B RIMM sockets 3 4 27 Password clear jumper 2 14 Channel A RIMM sockets 1 2 1 Connector for power button Power HD LEDs SCSI HD LEDs 2 Jumper installed password enabled Jumper removed password cleared Figure 2 5 System Board Layout Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 2 7 Chapter 2 System Overview 2 4 2 8 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE These systems feature architecture based on the Intel Pentium 4 processor and the Intel 850 chipset Figure 2 6 These components are designed to compliment each other to provide very high desktop minitower performance Key technical highlights of this architecture include 1 4 or 1 5 GHz Pentium 4 processor Quad pumped Front Side Bus FSB for 400 MHz performance Dual channel RDRAM controller supporting up to four PC800 RIMMs Two IDE controllers supporting two UATA 100 hard drives each Sound Blaster 128 audio subsystem Five 33 MHz 32 bit PCI slots AGP 4X slot 1 5 volt support only One parallel port Two serial ports Four USB ports PS 2 mouse and keyboard interfaces 9999999 9 9 9 The Pentium 4 processor represents latest A 32 microprocessor design and features hyper pipelined rapid execution engine for improve
188. ed as well as a tri purpose headphone line digital output jack that allows the use of headphones or a pair of powered speakers optional The output jack also provides a digital audio output signal using the Sony Philips Digital Interface SPDIF format officially known as IEC 958 2 5 SPECIFICATIONS This section includes the environmental electrical and physical specifications for the Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Series Personal Computers Where provided metric statistics are given in parenthesis All specifications subject to change without notice Table 2 5 Environmental Specifications Factory Configuration Parameter Operating Nonoperating Ambient Air Temperature 50 to 95 F 10 to 35 C max rate 24 to 140 F 30 to 60 C max of change lt 10 C Hr rate of change lt 20 C Hr Shock w o damage 5 Gs 1 20 Gs 1 Vibration 0 000215 G Hz 10 300 Hz 0 0005 G Hz 10 500 Hz Humidity 10 90 Rh 28 C max 5 95 Rh 38 7 C max wet bulb temperature wet bulb temperature Maximum Altitude 10 000 ft 3048 m 2 30 000 ft 9 144 m 2 NOTE 1 Peak input acceleration during an 11 ms half sine shock pulse 2 Maximum rate of change 1500 ft min Table 2 6 Electrical Specifications Parameter U S International Input Line Voltage Nominal 110 127 VAC 200 240 VAC Maximum 90 132 VAC 180 264 VAC Input Line Frequency Range Nominal 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz Maximum 47 63
189. ed by BIOS Figure 3 6 shows the system memory map FFFF FFFFh FFEO 0000h FFDF FFFFh FEC1 0000h FECO FFFFh FECO 0000h FEBF FFFFh Host PCI AGP Area 2000 0000h 1FFF FFFFh 0100 0000h Host PCI FFFFh ISA Area 0010 0000h 000F 0000h 000 FFFFh 000E 0000h 000D FFFFh 000C 0000h 000B FFFFh DOS Compatibility Area 000A 0000h 0009 FFFFh 0008 0000h 0007 FFFFh 0000 0000h High BIOS Area 2 MB PCI Memory 18 MB APIC Config Space 64 KB PCI Memory Expansion 3060 MB Host PCI Memory Expansion 496 MB Extended Memory 15 MB System BIOS Area 64 KB Extended BIOS Area Option ROM 128 KB Graphics SMRAM RAM 128 KB Fixed Mem Area 128 KB Base Memory 512 KB 4 512 16 640 512 NOTE locations in memory are cacheable Base memory is always mapped to DRAM next 128 fixed memory area can through the MCH be mapped to DRAM or to PCI space Graphics RAM area is mapped to PCI or AGP locations Figure 3 6 System Memory Map Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 3 9 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 3 Processor Memory Subsystem 3 4 SUBSYSTEM CONFIGURATION The MCH component provides the configuration function for the processor memory subsystem Table 3 1 lists the configuration registers used for setting a
190. ed for connection of a condenser microphone with an impedance of 10 K ohms This is the default recording input after a system reset Line In This input uses a three conductor stereo 1 8 phone jack that is specifically designed for connection of a high impedance 10k ohm audio source such as a tape deck Headphones Line SPDIF Out This output uses a three conductor stereo 1 8 phone jack that is designed for connecting a set of 16 ohm nom stereo headphones or powered speakers Plugging into the Headphones jack mutes the signal to the internal speaker This jack also provides a digital output signal conforming to the Sony Philips Digital Interface SPDIF format 5 26 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide PC Beep Audio Peleus ES1373 2 Audio Controller SPDIF Out AC97 Internal Link Bus Int Speaker gt Speaker L Header P6 TDA 1 2 7056 p Mic In Line In V R CD ROM Header P7 CD Audio L Line Out L R ida Audio L R Audio Headphones 2 A udio Bev NA Y SPDIF i CD Audio R Codec soy Line Out Aux Header P11 1 Aux Audio L 2 Aux Audio Figure 5 9 Audio Subsystem Functional Block Diagram Compaq Deskpro EXS an
191. ee p aese L 3 L 3 2 SCSI ADAPTER CONTROL ettet tr EE EE E EE EE os Ae EEEE ERES dd L 3 EEA SPECTIBICA TIONS E ine cee N R ep mn Rue L 3 1 5 SCSICONNECTORS HERE e ir EEr r EE EENE r L 4 L 5 1 EXTERNAL 50 ULTRA SCSI 2 2 0 0 4 L 4 L 5 2 INTERNAL 50 PIN ULTRA SCSI CONNECTOR eere L 5 L 5 3 INTERNAL 68 PIN 160 SCSI eere L 6 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers ix Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU FIGU X RE 2 1 RE 2 2 RE 2 3 RE 2 4 RE 2 5 RE 2 6 RE 2 7 RE 3 1 RE 3 2 RE 3 3 RE 3 4 RE 3 5 RE 3 6 RE 4 1 RE 4 2 RE 4 3 RE 4 4 RE 4 5 RE 4 6 RE 4 7 RE 4 8 RE 4 9 RE 4 10 RE 4 11 RE 5 1 RE 5 2 RE 5 3 RE 5 4 RE 5 5 RE 5 6 RE 5 7 RE 5 8 RE 5 9 RE 5 10 RE 5 11 RE 5 12 RE 5 13 RE 5 14 RE 6 1 RE 6 2 RE 6 3 RE 6 4 6 5 RE B 1 Compa LIST OF FIGURES COMPAQ DESKPRO PERSONAL COMPUTERS WITH 8 2 20 7 20 0 0
192. eene eerte trennen A 9 A 15 VIDEO GRAPHICS ERROR MESSAGES 24 2 4 A 9 A 16 AUDIO ERROR MESSAGES 3200 A 10 A 17 DVD CD ROM ERROR MESSAGES A 10 A 18 NETWORK INTERFACE ERROR MESSAGES 60 A 10 A 19 SCSI INTERFACE ERROR MESSAGES 65XX XX 66XX XX 67 11 A 20 POINTING DEVICE INTERFACE ERROR MESSAGES 8601 11 APPENDIX ASCII CHARACTER INTRODUCTION rir eie iei tere eene ere re iiie te tee tede B 1 APPENDIX 2 2 2 4 1 1 INTRODUCTION 6 5 50 Gia te is RC SCC BERE ed C 1 2 02200 000 0 2 2 1 PS 2 TYPE KEYBOARD TRANSMISSIONS C 3 C22 USB TYPE KEYBOARD 5 55 eee nennen eene C 4 C 2 3 KEYBOARD TEAY OUTS e e ERU RU QE C 5 2 4 Seg npe eund C 8 C 2 5 KEYBOARD COMMANDS eret ete ipte EE C 11 2 6 SCAN CODES teeth ehe dase t enn Ene C 11 CONNECTORS etre dee ee Ee P C 16 vi Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers
193. efault active input All block functions are controlled through index addressed registers of the codec 5 30 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 5 8 5 AUDIO PROGRAMMING Audio subsystem programming consists configuration typically accomplished during POST and control which occurs during runtime 5 8 5 1 Audio Configuration The audio subsystem is configured according to PCI protocol through the ES1373 audio controller Table 5 21 lists the PCI configuration registers of the audio subsystem Table 5 21 AC 97 Audio Controller PCI Configuration Registers PCI Value PCI Value Conf on Conf on Register Reset Addr Register Reset 00 01h Vender ID 1274h 14 17h Native Audio Bus Mstr Addr 05 02 03h Device ID 1373h 18 1Bh Reserved 05 04 05h PCI Command 0000h 1C 2Bh Reserved 05 06 070 PCI Status X610h 2C 2Dh Subsystem Vender ID 1274h 08h Revision ID 00h 2E 2Fh Subsystem ID 1373h 09h Programming 00h 30h Exp ROM Addr 05 OAh Sub Class Oth 34h Capabilities Pointer DCh OBh Base Class Code 04h 3Ch Interrupt Line xxh Header 00h 3Dh Interrupt Pin 01h 10 13h Native Audio Mixer Base Addr 1 3Fh Min GNT Min LAT 800Ch 5 8 5 2 Audio Control The audio subsystem is controlled through a set of indexed registers that physically reside in the audio codec
194. eing the normal procedure allows NIC driver to re arm the NIC for a Magic Packet 7 7 3 3 Waking Up in APM 7 8 Any of the following activities will cause the system to wake up Keyboard Mouse Ring Indicate RTC alarm Magic Packet 9999 The hard drive will not spin up until it is accessed Any hard drive access will cause it to wake up and resume spinning Since the BIOS returns to the currently running software it is possible for the drive to spin up while the system is in Standby with the screen blanked USB LEGACY SUPPORT The BIOS ROM checks the USB port during POST for the presence of a USB keyboard This allows a system with only a USB keyboard to be used during ROM based setup and also on a system with an OS that does not include a USB driver On such a system a keystroke will generate an SMI and the SMI handler will retrieve the data from the device and convert it to PS 2 data The data will be passed to the keyboard controller and processed as in the PS 2 interface Changing the delay and or typematic rate of a USB keyboard though BIOS function INT 16 is not supported Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 7 23 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 7 BIOS ROM This page is intentionally blank 7 24 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Refer
195. ence Guide Appendix A ERROR MESSAGES AND CODES INTRODUCTION This appendix lists the error codes and a brief description of the probable cause of the error NOTE Errors listed in this appendix are applicable only for systems running Compaq BIOS NOTE Not all errors listed in this appendix may be applicable to a particular system model and or configuration A 2 BEEP KEYBOARD LED CODES Table A 1 Beep Keyboard LED Codes Beeps LED 1 Probable Cause 1 short 2 long NUM lock blinking Base memory failure 1 long 2 short CAP lock blinking Video graphics controller failure 2 long 1 short Scroll lock blinking System failure prior to video initialization 1 long 3 short None Boot block executing None All three blink in sequence Keyboard locked in network mode None NUM lock steady on ROMPAQ diskette not present bad or drive not ready None CAP lock steady on Password prompt None All three blink together ROM flash failed None All three steady Successful ROM flash NOTE 1 PS 2 keyboard only Compaq Personal Computers 1 Changed November 2000 Appendix Error Messages and Codes POWER ON SELF TEST POST MESSAGES Table A 2 Power On Self Test POST Messages Error Message Probable Cause Invalid Electronic Serial Number Chassis serial number is corrupt Use Setup to enter a valid number Network Server M
196. erne nans nnn 8 TABLE 13 HARD DRIVE ERROR 55 85 1442 01000000000000000000000000000000000 0000 A 9 TABLE A 14 VIDEO GRAPHICS ERROR MESSAGES 41 2 1 2 414040000 0 000000000000 9 TABLE 15 AUDIO ERROR 655 8 0 0 202000000 0001010000000000000000000 10 TABLE 16 DVD CD ROM DRIVE ERROR 55 6 A 10 TABLE 17 NETWORK INTERFACE ERROR 55 5 A 10 TABLE A 18 SCSI INTERFACE ERROR MESSAGES ccce eene eene eth nnnn seen 11 TABLE 19 POINTING DEVICE INTERFACE ERROR 55 8 A 11 TABLE C 1 KEYBOARD TO SYSTEM C 11 TABLE C 2 KEYBOARD SCAN CODES 2712 1 24 00002202 000000000000000000000000000000 C 12 TABLE D 1 NVIDIA TNT2 PRO GRAPHICS DISPLAY D 3 TABLE D 2 MONITOR POWER MANAGEMENT CONDITIONS ccceceesessscecececeessssececececseneaececeeseeesenssaeeeeees D 4 TABLE D 3 DB 15 MONITOR CONNECTOR D 5 TABLE E 1 NVIDIA GEFORCE2 GTS GRAPHICS DISPLAY MODES E 3 TABLE E 2 MONITOR POWER MANAGEMENT CONDITIONS E 4 TABLE E 3 DB 15 MONITOR CONNECTOR E 5 TABLE E
197. ersonal Computers 1 1 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 3 1 3 1 1 3 2 1 3 3 1 3 4 1 3 5 NOTATIONAL CONVENTIONS VALUES Hexadecimal values are indicated by a numerical or alpha numerical value followed by the letter h Binary values are indicated by a value of ones and zeros followed by the letter b Numerical values that have no succeeding letter can be assumed to be decimal RANGES Ranges or limits for a parameter are shown using the following methods Example A Bits lt 7 4 gt bits 7 6 5 and 4 Example B IRQ3 7 9 IRQ signals 3 through 7 and IRQ signal 9 SIGNAL LABELS Signal names are indicated using abbreviations acronyms or if possible the full signal name in all capital letters Signals that are meant to be active asserted low are indicated with a dash immediately following the name REGISTER NOTATION AND USAGE This guide uses standard Intel naming conventions in discussing the microprocessor s CPU internal registers Registers that are accessed through programmable I O using an indexing scheme are indicated using the following format 03C5 17h Index port Data port In the example above register 03C5 17h is accessed by writing the index port value 17h to the index address 03C4h followed by a write to or a read from port 03C5h BIT NOTATION Bit values are labeled with bit 0 representing the least
198. es a standard 40 pin connector for the primary IDE device and connects via a cable to the hard drive installed in the right side drive bay Note that some signals are re defined for UATA 33 and UATA 66 modes which require a special 80 conductor cable supplied designed to reduce cross talk Device power is supplied through a separate connector Figure 5 1 40 Pin Primary IDE Connector on system board Table 5 3 40 Pin Primary IDE Connector Pinout Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description 1 RESET Reset 21 DRQ DMA Request 2 GND Ground 22 GND Ground 3 DD7 Data Bit 7 23 IOW Write 1 4 DD8 Data Bit lt 8 gt 24 GND Ground 5 DD6 Data Bit lt 6 gt 25 IOR Read 2 6 DD9 Data Bit lt 9 gt 26 GND Ground 7 DD5 Data Bit lt 5 gt 27 IORDY Channel Ready 3 8 DD10 Data Bit lt 10 gt 28 CSEL Cable Select 9 DD4 Data Bit lt 4 gt 29 DAK DMA Acknowledge 10 DD11 Data Bit lt 11 gt 30 GND Ground 11 DD3 Data Bit lt 3 gt 31 IRQn Interrupt Request 4 12 DD12 Data Bit lt 12 gt 32 1016 16 bit 13 DD2 Data Bit lt 2 gt 33 DA1 Address 1 14 DD13 Data Bit lt 13 gt 34 DSKPDIAG Pass Diagnostics 15 DD1 Data Bit lt 1 gt 35 DAO Address 0 16 DD14 Data Bit lt 14 gt 36 DA2 Address 2 17 DDO Data Bit lt 0 gt 37 50 Chip Select 18 DD15 Data Bit 15 38 CS1 Chip Select 19 GND Ground 39 HDACTIVE Drive Active front panel LED 5 20 40 GND Ground NO
199. escribed as follows System State Pressed Power Button Results In Off Negative pulse of which the falling edge results in power control logic asserting PS On signal to Power Supply Assembly which then initializes ACPI four second counter is not active On ACPI Disabled Negative pulse of which the falling edge causes power control logic to de assert the PS On signal ACPI four second counter is not active On ACPI Enabled Pressed and Released Under Four Seconds Negative pulse of which the falling edge causes power control logic to generate SMI set a bit in the SMI source register set a bit for button status and start four second counter Software should clear the button status bit within four seconds and the Suspend state is entered If the status bit is not cleared by software in four seconds PS On is de asserted and the power supply assembly shuts down this operation is meant as a guard if the OS is hung Pressed and Held At least Four Seconds Before Release If the button is held in for at least four seconds and then released PS On is negated de activating the power supply 6 2 2 2 System Board LED Indications Three LEDs located on the system board refer to chapter 2 figure 2 5 provide status and a means to troubleshoot possible power related problems Figure 2 5 System Board LED Item Function Power supply on 5V aux 19 When illuminated indicates system is pl
200. eseved Configuration Byte 28h Expanded and Base Memory IRQ12 Select Default Value 00h IRQ12 Select 0 Mouse 1 Expansion bus Base Memory Size 00 640 KB 01 2 512 KB 10 256 KB 11 Invalid Internal Compaq Memory 00000 None 00001 512 KB 00010 1 MB 00011 1 5 MB 11111 15 5 MB Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 4 27 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 4 System Support Configuration Byte 29h Miscellaneous Configuration Data Default Value 00h Reserved Primary Hard Drive Enable Non PCI IDE Controllers 0 Disable 1 Enable 3 0 Configuration Byte 2 Hard Drive Timeout Default Value 02h Hard Drive Timeout index to SIT timeout record Configuration Byte 2Bh System Inactivity Timeout Default Value 23h Bit Functton Power Conservation Boot 00 Reserved 01 2 PCon 10 PC off 11 Reserved 4 0 System Inactive Timeout Index to SIT system timeout record 00000 Disabled Configuration Byte 2Ch ScreenSave and NUMLOCK Control Default Value 00h Bit Function Numlock Control 0 Numlock off at power on 1 Numlock on at power on 0 No screen blank 1 Screen blank w QuickLock ScreenSave Timeout Index to SIT monitor timeout record 000000 Disabled Screen Blank Control 4 28 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium
201. ess conflict A 6 Compaq Personal Computers Changed November 2000 Technical Reference Guide A 11 MODEM COMMUNICATIONS ERROR MESSAGES 12xx xx Table A 10 Serial Interface Error Messages Message Probable Cause Message Probable Cause 1201 XX Modem internal loopback test 1204 03 Data block retry limit reached 4 1201 01 UART DLAB bit failure 1204 04 RX exceeded carrier lost limit 1201 02 Line input or UART failure 1204 05 TX exceeded carrier lost limit 1201 03 Address line failure 1204 06 Time out waiting for dial tone 1201 04 Data line fault 1204 07 Dial number string too long 1201 05 UART control signal failure 1204 08 Modem time out waiting for remote response 1201 06 UART THRE bit failure 1204 09 Modem exceeded maximum redial limit 1201 07 UART DATA READY bit failure 1204 10 Line quality prevented remote response 1201 08 UART TX RX buffer failure 1204 11 Modem time out waiting for remote connection 1201 09 Interrupt circuit failure 1205 XX Modem auto answer test 1201 10 COMI set to invalid inturrupt 1205 01 Time out waiting for SYNC 5 1201 11 set to invalid 1205 02 Time out waiting for response 5 1201 12 DRVR RCVR control signal failure 1205 03 Data block retry limit reached 5 1201 13 UART control signal interrupt 1205 04 RX exceeded carrier lost limit failure 1201 14 DRVR RCVR data failure 1205 05 TX exceeded car
202. essor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 5 3 1 DISKETTE DRIVE PROGRAMMING Programming the diskette drive interface consists of configuration which occurs typically during POST and control which occurs at runtime 5 3 1 1 Diskette Drive Interface Configuration The diskette drive controller must be configured for a specific address and also must be enabled before it can be used Address selection and enabling of the diskette drive interface are affected by firmware through the PnP configuration registers of the 47B357 I O controller during POST The configuration registers are accessed through I O registers 2Eh index and 2Fh data after the configuration phase has been activated by writing 55h to I O port 2Eh The diskette drive I F is initiated by firmware selecting logical device 0 of the 47B357 using the following sequence Write 07h to I O register 2Eh Write 00h to I O register 2Fh this selects the diskette drive I F Write 30h to I O register 2Eh Write O1h to I O register 2Fh this activates the interface PW Writing AAh to 2Eh deactivates the configuration phase The diskette drive I F configuration registers are listed in the following table Table 5 4 Diskette Drive Interface Configuration Registers Index Reset Address Function R W Value 30h Activate R W Oth 60 61h Base Address R W 03 70h Interrupt Select R W 06h 74h DMA Channel Select R W 02h FO
203. est 602 xx Diskette read test 611 xx Pri diskette drive port addr conflict 603 xx Diskette drive R W compare test 612 xx Sec diskette drive port addr conflict 604 xx Diskette drive random seek test 694 00 Pin 34 not cut on 360 KB drive 605 xx Diskette drive ID media 697 00 Diskette type error 606 xx Diskette drive speed test 698 00 Drive speed not within limits 607 xx Diskette drive wrap test 699 00 Drive media ID error run Setup 608 xx Diskette drive write protect test A 10 SERIAL INTERFACE ERROR MESSAGES 11xx xx Table A 9 Serial Interface Error Messages Message Probable Cause Message Probable Cause 1101 01 UART DLAB bit failure 1101 13 UART signal interrupt failure 1101 02 Line input or UART fault 1101 14 DRVR RCVR data failure 1101 03 Address line fault 1109 01 Clock register initialization failure 1101 04 Data line fault 1109 02 Clock register rollover failure 1101 05 UART cntrl signal failure 1109 03 Clock reset failure 1101 06 UART THRE bit failure 1109 04 Input line or clock failure 1101 07 UART Data RDY bit failure 1109 05 Address line fault 1101 08 UART TX RX buffer failure 1109 06 Data line fault 1101 09 Interrupt circuit failure 1150 xx Comm port setup error run Setup 1101 10 COMI set to invalid INT 1151 COM address conflict 1101 11 set to invalid INT 1152 xx COM address conflict 1101 12 DRVR RCVR cntrl signal failure 1155 xx COM port addr
204. ette Drives Present 0 No diskette drives installed 1 Diskette drive s installed Configuration Bytes 15h and 16h Base Memory Size Default Value 280h Bytes 15h and 16h hold a 16 bit value that specifies the base memory size in 1 KB 1024 increments Valid base memory sizes are 512 and 640 kilobytes Configuration Bytes 17h and 18h Extended Memory Size Bytes 17h and 18h hold a 16 bit value that specifies the extended memory size in 1 KB increments Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 4 25 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 4 System Support Configuration Bytes 19h 1Ch Hard Drive Types Byte 19h contains the hard drive type for drive 1 of the primary controller if byte 12h bits lt 7 4 gt hold 1111b Byte 1 Ah contains the hard drive type for drive 2 of the primary controller if byte 12h bits lt 3 0 gt hold 1111b Bytes Bh and contain the hard drive types for hard drives 1 and 2 of the secondary controller Configuration Byte Enhanced IDE Hard Drive Support Default Value FOh Bit Function EIDE Drive C 83h 6 EIDE Drive D 82h EIDE Drive E 81h EIDE Drive F 80h Values for bits lt 7 4 gt 0 Disable 1 Enable for auto configure Configuration Byte 1Fh Power Management Functions 00h Function Slow Processor Clock for Low Power Mode 0 Processor runs at full speed 1
205. exturing z buffering and alpha blending to the system memory while 32 megabytes of on board SDRAM stores the main display image 128 bit NVIDIA N15 Graphics Controller 166 MHz Data Bus Memory 32 MB Video VF SDRAM Scalar Frame Buffer CRT Controller AGP Bus Analog Monitor 350 MHz Connector RAM DAC 3D Array Engine Figure E 2 NVIDIA GeForce2 GTS Graphics Card Block diagram The NVIDIA GeForce2 GTS Graphics Card includes the following features 16 MB SDRAM frame buffer using 128 bit 166 MHz access AGP 4X transfers with sideband addressing 2D drawing engine with 128 bit BitBLTs rectangle polygon fills line draws e Hardware cursor 8 16 32 bpp mode acceleration 3D accelerator with Hardware transform and lighting Single pass dual textures 4 rendering pipelines Anistropic filtering 8 bit stencil buffer Specular lighting diffuse shading 16 24 bit Z buffering 350 MHz RAMDAC VESA compliancy e VIP 1 1 connector DDC2B monitor support DPMS EPA Energy Star and ACPI compliant power management E 2 Compaq Personal Computers Original November 2000 Technical Reference Guide DISPLAY MODES The graphics display modes supported by the NVIDIA GeForce2 GTS Graphics are listed in Table E 1 Tab
206. f enabled and then forgotten by the user will require that either the password be cleared preferable solution and described below or the entire CMOS be cleared refer to section 4 6 To clear the password use the following procedure 1 Turn off the system and disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and or system unit 2 Remove the cover hood Insure that all system board LEDs are off not illuminated 3 Locate the password header jumper labeled E49 on these systems and remove the jumper from pins 1 and 2 and place on just pin 2 for safekeeping Replace the cover Re connect the AC power cord to the AC outlet and or system unit Turn on the system The POST routine will clear and disable the password To re enable the password feature repeat steps 1 6 replacing the jumper on pins and 2 of header E49 4 7 1 2 Setup Password The Setup utility may be configured to be always changeable or changeable only by entering a password The password is held on CMOS and if forgotten will require that CMOS be cleared refer to section 4 6 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 4 31 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 4 System Support 4 7 1 3 Cable Lock Provision These systems include a chassis cutout on the rear panel for the attachment of a cable lock mechanism 471 4 VO Interface Security The serial parallel USB and diskette interfa
207. f this document may be photocopied or reproduced in any form without prior written consent from Compaq Computer Corporation 2000 Compaq Computer Corporation rights reserved Published in the USA Compaq Deskpro LTE Contura Presario ProLinea Registered U S Patent and Trademark Office Product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks and or registered trademarks of other companies Celeron Pentium and are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation Microsoft MS DOS Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation For more information regarding specifications and Compaq specific parts please contact Compaq Computer Corporation Technical Reference Guide for Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Series Personal Computers First Edition December 2000 Document Number 13YR 1200A WWEN Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 1 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide ii Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION eese 1 1 ABOUT THIS GUIDE t etn o t itte e tette rere ne ire Potes 1 1 1 1 1 USING THIS GUIDE 54 aet teen pe Y eee deep itam vibe 1 1 1 1 2
208. face uses IRQI to get the attention of the CPU The 8042 can send a command to the keyboard at any time When the 8042 wants to send a command the 8042 clamps the clock signal from the keyboard for a minimum of 60 us If the keyboard is transmitting data at that time the transmission is allowed to finish When the 8042 is ready to transmit to the keyboard the 8042 pulls the data line low causing the keyboard to respond by pulling the clock line low as well allowing the start bit to be clocked out of the 8042 The data is then transferred serially LSb first to the keyboard Figure 5 6 An odd parity bit is sent following the eighth data bit After the parity bit is received the keyboard pulls the data line low and clocks this condition to the 8042 When the keyboard receives the stop bit the clock line is pulled low to inhibit the keyboard and allow it to process the data Stat 01 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Parity Stop Bit LSb MSb Bit 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 Th Toy Tcl Tch Parameter Minimum Maximum Cycle Time 0 us 80 us Tcl Clock Low 25 us 35 us Tch Clock High 25 us 45 us Th Data Hold 0 us 25 us Tss Stop Bit Setup 8 us 20 us Tsh Stop Bit Hold 15 us 25 us Figure 5 6 8042 To Keyboard Transmission of Code EDh Timing Diagram 5 16 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Refere
209. following features 64 SDRAM frame buffer using 128 bit 166 MHz access AGP 4X transfers with sideband addressing 2D drawing engine with 128 bit BitBLTs rectangle polygon fills line draws e Hardware cursor 8 16 32 bpp mode acceleration Dual head features e Two analog monitor RGB ports DVD max mode DualHead zoom mode e DualHead clone mode DualHead TV output mode 3D accelerator with Hardware transform and lighting Anistropic filtering Specular lighting diffuse flat and Gouraud shading 16 24 bit Z buffering 360 MHz primary RAMDAC 200 MHz secondary RAMDAC VESA compliancy e Dual DDC2B monitor support e VIP 2 0 interface DPMS EPA Energy Star and ACPI compliant power management H 2 Compaq Personal Computers Original November 2000 Technical Reference Guide H 3 DISPLAY MODES The graphics display modes supported by the Matrox Millennium G450 Graphics are listed in Table H 1 Table H 1 Matrox Millennium G450 Graphics Display Modes Max Vertical Supporting Resolution Bits per pixel Color Depth Refresh Freq 1 RAMDAC 640 x 480 8 256 85 Hz Primary 640 x 480 16 65K 85 Hz Primary Secondary 640 x 480 24 16 7M 85 Hz Primary 640 x 480 32 16 7M 85 Hz Primary Secondary 800 x 600 8 256 85 Hz Primary 800 x 600 16 65K 85 Hz Primary Secondary 800 x 600 24 1
210. gram of the keystroke processing elements is shown in Figure C 1 Power 5 VDC is obtained from the system through the PS 2 type interface The keyboard uses a Z86C 14 or equivalent microprocessor The Z86C14 scans the key matrix drivers every 10 ms for pressed keys while at the same time monitoring communications with the keyboard interface of the system unit When a key is pressed a Make code is generated A Break code is generated when the key is released The Make and Break codes are collectively referred to as scan codes keys generate Make and Break codes with the exception of the Pause key which generates a Make code only Num Caps Scroll Lock Lock Lock Data CLK Keyboard Interface System Unit Keyboard Matrix Processor Receivers Figure C 1 Keystroke Processing Elements Block Diagram LIT SR Drivers Et Keyswitch When the system is turned on the keyboard processor generates a Power On Reset POR signal after a period of 150 ms to 2 seconds The keyboard undergoes a Basic Assurance Test BAT that checks for shorted keys and basic operation of the keyboard processor The BAT takes from 300 to 500 ms to complete If the keyboard fails the BAT an error code is sent to the CPU and the keyboard is disabled until an input command is received After successful completion of the POR and BAT a completion code is sent to the CPU and
211. h DD Mode R W 02h Fih DD Option R W 00h F2h DD Type R W FFh F4h DDO R W 00h F5h DD 1 R W 00h For detailed configuration register information refer to the SMSC data sheet for the LPC47B357 I O component 5 3 1 2 Diskette Drive Interface Control The BIOS function INT 13 provides basic control of the diskette drive interface The diskette drive interface can be controlled by software through the LPCA7B357 s I O mapped registers listed in Table 5 5 The diskette drive controller of the LPC47B357 operates in the PC AT mode in these systems Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 5 5 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 5 Input Output Interfaces Table 5 5 Diskette Drive Interface Control Registers Pri Sec Addr Addr Register R W 3FOh 370h Status Register R 7 Interrupt pending 6 Reserved always 1 5 STEP pin status active high 4 TRK 0 status active high 3 HDSEL status 0 side 0 1 side 1 2 INDEX status active high 1 WR PRTK status 0 disk is write protected 0 Direction 0 outward 1 inward 3F1h 371h Status Register B R 7 6 Reserved always 1 s 5 DOR bit 0 status 4 Write data toggle 3 Read data toggle 2 WGATE status active high 1 0 MTR 2 1 ON status active high 3F2h 372h Digital Output Register DOR R W lt 7 6 gt Reserved lt 5 4 gt Motor 1 0 enable active high lt 3 gt
212. h nFFh SCB Array n prefix address supplied by the BASEADRO PCI Config Reg SPECIFICATIONS The operating specifications are listed in Table L 2 Table L 2 Ultra SCSI Host Adapter Card Specifications Operating Voltage 45 VDC Maximum Current Draw 2A Operating Temperature 32 F 0 C to 131 F 55 C Compaq Personal Computers L 3 Original December 2000 Appendix K Compaq PCI 10 100 Ethernet Adapter L 5 SCSI CONNECTORS This SCSI card provides two internal header type connectors one 50 pin one 68 pin and one external D type connector 50 pin L 5 1 EXTERNAL 50 PIN ULTRA SCSI CONNECTOR The card provides one external 50 pin D type Ultra SCSI connector External cabling should meet T 10 SPI 2 standards 50 conductor round shielded Pin 1 Figure L 3 External Ultra SCSI Connector 50 pin Table L 3 External Ultra SCSI Connector Pinout Pin Signal Function Signal Function 1 GND Ground DBO Data Bit 0 2 GND Ground DB1 Data Bit 1 3 GND Ground DB2 Data Bit 2 4 GND Ground DB3 Data Bit 3 5 GND Ground DB4 Data Bit 4 6 GND Ground DB5 Data Bit 5 7 GND Ground DB6 Data Bit 6 8 GND Ground DB7 Data Bit 7 9 GND Ground DBP Data Bus Pulse 10 GND Ground GND Ground 11 GND Ground GND Ground 12 GND Ground GND Ground 13 RSVD Reserved TERMPWR Termination Power 14
213. han from Suspend The graphics card s maximum power consumption on the AGP bus is listed below Maximum current draw 3 3 VDC 3 0A Maximum current draw 9 5 0 VDC 50 mA Maximum current draw 1 5 VDC 10 mA Maximum power consumption 10 2 watts D 4 Compaq Personal Computers Original July 2000 Technical Reference Guide D 6 CONNECTORS There are two connectors associated with the graphics subsystem the display monitor connector and the Feature connector NOTE The graphic card s edge connector mates with the AGP slot connector on the system board This interface is described in chapter 4 of this guide The DB 15 disply monitor connector is provided for connection of a compatible RGB analog monitor The Feature connector allows the attachment of an optional card such as a video tuner D 6 1 MONITOR CONNECTOR Figure D 3 VGA Monitor Connector Female DB 15 as viewed from rear Table D 3 DB 15 Monitor Connector Pinout Pin Signal Description Signal Description 1 R Red Analog PWR 5 fused 1 2 G Blue Analog GND Ground 3 B Green Analog NC Not Connected 4 NC Not Connected SDA DDC2 B Data 5 GND Ground HSync Horizontal Sync 6 R GND Red Analog Ground VSync Vertical Sync 7 G GND Green Analog Ground SCL DDC2 B Clock 8 B GND Blue Analog Ground gt NOTES 1 Fuse automatically resets when excessive load is removed Compaq Personal Computers D 5 Original July 2000 Appendix
214. he system still awake Since the hard drive timer is in the hard drive controller and triggered by drive access the system can be in Standby with the hard drive s still spinning awake System Suspend System Suspend is invoked by pressing and releasing the power switch in under four seconds pressing and holding the switch longer that four seconds will turn the system off The system does not time out from Standby into Suspend Upon invoking Suspend the following actions occur 1 APM aware device drivers put their associated devices into Device Standby 2 O S makes a BIOS call to go into Standby and the BIOS a Spins down the IDE drives b Halts the processor The processor remains halted until the next 55ms tick from the RTC c Atthe 55ms tick of the RTC the processor executes a BIOS routine to check to see if anything has happened to wake the system up If not the processor is halted again d Steps B and C are repeated until a wake up event occurs NOTE These systems will not turn the fan s off as previous systems 7 22 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide System OFF There are two ways to turn the system off 1 Press and hold the power button for longer than 4 seconds not recommended unless absolutely necessary 2 Software shut down as directed by the O S This b
215. he PCI 2 2 specification APM ENVIRONMENT In the APM environment the modem will be placed in Standby as the result of either a user initiated action or by OS timer unless the modem is online or transferring data If a thermal shutdown condition occurs then the modem will be forced into Standby regardless of the operational state ACPI ENVIRONMENT The modem supports the ACPI power management environment and is compliant with PCI specification 2 2 PME signaling The card can provide system wake up from a ring condition PROGRAMMING The Compaq Lucent V 90 56K PCI Modem card is controllerless modem meaning that all operating parameters are controlled by the modem driver Modem updates if any will be facilitated only through the driver Flash ROM is not involved The modem is identified on the PCI bus with the following values Vender ID PCI Configuration space address 00h 11C1h Device ID PCI Configuration space address 02h 0441h CONNECTOR The card includes an RJ 11 connector for connection to an analog phone line The signal is carried on the two center conductors Figure F 3 RJ 11 Connector Female as viewed from rear 4 Compaq Personal Computers Original December 2000 Technical Reference Guide Appendix G COMPAQ ELSA Gloria Il AGP GRAPHICS CARD G 1 INTRODUCTION This appendix describes the Compaq ELSA GLoria AGP Graphics Card used
216. iance IEEE 802 1A 802 1P 802 1Q IEEE 802 3 802 3u amp 802 3x Microsoft PC97 PC98 PC99 NetPC DMI 1 0 amp 2 0 WfM 1 1a amp 2 0 OS Driver Support MS Windows 95 amp 98 MS Windows NT 3 51 amp 4 0 Boot ROM Support Intel PRO 100 Boot Agent PXE 2 0 RPL F12 BIOS Support Yes Bus Inteface 2 2 Card size PCI half length card Power Management Support APM ACPI PCI Power Management Spec Power Comsumption K 8 Compaq Personal Computers 5 0 or 3 3 VDC 375 ma Original December 2000 Technical Reference Guide Appendix L COMPAQ ADAPTEC 29160N SCSI HOST ADAPTER L 1 INTRODUCTION The Compaq Adaptec 29160N SCSI Host Adapter Compaq SP 158364 001 is a PCI peripheral that provides high performance interfacing with compatible SCSI peripherals typically SCSI hard drives The card installs in a PCI slot and supports full bus mastering capability This appendix covers the following subjects Functional description L 2 page 1 2 SCSI adapter programming L 3 page L 3 Specifications L 4 page L 3 SCSI connectors 1 5 page L 4 Internal Wide Ultra SCSI Connector Ultra SCSI Connector External Ultra SCSI Connector 1 7892 Figure L 1 Compaq Adaptec 29160N SCSI Host Adapter Card Layout PCA 157342 001 Compaq Personal Computers L 1 Original December 2000 Appendix K Compaq PCI 10 100 Ether
217. iform resource locator us us microsecond USB Universal Serial Bus UTP unshielded twisted pair V volt VESA Video Electronic Standards Association VGA video graphics adapter vib vibrato VLSI very large scale integration VRAM Video RAM WOL Wake On LAN WRAM Windows RAM ZF zero flag zero insertion force socket 1 6 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide Chapter 2 SYSTEM OVERVIEW 2 1 INTRODUCTION Compaq Deskpro Personal Computers Figure 2 1 featuring the Intel Pentium 4 processor provide very high performance for advanced e business and multimedia applications This guide covers Compaq Deskpro EXS Minitower and the Compaq Deskpro Workstation 300 models that feature the Intel Pentium 4 processor and the Intel 850 chipset Compag Deskpro EXS Minitower r Compaq Deskpro Workstation 300 Figure 2 1 Compaq Deskpro Personal Computers with Monitors This chapter includes the following topics Features and options 2 2 page 2 2 Mechanical design 2 3 page 2 4 System architecture 2 4 page 2 8 Specifications 2 5 page 2 13 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 2 1 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 2 System Overview 2 2 FEATURES AND OPTIONS This section describes the standard features and
218. igure 5 7 USB Packet Formats Data is transferred LSb first A cyclic redundancy check CRC is applied to all packets except a handshake packet A packet causing a CRC error is generally completely ignored by the receiver Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 5 23 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 5 Input Output Interfaces 5 7 2 USB PROGRAMMING Programming the USB interface consists of configuration which typically occurs during POST and control which occurs at runtime 5 7 2 1 USB Configuration The USB interface operates as a PCI device 31 within the 82801 ICH2 component functions 2 and 4 and is configured using PCI Configuration Registers as listed in Table 5 17 Table 5 17 USB Interface Configuration Registers Config Reset Config Reset Addr Register Value Addr Register Value 00 01h Vender ID 8086h 00h 02 03h Device ID 2442h or 2444h 20 23h Space Base Address 1 04 05h PCI Command 0000h 2C 2Dh Sub Vender ID 00h 06 07h PCI Status 0280h 3Ch Interrupt Line 00h 08h Revision ID 00h 3Dh Interrupt Pin 03h 09h Programming I F 00h 60h Serial Bus Release No 10h OAh Sub Class Code 03h Co USB Leg Kybd Ms 2000h OBh Base Class Code OCh C4h USB Resume Enable 00h 5 7 2 2 USB Control The USB is controlled through I O registers as listed in table 5 18
219. in the standard configuration on some models and also available as an option This card layout shown in the following figure installs in a system s AGP slot Compaq ELSA II graphics card P N 174565 001 provides high 2D performance as well as mid level 3D capabilities Feature Connector SDRAM RGB Monitor Connector NVIDIA NV10 Quadro Controller SDRAM Figure G 1 Compaq ELSA GLoria AGP Graphics Card P N 174565 001 Layout This appendix covers the following subjects Functional description D 2 page D 2 Display modes D 3 page D 3 Software support information D 4 page D 4 Monitor power management D 5 page D 4 Connectors D 6 page D 5 Compaq Personal Computers G 1 Original November 2000 Appendix Compaq ELSA GLoria Il AGP Graphics 5 2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION The ELSA GLoria II SD Graphics Card provides high performance 2D and 3D display imaging The card s AGP design provides an economical approach to 3D processing by off loading 3D effects such as texturing z buffering and alpha blending to the system memory while 64 megabytes of on board SDRAM stores the main display image 128 bit NVIDIA N10 Graphics Controller 166 MHz Data Bus Memory 64 MB Video SDRAM AGP Scalar Frame Buffer Bus Card CRT Edge Controller Connector Analog Monitor ate
220. ing for SYNC 4 1210 10 Line quality prevented remote response 1204 02 Time out waiting for response 4 1210 11 Modem time out waiting for remote connection NOTES 1 Local loopback mode 2 Analog loopback originate mode 3 Analog loopback answer mode 4 Modem auto originate test 5 Modem auto answer test 6 Modem direct connect test Compaq Personal Computers 7 Changed November 2000 Appendix Error Messages and Codes 12 SYSTEM STATUS ERROR MESSAGES 16 Table A 11 System Status Error Messages Message Probable Cause 1601 xx Temperature violation 1611 xx Fan failure A 13 HARD DRIVE ERROR MESSAGES 17xx xx Table A 12 Hard Drive Error Messages Message Probable Cause Message Probable Cause 17 01 Exceeded max soft error limit 17xx 51 Failed I O read test 17xx 02 Exceeded max Hard error limit 17xx 52 Failed file compare test 17xx 03 Previously exceeded max soft error limit 17xx 53 Failed drive head register test 17xx 04 Previously exceeded max hard error limit 17 54 Failed digital input register test 17xx 05 Failed to reset controller 17 55 Oylinder 1 error 17xx 06 Fatal error while reading 17 56 Failed controller RAM diagnostics 17 07 Fatal error while writing 17xx 57 Failed controller to drive diagnostics 17xx 08 Failed compare of R W buffers 17xx 58 Failed to write sector buffer 17xx 09 Failed to
221. ion bit not set 19xx 10 Format mode error 19 31 Unexpected drive status 19xx 11 Drive recalibration error 19 32 Device fault 19 12 Tape not Servo Written 19 33 Illegal command 19 13 Tape formatted 19 34 No data detected 19 14 Drive time out error 19 35 Power on reset occurred 19 15 Sensor error flag 19 36 Failed to set FLEX format mode 19 16 Block locate block ID error 19 37 Failed to reset FLEX format mode 19xx 17 Soft error limit exceeded 19 38 Data mismatch on directory track 19 18 Hard error limit exceeded 19 39 Data mismatch on track 0 19 19 Write probably ID error 19 40 Failed self test 19xx 20 NEC fatal error 19xx 91 Power lost during test 1900 xx Tape ID test failed 1904 xx Tape BOT EOT test failed 1901 xx Tape servo write failed 1905 xx Tape read test failed 1902 xx Tape format failed 1906 xx Tape R W compare test failed 1903 xx Tape drive sensor test failed 1907 xx Tape write protect failed A 15 VIDEO GRAPHICS ERROR MESSAGES 24xx xx Table A 14 Video Graphics Error Messages Message Probable Cause Message Probable Cause 2402 01 Video memory test failed 2418 02 EGA shadow RAM test failed 2403 01 Video attribute test failed 2419 01 EGA ROM checksum test failed 2404 01 Video character set test failed 2420 01 EGA attribute test failed 2405 01 80x25 mode 9x14 cell test failed 2421 01 640x200 mode test failed
222. ions Continued Heading Option Storage Device continued Configuration continued Description Translation Mode IDE disks only Lets you select the translation mode to be used for the device This enables the BIOS to access disks partitioned and formatted on other systems and may be necessary for users of older versions of Unix e g SCO Unix version 3 2 Options are Bit Shift LBA Assisted User and None 4 CAUTION Ordinarily the translation mode selected automatically by the BIOS should not be changed If the selected translation mode is not compatible with the translation mode that was active when the disk was partitioned and formatted the data on the disk will be inaccessible Translation Parameters IDE Disks only Allows you to specify the parameters logical cylinders heads and sectors per track used by the BIOS to translate disk I O requests from the operating system or an application into terms the hard drive can accept Logical cylinders may not exceed 1024 The number of heads may not exceed 256 The number of sectors per track may not exceed 63 These fields are only visible and changeable when the drive translation mode is set to User Multisector Transfers IDE ATA devices only Specifies how many sectors are transferred per multi sector PIO operation Options subject to device capabilities are Disabled 8 and 16 Quiet Drive available on select drives only Performance Allows the drive to operate a
223. it data without additional use of system memory and software This function referred to as IP security IPSEC uses a configurable algorithm and established Data Encryption Standards DES to provide high performance full transmission rate encryption Received IPSEC data frames are re submitted to the controller for processing and then returned to the driver Key features of IPSEC support include Encryption capability of 56 bit DES to 168 bit 3DES Out of order processing of non security transmit frames during security mode 5 and MD 5 authentication with optional HMAC cryptographic hashing 14 Compaq Personal Computers Original December 2000 1 3 1 1 3 2 Technical Reference Guide POWER MANAGEMENT SUPPORT These adapters support APM and ACPI power management environments as well as the Wired for Management WfM and Wake On LAN WOL standards The adapter is designed to be powered up as long as the system unit is plugged into a live AC outlet to provide system wake up functionality Power is provided by either the auxiliary 3 3 VDC power rail of the PCI bus when installed in systems compliant with PCI ver 2 2 or by auxiliary 5 VDC through the WOL connector NOTE Controlling a system unit s power through an AC outlet strip will with the strip turned off disable wake up functionality APM ENVIRONMENT The Advanced Power Management APM functionality of system wake up is implemented through the system
224. k data packets A row packet may be omitted if the row to be accessed is already open Another important characteristic is that the ROW COL and DQA DQB signal lines act as independent buses and simultaneous transfers of row column and data information can take place Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 3 7 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 3 Processor Memory Subsystem 3 3 3 RDRAM POWER MANAGEMENT The Rambus architecture provides for power management of each RDRAM device on a RIMM RDRAM power management control is compatible with but may also work independently of ACPI Power management of RDRAM is handled through control packets as well as the serial bus Aside from complete system off state RDRAM may be placed in one of four basic power states Active Standby Nap Powerdown These states are characterized by parameters such as power consumed refresh method and the time required to resume full Active state operation The following table defines the RDRAM power states State Power Consumed 1 Refresh Method RDRAM CLK Exit Latency 2 RDRAM Functionality Powerdown 1 mW Self Stopped 12us Lowest power state and condition entered after initialization Can remain in this state indefinitely Brought out of Powerdown only by command over the SIO serial bus Nap 10 mW 90 ns Low power
225. l Torito Bootable CD ROM Format Specification 1 0 ATAPI Removeable Media Device BIOS Specification 1 0 The BIOS ROM is a 512KB Intel Firmware Hub or Firmware Hub compatible part The runtime portion of the BIOS resides a 128KB block from E0000h to FFFFFh This chapter includes the following topics 999999 ROM flashing 7 2 page 7 2 Boot functions 7 3 page 7 4 Setup utility 7 4 page 7 6 Client management functions 7 5 page 7 13 PnP support 7 6 page 7 15 Power management functions 7 7 page 7 17 USB legacy support 7 8 page 7 24 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 7 1 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 7 BIOS ROM 7 2 ROM FLASHING The system BIOS firmware is contained in a flash ROM device that can be re written with BIOS code using the ROMPAQ utility or a remote flash program allowing easy upgrading including changing the splash screen displayed during the POST routine 7 2 1 UPGRADING Upgrading the BIOS is not normally required but may be necessary if changes are made to the unit s operating system hard drive or processor All BIOS ROM upgrades are available directly from Compaq Flashing is done either locally with a ROMPaq diskette or remotely using the network boot function described in the section 8 3 2 This system includes 64 KB of write protected boot block ROM that provides a way to recover from a failed remote flashing of th
226. l and Break pos 16 results in the generation of BIOS function INT 1Bh This software interrupt provides a method of exiting an application and generally halts execution of the current program Alt The Alt keys pos 93 95 can be used in conjunction with the same keys available for use with the Ctrl keys with the exception that position 14 SysRq is available instead of position 16 Break The Alt key can also be used in conjunction with the numeric keypad keys pos 55 57 72 74 and 88 90 to enter the decimal value of an ASCII character code from 1 255 application determines the actual function of the keystrokes Both Alt key positions provide identical functionality The combination keystroke of Alt and SysRq results in software interrupt 15h AX 8500h being executed It is up to the application to use or not use this BIOS function The Ctrl and Alt keys can be used together in conjunction with keys in positions 1 13 17 34 39 54 60 71 and 76 84 The Ctrl and Alt key positions used and the sequence in which they are pressed make no difference as long as they are held down at the time the third key is pressed The Ctrl Alt and Delete keystroke combination required twice if in the Windows environment initiates a system reset warm boot that is handled by the BIOS C 2 4 3 Windows Keystrokes Windows enhanced keyboards include three additional key positions Key positions 110 and 111 marked with the Windows logo H have the s
227. l s IA32 class of processors Featuring Intel s NetBurst M architecture the Pentium 4 processor is designed for intensive multimedia and internet applications of today and the future while maintaining compatibility with software written for earlier Pentium III Pentium II Pentium Celeron and x86 microprocessors Key features of the Pentium 4 processor include Hyper Pipelined Technology The main processing loop has twice the depth 20 stages of the Pentium III allowing for increased processing frequencies Execution Trace Cache A new feature supporting the branch prediction mechanism the trace cache stores translated sequences of branching micro operations uops and is checked when suspected re occurring branches are detected in the main processing loop This feature allows instruction decoding to be removed from the main processing loop Rapid Execution Engine Arithmetic Logic Units ALUs run at twice 2x processing frequency for higher throughput and reduced latency 256 KB Advanced transfer L2 cache Using 32 byte wide interface at processing speed the L2 cache can provide 48 GB s perrformance 3x over the Pentium IIT Advanced dynamic execution Using a larger 4K branch target buffer and improved prediction algorithm branch mis predictions are reduced by an average of 33 96 over the Pentium III Enhanced Floating Point Processor With 128 bit integer processing and deeper pipelining the Pentium 4 s FPU
228. le E 1 NVIDIA GeForce2 GTS Graphics Display Modes Resolution Bits per pixel Color Depth Max Refresh Frequency Hz 640 x 480 8 256 240 640 x 480 16 65K 240 640 x 480 32 16 7M 240 800 x 600 8 256 240 800 x 600 16 65K 240 800 x 600 32 16 7M 240 960 x 720 8 256 120 960 x 720 16 65K 120 960 x 720 32 16 7M 120 1024 x 768 8 256 240 1024 x 768 16 65K 240 1024 x 768 32 16 7M 200 1152 864 8 256 200 1152 x 864 16 65K 200 1152 x 864 32 16 7M 170 1280 x 960 8 256 170 1280 x 960 16 65K 170 1280 x 960 32 16 7M 150 1280 x 1024 8 256 170 1280 x 1024 16 65K 170 1280 x 1024 32 16 7M 150 1600 x 900 8 256 150 1600 x 900 16 65K 150 1600 x 900 32 16 7M 120 1600 x 1200 8 256 120 1600 x 1200 16 65K 120 1600 x 1200 32 16 7M 100 1920 x 1080 8 256 100 1920 x 1080 16 65K 100 1920 x 1080 32 16 7M 75 1920 x 1200 8 256 100 1920 x 1200 16 65K 100 1920 x 1200 32 16 7M 85 1920 x 1440 8 256 85 1920 x 1440 16 65K 85 1920 x 1440 32 16 7M 75 2048 x 1536 8 256 75 2048 x 1536 16 65K 75 2048 x 1536 32 16 7M 65 Original November 2000 Compaq Personal Computers E 3 Appendix Compaq NVIDIA GeForce2 GTS Graphics E 4 SOFTWARE SUPPORT INFORMATION The NVIDIA GeForce2 GTS graphics card is fully compatible with software written for legacy video modes VGA EGA CGA and needs no driver support for those modes Drivers are provided with or available for the card to provide extended mode support for the current operating systems and progra
229. le with hyper pipelined technology that can handle significantly more instructions at a time Since branch mis predicts would result in serious performance hits with such a long pipeline the Pentium 4 features a branch prediction mechanism improved with the addition of an execution trace cache and a refined prediction algorithm The execution trace cache can store 12k micro ops decoded instructions dealing with branching sequences that are checked when re occurring branches are processed Code that is not executed bypassed is no longer stored in the L1 cache as was the case in the Pentium III The out of order core features Advanced Dynamic Execution which provides a large window 126 instructions for execution units to work with A more accurate branch prediction algorithm along with a larger 4 KB branch target buffer that stores more details on branch history results in a 33 reduction in branch mis predictions over the Pentium III The L1 data cache features a low latency design for minimum response to cache hits The 256 KB advanced transfer L2 cache features a 256 bit 32 byte interface operating at processing speed The L2 cache of the 1 5 GHz Pentium 4 can therefore provide a transfer rate of 48 GB s The combined improvements of the Pentium 4 s CPU core the rapid execution engine s ALUs to operate at twice the processing frequency to handle the steady stream of instructions The front side bus FSB of the Pentium 4 uses a 100
230. ler is controlled though registers that may be mapped in system memory space or variable I O space The registers are listed in the following table Table G 2 Control Registers Offset No of Offset No of Addr Register Bytes Addr Register Bytes 00h SCB Status 19h Flow Control Register 2 02h SCB Command 1Bh PMDR 04h SCB General Pointer 1Ch General Control 08h PORT 1Dh General Status A AININ A AININ OCh Flash Control Reg 1E 2Fh Reserved 10 OEh EEPROM Control Reg 30h Function Event Register 4 10h Mgmt Data I F Reg 34h Function Event Mask Register 4 14h Rx Direct Mem Access Byte Cnt 38h Function Present State Register 4 18h Early Receive Interrupt 20h Force Event Register 4 Not implemented in these systems CardBus registers L6 Compaq Personal Computers Original December 2000 1 5 NETWORK CONNECTOR Technical Reference Guide Figure I 3 shows the RJ 45 connector used for the NIC interface This connector includes the two status LEDs as part of the connector assembly Speed LED oA 87654321 Activity LED I 5 Description Transmit Transmit Receive Receive Qen Figure I 3 Ethernet TPE Connector RJ 45 viewed from card edge 6 ADAPTER SPECIFICATIONS Table l 3 Adapter Specifications Parameter Modes Supported 10BASE T half duplex 10 MB s 10Base T f
231. lling edges of the clock signal allowing a 400 MHz clock to provide an effective speed of 800 and resulting a transfer rate of 1 6 GB s Doubling the number of channels doubles the throughput These systems feature dual channel RDRAM architecture that provides a maximum transfer rate of 3 2 GB s Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 3 5 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 3 Processor Memory Subsystem 3 3 14 RAMBUS ATTRIBUTES To ensure signal quality during high speed memory transfers the Rambus interface design departs from previous memory interface designs in several key aspects Figure 3 4 Rambus uses a daisy chained signal distribution system that requires that all memory sockets be populated with either a RIMM or a continuity module CRIMM in order to maintain constant load impedance Rambus Signaling Levels RSL uses a 1 4 volt reference with a 0 8 volt swing between logic 0 at 1 8 V and logic 1 at 1 0 V On these systems RIMMs or CRIMMs must be installed in pairs one module for each channel A maximum of two gigabytes of memory may be installed using 512 MB RIMMs These systems ship with PC800 400 MHz RIMMs but will also accept PC700 or PC600 RIMMs A mix of ECC and non ECC RIMMs may be installed although all RIMMs must be ECC to realize ECC benefits RIMM Sockets RIMM or CRIMM Shown Bus Termination
232. llowing table Table 5 10 Parallel Interface Configuration Registers Index Reset Address Function R W Value 30h Activate R W 00h 60h Base Address MSB R W 00h 61h Base Address LSB R W 00h 70h Interrupt Select R W 00h 74h DMA Channel Select R W 04h FOh Mode Register R W 00h Fih Mode Register 2 R W 00h Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 5 13 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 5 Input Output Interfaces 5 5 4 2 Parallel Interface Control The BIOS function INT 17 provides simplified control of the parallel interface Basic functions such as initialization character printing and printer status are provide by subfunctions of INT 17 The parallel interface is controllable by software through a set of I O mapped registers The number and type of registers available depends on the mode used SPP EPP or ECP Table 5 11 lists the parallel registers and associated functions based on mode Table 5 11 Parallel Interface Control Registers SPP EPP ECP y o Mode Mode Mode Address Register Ports Ports Ports Base Data LPT1 2 3 LPT1 2 LPT1 2 3 Base 1h Printer Status LPT1 2 3 LPT1 2 LPT1 2 3 Base 2h Control LPT1 2 3 LPT1 2 LPT1 2 3 Base Address LPT1 2 Base 4h Data Port 0 LPT1 2 Base 5h Data Port 1 LPT1 2 Base 6h Data Port 2 LPT1 2 Base 7h Data Port 3 LPT1 2 400
233. low power state NOTE Wake up functionality requires that certain circuits receive auxiliary power while the system is turned off The system unit must be plugged into a live AC outlet for wake up events to function Using an AC power strip to control system unit power will disable wake up event functionality The wake up sequence for each event occurs as follows Wake On LAN The network interface controller NIC can be configured for detection of a Magic Packet and wake the system up from sleep mode through the assertion of the PME signal on the PCI bus Refer to Chapter 5 Network Support for more information Modem Ring A ring condition on serial port A COMI or serial port B COM2 can be detected by the power control logic and if so configured cause the PS On signal to be asserted Power Management Event A power management event that asserts the PME signal on the PCI bus can be enabled to cause the power control logic to generate the PS On Note that the PCI card must be PCI ver 2 2 compliant to support this function 6 4 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 6 3 POWER DISTRIBUTION 6 3 1 3 3 5 12 VDC DISTRIBUTION The power supply assembly includes a multi connector cable assembly that routes 3 3 VDC 5 VDC 5 VDC 12 VC and 12 VDC to the system board as well as to the individual
234. loy a PGA423 zero insertion force ZIF socket designed for mounting a Flip Chip FC PGA423 processor package Figure 2 7 Heat Sink Retaining Clip Heat Sink Retaining Clip Heat Sink FC PGA423 Lock Unlock Package Handle Shown in unlock position lt A PGA423 Socket Figure 2 7 Processor Assembly And Mounting The PGA423 socket allows easy changing upgrading of the processor Raising the Lock Unlock handle of the socket in the vertical position allows the processor package to be removed or inserted into the socket Lowering the Lock Unlock handle in the down horizontal position locks the processor package in place The heat sink is placed on top of the processor and held in place by two retaining clips 2 10 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 2 4 2 CHIPSET The chipset consists of a Memory Controller Hub MCH an I O Controller Hub ICH and a FirmWare Hub FWH Table 2 2 lists the integrated functions provided by the two types of chipsets used in these systems Table 2 2 Chipset Comparison Chipset Component Function 850 82850 MCH AGP 4X interface Dual channel RDRAM controller supporting up to 4 PC800 RIMMs 400 MHz FSB 82801BA ICH2 PCI bus LPC bus I F
235. m board 2 7 system board LEDs 6 3 system ID 7 6 7 14 system memory 2 12 system resources 4 15 system ROM 7 1 system status indications 4 33 4 30 TAFI 4 34 temperature status 7 14 thermal sensing 4 34 transmission modes modem F 3 troubleshooting 6 3 typematic C 8 UART 5 8 F 2 UART transfer modes modem F 3 Universal Serial Bus USB interface 5 22 upgrading BIOS 7 2 upgrading processor 3 4 USB interface 5 22 USB keyboard C 4 USB legacy support 7 23 USB ports 2 12 90 F 2 vender ID 4 4 VESA connector E 6 G 6 H 6 voltage core 6 6 wake up power 6 4 wake up events 6 4 Wake On LAN 6 4 Windows keys C 9 WOL 6 4 I 5 K 5 K 7 This page is intentionally blank
236. manageability applications are Compaq specific unless otherwise indicated Table 7 4 Client Management Functions INT15 AX Function Mode E800h Get system ID Real 16 amp 32 bit Prot E813h Get monitor data Real 16 amp 32 bit Prot E814h Get system revision Real 16 amp 32 bit Prot E816h Get temperature status Real 16 amp 32 bit Prot E817h Get drive attribute Real E818h Get drive off line test Real E819h Get chassis serial number Real 16 amp 32 bit Prot E820h 1 Get system memory map Real E81Ah Write chassis serial number Real E81Bh Get hard drive threshold Real E81Eh Get hard drive ID Real E827h RIMM EEPROM Access Real 16 amp 32 bit Prot NOTE 1 Industry standard function All 32 bit protected mode functions are accessed by using the industry standard BIOS32 Service Directory Using the service directory involves three steps 1 Locating the service directory 2 Using the service directory to obtain the entry point for the client management functions 3 Calling the client management service to perform the desired function The BIOS32 Service Directory is a 16 byte block that begins on a 16 byte boundary between the physical address range of OE0000h OFFFFFh The format is as follows Offset No Bytes Description 00h 4 Service identifier four ASCII characters 04h 4 Entry point for the BIOS32 Service Directory 08h 1 Revision level 09h 1 Length of data structur
237. mming environments such as Windows 98 95 Windows NT 4 0 3 51 Windows 3 11 3 1 OS 2 Quick Draw MS Direct Draw and Direct X Direct 3D OpenGL 9 9 9 9 9 PCI bus configuration data Vendor ID 10DEh Device ID 0150h E5 POWER MANAGEMENT AND CONSUMPTION This controller provides monitor power control for monitors that conform to the VESA display power management signaling DPMS protocol This protocol defines different power consumption conditions and uses the HSYNC and VSYNC signals to select a monitor s power condition Table E 2 lists the monitor power conditions Table E 2 Monitor Power Management Conditions HSYNC VSYNC Power Mode Description Active Active On Monitor is completely powered up If activated the inactivity counter counts down during system inactivity and if allowed to tiemout generates an SMI to initiate the Suspend mode Active Inactive Suspend Monitors high voltage section is turned off and CRT heater filament voltage is reduced from 6 6 to 4 4 VDC The Off mode inactivity timer counts down from the preset value and if allowed to timeout another SMI is generated and serviced resulting in the monitor being placed into the Off mode Wake up from Suspend mode is typically a few seconds Inactive Inactive Off Monitor s high voltage section and heater circuitry is turned off Wake up from Off mode is a little longer than from Suspend E 4 Compaq Personal Computers Original
238. modules CRIMMs Up to two gigabytes of memory may be installed Compaq Deskpro EXS systems are shipped with non ECC PC800 RIMMs Compaq Deskpro Workstation 300 systems are shipped with ECC PC800 RIMMs Both systems support ECC and non ECC RIMMs MASS STORAGE models include a 3 5 inch 1 44 MB diskette drive installed as drive A Most models also include a CD ROM drive The Deskpro EXS and some Deskpro Workstation 300 models will include UATA100 EIDE hard drive while select Deskpro Workstation 300 models will include an Ultra 160 SCSI controller PCI card and SCSI hard drive Standard hard drives feature Drive Protection System DPS support which uses industry standard function ATAPI 5 to check drive integrity Standard drives also use SMART III technology that tests drive data during periods of drive inactivity for corruption SERIAL PARALLEL INTERFACES models include two serial ports and a parallel port accessible at the rear of the chassis Each serial port is RS 232 C 16550 compatible and supports standard baud rates up to 115 200 as well as high speed baud rates of 230K and 460K and uses a DB 9 connector The parallel interface is Enhanced Parallel Port EPP1 9 and Enhanced Capability Port ECP compatible and supports bi directional data transfers through a DB 25 connector UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS INTERFACE models feature four Universal Serial Bus USB ports that provide a 12Mb s interface for peripherals The
239. n from Suspend G 4 Compaq Personal Computers Original November 2000 G 6 G 6 1 Technical Reference Guide CONNECTORS There are two connectors associated with the graphics subsystem the display monitor connector and the Feature connector NOTE The graphic card s edge connector mates with the AGP slot connector on the system board This interface is described in chapter 4 of this guide MONITOR CONNECTOR The display monitor connector is provided for connection of a compatible RGB analog monitor Figure G 3 VGA Monitor Connector Female DB 15 as viewed from rear Table G 3 DB 15 Monitor Connector Pinout Pin Signal Description Signal Description 1 R Red Analog PWR 5 fused 1 2 G Blue Analog GND Ground 3 B Green Analog NC Not Connected 4 NC Not Connected SDA DDC2 B Data 5 GND Ground HSync Horizontal Sync 6 R GND Red Analog Ground VSync Vertical Sync 7 G GND Green Analog Ground SCL DDC2 B Clock 8 B GND Blue Analog Ground NOTES 1 Fuse automatically resets when excessive load is removed Compaq Personal Computers G 5 Original November 2000 Appendix Compaq ELSA GLoria Il AGP Graphics G 6 2 VIDEO FEATURE CONNECTOR The Video Feature connector allows a video peripheral such as a TV tuner card to provide video input to the graphics card This interface is compliant with VESA VIP specification 1 1
240. nal Computers 4 39 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 4 System Support This page is intentionally blank 4 40 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide Chapter 5 INPUT OUTPUT INTERFACES 5 1 5 2 5 2 1 INTRODUCTION This chapter describes the standard 1 system board interfaces that provide input and output I O porting of data and specifically discusses interfaces that are controlled through I O mapped registers The following I O interfaces are covered in this chapter Enhanced IDE interface 5 2 page 5 1 Diskette drive interface 5 3 page 5 4 Serial interfaces 5 4 page 5 8 Parallel interface 5 5 page 5 11 Keyboard pointing device interface 5 6 page 5 16 Universal serial bus interface 5 7 page 5 22 Audio subsystem 5 8 page 5 26 Network support 5 9 page 5 33 ENHANCED IDE INTERFACE The enhanced IDE EIDE interface consists of primary and secondary controllers integrated into the 82801 ICH2 component of the chipset Two 40 pin IDE connectors one for each controller are included on the system board Each controller can be configured independently for the following modes of operation Programmed I O PIO mode CPU controls drive transactions through standard I O mapped registers of the IDE drive 8237 DMA mode
241. nce Guide Control of the data and clock signals is shared by the 8042and the keyboard depending on the originator of the transferred data Note that the clock signal is always generated by the keyboard After the keyboard receives a command from the 8042 the keyboard returns an ACK code If a parity error or timeout occurs a Resend command is sent to the 8042 Table 5 13 lists and describes commands that can be issued by the 8042 to the keyboard Table 5 13 8042 To Keyboard Commands Command Value Description Set Reset Status Indicators EDh Enables LED indicators Value EDh is followed by an option byte that specifies the indicator as follows Bits lt 7 3 gt not used Bit 2 Caps Lock 0 off 1 on Bit 1 NUM Lock 0 off 1 on Bit 0 Scroll Lock 0 off 1 on Echo EEh Keyboard returns EEh when previously enabled Invalid Command EFh F1 These commands are not acknowledged h Select Alternate Scan Codes FOh Instructs the keyboard to select another set of scan codes and sends an option byte after ACK is received 01h Mode 1 02h Mode 2 03h Mode 3 Read 10 F2h Instructs the keyboard to stop scanning and return two keyboard ID bytes Set Typematic Rate Display F3h Instructs the keyboard to change typematic rate and delay to specified values Bit lt 7 gt Reserved 0 Bits lt 6 5 gt Delay Time 00 250 ms 01 500 ms 10 2 750 ms 11 1000 ms Bits lt 4
242. nd checking such parameters as memory control and PCI bus operation These registers reside in the PCI Configuration Space and accessed using the methods described in Chapter 4 section 4 2 Table 3 1 Host PCI Bridge Configuration Registers MCH Device 0 PCI Reset PCI R Reset Config Register Value Config egister Value Addr Addr 00 01h Vender ID 8086h 6A 6Bh DRAM Control Reg 00h 02 03h Device ID 1130h 6C 6Fh Memory Buffer Strength 55h 04 05h Command 0006h 70h Multi Transaction Timer 00h 06 07h Status 7th CPU Latency Timer 10h 08h Revision ID 72h SMRAM Control 02h 0A 0Bh Class Code 90h Error Command 00h Latency Timer 00h 91h Error Status Register 0 00h Header 00h 92h Error Status Register 1 00h 10 13h Aperture Base Config 2 93h Reset Control 00h 50 51h PAC Config Reg 00h AO A3h AGP Capability Identifier N A 53h Data Buffer Control 83h A4 A7h AGP Status N A 55 56h DRAM Row Type 00h A8 ABh AGP Command 00h 57h DRAM Control Oth BO B3h AGP Control 00h 58h DRAM Timing 00h B4h Aperture Size 0000h 59 5Fh PAM 0 6 Registers 00h B8 BBh Aperture Translation Table 0000h 60 67h DRAM Row Boundary 01h BCh Aperture I F Timer 00h 68h Fixed DRAM Hole 00h BDh Low Priority Timer 00h NOTES Refer to Intel Inc documentation for detailed description of registers Assume unmarked locations gaps as reserved 3 10 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 3
243. ndent of the system timer The BIOS will not inform the O S that it is time to go to sleep until there has been no IDE primary activity for the system time out time The IDE hard drive will spin down when its timer expires according to the countdown time 0 disabled 10 15 20 30 60 120 180 or 240 minutes selected in the Setup utility F10 NOTE The O S Win98 and later can use the Enable Disable Timer Based Request APM BIOS call to disable the system timer the BIOS uses so that the O S can have direct control of the timing Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 7 21 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 7 BIOS ROM 7 7 3 2 Going to Sleep in APM There are three levels of system sleep in APM System Hard Drive Standby System Suspend and System Off System Hard Drive Standby System Standby is achieved only by a system timer time out at such time the following occurs 1 APM aware device drivers put their respective devices into Device Standby 2 O S makes a BIOS call to go into System Standby NOTE The BIOS ROM of these systems will not turn the fan s off as on previous systems If the hard drive timer times out due to inactivity the hard drive motor stops spinning the platters Depending on drive type some drives can cut power to some of the drive electronics that are not needed during standby The drive s can be in this state with t
244. nector refer to Figure 5 2 and Table 5 6 for the pinout for diskette drives Drive power is supplied through a separate connector Figure 5 2 34 Pin Diskette Drive Connector Table 5 6 34 Pin Diskette Drive Connector Pinout Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description 1 GND Ground 18 DIR Drive head direction control 2 LOW DEN Low density select 19 GND Ground 3 EE KEY 20 STEP Drive head track step control 4 MEDIA ID Media identification 21 GND Ground 5 GND Ground 22 WR DATA Write data 6 DRV 4 Drive 4 select 23 GND Ground SEL 7 GND Ground 24 WR ENABLE Enable for WR DATA 8 INDEX Media index is detected 25 GND Ground 9 GND Ground 26 TRK 00 Heads at track 00 indicator 10 1 ON Activates drive motor 27 GND Ground 11 GND Ground 28 WR PRTK Media write protect status 12 DRV 2 Drive 2 select 29 GND Ground SEL 13 GND Ground 30 RD DATA Data and clock read off disk 14 DRV 1 Drive 1 select 31 GND Ground SEL 15 GND Ground 32 SIDE SEL Head select side 0 or 1 16 MTR2ON Activates drive motor 33 GND Ground 17 GND Ground 34 DSK CHG Drive door opened indicator Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 5 7 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 5 Interfaces 5 4 5 4 1 SERIAL INTE
245. net Adapter L 2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION A block diagram of the SCSI Adapter is shown in Figure L 2 The adapter s architecture is based on the AIC 7892 SCSI controller working off the 32 bit 66 33 MHz PCI bus Providing full bus mastering capability the adapter supports data transfers up to 266 MB s using the burst mode rate on 66 MHz 32 bit PCI bus The AIC 7892 controller is an Ultra160 controller with an on board 20 MIPS SCSI sequencer that can process SCSI commands without intervention from the host microprocessor The sequencer uses micro code that is downloaded from the host during initialization Single ended SCSI drivers are built into the controller and a 1 K data FIFO and an internal 4 KB SRAM memory LED is provided to indicate SCSI bus activity The AIC7892 provides a memory interface that is used by the Serial EEPROM and the BIOS ROM The serial EEPROM stores non volatile configuration data and the BIOS ROM which is a flash ROM contains additional configuration data and SCSI functions The programmable array logic PAL controls the Serial EEPROM to AIC7892 interface SCSI Activity Serial Active Ultra160 EEPROM 40 2 AIC7892 PCI Slot TR Int SCSI Connector SE AIC3860 V Transceiver N Ex SCSI Connector SE Chip Int SCSI Connector Active Ultra160 SE LVD Term Figure L 2 Compagq Adaptec Ultra SCSI Adap
246. ng keyboard data i e translating the keyboard s scan codes into ASCII codes The keyboard pointing device interface is accessed by the CPU through I O mapped ports 60h and 64h which provide the following functions Output buffer reads Input buffer writes Status reads Command writes 999 Ports 60h and 64h can be accessed using the IN instruction for a read and the OUT instruction for a write Prior to reading data from port 60h the Output Buffer Full status bit 64h bit lt 0 gt should be checked to ensure data is available Likewise before writing a command or data the Input Buffer Empty status bit 64h bit lt 1 gt should also be checked to ensure space is available Port 60h I O port 60h is used for accessing the input and output buffers This register is used to send and receive data from the keyboard and the pointing device This register is also used to send the second byte of multi byte commands to the 8042 and to receive responses from the 8042 for commands that require a response A read of 60h by the CPU yields the byte held in the output buffer The output buffer holds data that has been received from the keyboard and is to be transferred to the system A CPU write to 60h places a data byte in the input byte buffer and sets the CMD DATA bit of the Status register to DATA The input buffer is used for transferring data from the system to the keyboard data written to this port by the CPU will be tran
247. ng logic external to the microprocessor There are two non maskable interrupt signals the NMI and the SMI These signals have service priority over all maskable interrupts with the SMI having top priority over all interrupts including the NMI NMI Generation The Non Maskable Interrupt NMI signal can be generated by one of the following actions Parity errors detected on a PCI bus activating SERR or PERR Microprocessor internal error activating IERRA or IERRB The SERR and PERR signals are routed through the ICH component which in turn activates the NMI to the microprocessor Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 4 17 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 4 System Support The NMI Status Register at I O port 061h contains NMI source and status data as follows NMI Status Register 61h Bit 7 NMI Status 0 No NMI from system board parity error 1 NMI requested read only IOCHK NMI 0 No NMI from IOCHK 1 IOCHK is active low NMI requested read only 3 IOCHK NMI Enable Disable 0 NMI from IOCHK enabled 1 NMI from IOCHK disabled and cleared R W 2 System Board Parity Error PERR SERR NMI Enable 0 Parity error NMI enabled 1 Parity error NMI disabled and cleared R W Functions not related to NMI activity After the active NMI has been processed status bits 7 or 6 are cleared by pulsing bits
248. ng the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 1 Introduction Table 1 1 Acronyms and Abbreviations Continued Acronym Abbreviation Description R W Read Write SCSI small computer system interface SDRAM Synchronous Dynamic RAM SEC Single Edge Connector SECAM sequential colour avec memoire sequential color with memory SF sign flag SGRAM Synchronous Graphics RAM SIMD Single instruction multiple data SIMM single in line memory module SIT system information table SMART Self Monitor Analysis Report Technology SMI system management interrupt SMM system management mode SMRAM system management RAM SPD serial presence detect SPDIF Sony Philips Digital Interface IEC 958 specification SPN Spare part number SPP standard parallel port SRAM static RAM SSE Streaming SIMD extensions STN super twist pneumatic SVGA super VGA SW software TAD telephone answering device TAFI Temperature sensing And Fan control Integrated circuit TAM telephone answering machine TCP tape carrier package TF trap flag TFT thin film transistor TIA Telecommunications Information Administration TPE twisted pair ethernet TPI track per inch TTL transistor transistor logic TV television TX transmit UART universal asynchronous receiver transmitter UDMA Ultra DMA URL Un
249. noperative 8601 05 Right mouse button is stuck closed 8602 I F test failed 8601 06 Left block not selected Compaq Personal Computers 11 Changed November 2000 Appendix Error Messages and Codes This page is intentionally blank 12 Compaq Personal Computers Changed November 2000 Technical Reference Guide Appendix B ASCII CHARACTER SET INTRODUCTION This appendix lists in Table B 1 the 256 character ASCII code set including the decimal and hexadecimal values All ASCII symbols may be called while in DOS or using standard text mode editors by using the combination keystroke of holding the Alt key and using the Numeric Keypad to enter the decimal value of the symbol The extended ASCII characters decimals 128 255 can only be called using the Alt Numeric Keypad keys NOTE Regarding keystrokes refer to notes at the end of the table Applications may interpret multiple keystroke accesses differently or ignore them completely Table B 1 ASCII Character Set Dec Hex gt Symbol Dec Hex Symbol Dec Hex Symbol Dec Hex Symbol 0 00 Blank 32 20 Space 64 40 96 60 1 01 33 21 65 41 97 61 2 02 e 34 22 7 66 42 98 62 b 3 03 v 35 23 67 43 99 63 4 04 36 24 68 44 D 100 64 d 5 05 37 25 96 69 45 E 101 65 e 6 06 38 26 amp 70 46 F 102 66 f 7 07 e 39 27 71 47 103 67 0 8 08 O 40 28 72 48 H 104 68 h 9 09 41 29 73 49 105 69 10 0 42 2
250. nt or incompatible Scroll Lock LED blinks 2 long 1 short beeps Hardware failure before graphics initialization Caps Lock LED blinks 1long 2short beeps Graphics controller not present or failed to initialize Num Caps Scroll Lock LEDs 1 long 3 short beeps failure blink Num Caps Scroll Lock LEDs none Network service mode blink in sequence NOTE 1 Provided with PS 2 keyboard only Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 7 5 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 7 BIOS ROM 7 4 SETUP UTILITY The Setup utility stored in ROM allows the user to configure system functions involving security power management and system resources The Setup utility is ROM based and invoked when the F10 key is pressed during the time the F10 prompt is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the screen during the POST routine Highlights of the Setup utility are described in the following table NOTE Support for Computer Setup options may vary depending on your specific hardware configuration Table 7 3 Setup Utility Functions Heading Option Description File System Information Lists Product name Processor type speed stepping Cache size L1 L2 Installed memory size and frequency System ROM includes family name and version System board revision Chassis serial number Asset tracking number Integrated MAC for embedded enabled NIC if applicable About Displays
251. nto the Off mode Wake up from Suspend mode is typically a few seconds Inactive Inactive Monitors high voltage section and heater circuitry is turned off Wake up from Off mode is a little longer than from Suspend H 4 Compaq Personal Computers Original November 2000 6 6 1 Technical Reference Guide CONNECTORS There are three connectors associated with the graphics subsystem two display monitor connectors and the Feature connector NOTE The graphic card s edge connector mates with the AGP slot connector on the system board This interface is described in chapter 4 of this guide MONITOR CONNECTOR The display monitor connector is provided for connection of a compatible RGB analog monitor Figure H 3 VGA Monitor Connector One of two female DB 15 as viewed from rear Table H 3 DB 15 Monitor Connector Pinout Pin Signal Description Signal Description 1 R Red Analog PWR 5 fused 1 2 G Blue Analog GND Ground 3 B Green Analog NC Not Connected 4 NC Not Connected SDA DDC2 B Data 5 GND Ground HSync Horizontal Sync 6 R GND Red Analog Ground VSync Vertical Sync 7 G GND Green Analog Ground SCL DDC2 B Clock 8 B GND Blue Analog Ground NOTES 1 Fuse automatically resets when excessive load is removed Compaq Personal Computers H 5 Original November 2000 Appendix Compaq Matrox Millennium G450 Graphics H 6 2 VIDEO FEATURE CONNECTOR
252. o modes of operation LPC DMA Mode Uses the LPC bus to communicate DMA channel control and is implemented for devices using DMA through the I O controller such as the diskette drive controller PC PCI DMA Mode Uses the REQ GNT signals to communicate DMA channel control and is used by PCI expansion devices Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 4 19 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 4 System Support 4 5 4 6 SYSTEM CLOCK DISTRIBUTION These systems use an Intel CK type clock generator and crystal for generating the clock signals required by the system board components Table 4 10 lists the system board clock signals and how they are distributed Table 4 10 Clock Generation and Distribution Frequncy Source Destination 400 MHz MCH Processor RIMM sockets 100 MHz CK MCH 66 MHz CK MCH ICH2 AGP slot 48 MHz CK ICH2 I O Cntlr 33 MHz CK Processor ICH2 PCI Slots 14 31818 MHz Crystal CK Certain clock outputs are turned off during reduced power modes to conserve energy Clock output control is handled through the SMBus interface by BIOS REAL TIME CLOCK AND CONFIGURATION MEMORY The Real time clock RTC and configuration memory also referred to as 8 functions are provided by the 82801 ICH component and is MC146818 compatible As shown in the following figure the 82801 ICH component provides 256 bytes of battery backed RAM
253. ode Active w o System is in network mode kybd 101 Option ROM Checksum Error A device s option ROM has failed is bad 102 system Board Failure Failed ESCD write A20 timer or DMA controller 150 Safe POST Active An option ROM failed to execute on a previous boot 162 System Options Not Set Invalid checksum RTC lost power or invalid configuration 163 Time amp Date Not Set Date and time information in CMOS is not valid 164 Memory Size Error Memory has been added or removed 201 Memory Error Memory test failed 213 Incompatible Memory Module BIOS detected installed DIMM s as being not compatible 216 Memory Size Exceeds Max Installed memory exceeds the maximum supported by the system 301 Keyboard Error Keyboard interface test failed improper connection or stuck key 303 Keyboard Controller Error Keyboard buffer failed empty 8042 failure or stuck key 304 Keyboard System Unit Error Keyboard controller failed self test 404 Parallel Port Address Conflict Current parallel port address is conflicting with another device 510 Slpash Image Corrupt Corrupted splash screen image Restore default image w ROMPAQ 601 Diskette Controller Error Diskette drive removed since previous boot 912 Computer Cover Removed Cover hood removal has been detected by the Smart Cover Since Last System Start Up Sensor 917 Expansion Riser Not Detected Expansion backplane board not seated properly 1720 SMART Hard Drive Detects SMART circuitry on an IDE drive has dete
254. of which can provide data transfers up to 150 KB s In the compatible mode CPU write data is simply presented on the eight data lines A CPU read of the parallel port yields the last data byte that was written The following steps define the standard procedure for communicating with a printing device 1 The system checks the Printer Status register If the Busy Paper Out or Printer Fault signals are indicated as being active the system either waits for a status change or generates an error message 2 The system sends a byte of data to the Printer Data register then pulses the printer STROBE signal through the Printer Control register for at least 500 ns 3 The system then monitors the Printer Status register for acknowledgment of the data byte before sending the next byte In extended mode a direction control bit CTR 37Ah bit lt 5 gt controls the latching of output data while allowing a CPU read to fetch data present on the data lines thereby providing bi directional parallel transfers to occur The SPP mode uses three registers for operation the Data register DTR the Status register STR and the Control register CTR Address decoding in SPP mode includes address lines AO and Al Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 5 11 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 5 Input Output Interfaces 5 5 2 5 5 3 ENHANCED PARALLEL PORT MODE In Enhanced Parallel P
255. oftware means external to the microprocessor 4 4 1 1 Maskable Interrupts The maskable interrupt is a hardware generated signal used by peripheral functions within the system to get the attention of the microprocessor Peripheral functions produce a unique INTA H PCI or 0 15 ISA signal that is routed to interrupt processing logic that asserts the interrupt INTR input to the microprocessor The microprocessor halts execution to determine the source of the interrupt and then services the peripheral as appropriate Figure 4 9 shows the routing of PCI and ISA interrupts Most IRQs are routed through the I O controller which contains a serializing function A serialized interrupt stream is applied to the 82801 ICH Controller 1 0 amp Interrupt Serial IRQ SM Functions IDE IRQ14 1 Hard Drives ES Interrupt 1 Processing APIC Bus Microprocessor PCI Peripherals Figure 4 9 Maskable Interrupt Processing Block Diagram The 82801 ICH2 component can be configured through the Setup utility to handle interrupts in one of two modes of operation 8259 mode APIC mode Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 4 15 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 4 System Support 8259 Mode In 8259 Mode interrupts IRQO IRQ15 are handled in the conventional AT system method using logic that is the equivalent of two 8259 interrupt controllers Table 4 7 lists th
256. on GPIO Function Direction GPIO Function Direction 10 Board rev 1 42 ICH SCI 11 Board 0 43 12 44 13 45 Hood Unlock NC 14 WOL NC 46 ICH SMI 15 System ID 4 1 60 PCI Slot Reset 16 Processor Fan sense 61 AGP Slot Reset 17 62 PWR Button In 20 Pri IDE 80 pin Cable Detect l 63 SLP 53 l 21 Sec IDE 80 pin Cable Detect l 64 SLP 55 l 22 NC 65 CPU Changed Removed O 23 System ID 2 1 66 PWR Button Out 24 BIOS fail for AOL 67 5 25 System ID 3 1 70 Remote 26 Processor Present 71 System ID 0 1 NC 27 72 System ID 1 1 NC 30 PS LED Color Grn 73 31 PS LED Blink 74 32 Thermal Trip 75 33 2 MB Media ID 76 34 FWH Write Protect 85 Pwr SEL 35 FWH Reset 86 53 3 3 36 Diskette Motor 37 Diskette Select B O NOTE NC Not connected not used 1 System ID 04 0 value for these systems 00111 Technical Reference Guide LPC47B357 I O Controller Miscellaneous Functions The desktop and minitower systems utilize the following specialized functions built into the LPC 47B357 Controller Power Hard drive LED control The I O controller provides color and blink control for the front panel LEDs used for indicating system events as listed below System Status Power LED HD LED S0 System on
257. ontroller receives the command from the system Execution phase The controller carries out the command Results phase Status and results data is read back from the controller to the system The Command phase consists of several bytes written in series from the CPU to the data register 3F5h 375h The first byte identifies the command and the remaining bytes define the parameters of the command The Main Status register 3F4h 374h provides data flow control for the diskette drive controller and must be polled between each byte transfer during the Command phase The Execution phase starts as soon as the last byte of the Command phase is received An Execution phase may involve the transfer of data to and from the diskette drive a mechnical control function of the drive or an operation that remains internal to the diskette drive controller Data transfers writes or reads with the diskette drive controller are by DMA using the DRQ2 and DACK2 signals for control The Results phase consists of the CPU reading a series of status bytes from the data register 3F5h 375h that indicate the results of the command Note that some commands do not have a Result phase in which case the Execution phase can be followed by a Command phase During periods of inactivity the diskette drive controller is in a non operation mode known as the Idle phase 5 4 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Proc
258. operations as supported by these systems refer to the AGP Interface Specification Rev 2 0 available at the following AGP forum web site http www agpforum org index htm The Accelerated Graphics Port AGP bus is specifically designed as an economical yet high performance interface for graphics adapters especially those designed for 3D operations The AGP interface is designed to give graphics adapters dedicated pipelined access to system memory for the purpose of off loading texturing z buffering and alpha blending used in 3D graphics operations By off loading a large portion of 3D data to system memory the AGP graphics adapter only requires enough memory for frame buffer display image refreshing BUS TRANSACTIONS The operation of the AGP bus is based on the 66 MHz PCI specification but includes additional mechanisms to increase bandwidth During the configuration phase the AGP bus acts in accordance with PCI protocol Once graphics data handling operation is initiated AGP defined protocols take effect The AGP graphics adapter acts generally as the AGP master but can also behave as a target during fast writes from the Key differences between the AGP interface and the PCI interface are as follows Address phase and associated data transfer phase are disconnected transactions Addressing and data transferring occur as contiguous actions on the PCI bus On the AGP bus a request for data and the transfer of
259. or the current operating systems and programming environments such as Windows 2000 Windows NT 4 0 Autodesk AutoCAD R14 and 2000 Kintex 3D Studio Max 2D GDI MS DirectDraw DX6 7 ActiveX DirectX Direct3D OpenGL 1 1 and 1 2 999999 PCI bus configuration data Vendor ID 10DEh Device ID 0150h G 5 POWER MANAGEMENT AND CONSUMPTION This controller provides monitor power control for monitors that conform to the VESA display power management signaling DPMS protocol This protocol defines different power consumption conditions and uses the HSYNC and VSYNC signals to select a monitor s power condition Table G 2 lists the monitor power conditions Table G 2 Monitor Power Management Conditions HSYNC VSYNC Power Mode Description Active Active On Monitor is completely powered up If activated the inactivity counter counts down during system inactivity and if allowed to tiemout generates an SMI to initiate the Suspend mode Active Inactive Suspend Monitors high voltage section is turned off and CRT heater filament voltage is reduced from 6 6 to 4 4 VDC The Off mode inactivity timer counts down from the preset value and if allowed to timeout another SMI is generated and serviced resulting in the monitor being placed into the Off mode Wake up from Suspend mode is typically a few seconds Inactive Inactive Off Monitor s high voltage section and heater circuitry is turned off Wake up from Off mode is a little longer tha
260. ormat 1 Time Mode 0 12 hour mode 1 24 hour mode 0 Automatic Daylight Savings Time Enable Disable 0 Disable 1 Enable Advance 1 hour on October 1 Sunday in April retreat 1 hour last Sunday in RTC Status Register C Byte 0Ch 6 If set indicates periodic interrupt flag If set indicates alarm interrupt If set indicates end of update interrupt 3 0 Reseved Reserved If set interrupt output signal active read only RTC Status Register D Byte 0Dh 7 RTC Power Status 0 RTC has lost power 1 RTC has not lost power 6 0 Reserved Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 4 23 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 4 System Support Configuration Byte 0Eh Diagnostic Status Default Value 00h This byte contains diagnostic status data Configuration Byte System Reset Code Default Value 00h This byte contains the system reset code Configuration Byte 10h Diskette Drive Type Primary Drive A Diskette Drive Type Secondary Drive B Diskette Drive Type Valid values for bits lt 7 4 gt and bits lt 3 0 gt 0000 Not installed 0001 360 KB drive 0010 1 2 MB drive 0011 720 KB drive 0100 1 44 MB 1 25 MB drive 0110 2 88 MB drive all other values reserved Configuration Byte 12h Hard Drive Type Primary Controller 1 Hard Drive
261. ort EPP mode increased data transfers are possible up to 2 MB s due to a hardware protocol that provides automatic address and strobe generation EPP revisions 1 7 and 1 9 are both supported For the parallel interface to be initialized for EPP mode a negotiation phase is entered to detect whether or not the connected peripheral is compatible with EPP mode If compatible then EPP mode can be used In EPP mode system timing is closely coupled to EPP timing A watchdog timer is used to prevent system lockup Five additional registers are available in EPP mode to handle 16 and 32 bit CPU accesses with the parallel interface Address decoding includes address lines A1 and A2 EXTENDED CAPABILITIES PORT MODE The Extended Capabilities Port ECP mode like EPP also uses a hardware protocol based design that supports transfers up to 2 MB s Automatic generation of addresses and strobes as well as Run Length Encoding RLE decompression is supported by ECP mode The ECP mode includes a bi directional FIFO buffer that can be accessed by the CPU using DMA or programmed I O For the parallel interface to be initialized for ECP mode a negotiation phase is entered to detect whether or not the connected peripheral is compatible with ECP mode If compatible then ECP mode can be used Ten control registers are available in ECP mode to handle transfer operations In accessing the control registers the base address is determined by address lines
262. processor component Refer to the applicable Maintenance and Service Guide for processor installation instructions CAUTION Attachment of the heat sink to processor is critical on these systems 3 4 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 3 3 Technical Reference Guide MEMORY SUBSYSTEM The 82850 MCH features Direct Rambus technology and supports two Rambus channels each channel supporting up to two Rambus DRAM modules RIMMs Direct Rambus technology provides a significant improvement in performance over DRAM SDRAM memory designs and allows the system memory to keep pace with increasing processor performance Rambus technology implements RDRAM devices accessed over a channel specifically designed for high speed operations As shown in Figure 3 3 the conventional DRAM based memory interface with a transfer rate of 66 100 or 133 MHz increases bandwidth by widening the data bus With the current top speed of 133 MHz a 64 bit SDRAM interface achieves a maximum transfer rate of 1 0 GB s SDRAM Memory RDRAM Memory Controller Controller SDRAM Interface 64 bit Path 8 bytes 133 MHz 1 0 GB s RDRAM Interface Dual Channel 32 bit Path 4 bytes 400 MHz 3 2 GB s see text Figure 3 3 SDRAM RDRAM Bandwidth Comparison Although a Rambus channel handles only two bytes per transfer data is clocked on both the rising and fa
263. provides a 2x performance boost over the Pentium III Additional Streaming SIMD extensions SSE2 In addition to the SSE support provided by previous Pentium processors the Pentium 4 processor includes an additional 144 MMX instructions further enhancing e Streaming video audio processing e Photo video editing Speech recognition 3D processing e Encryption processing Quad pumped Front Side Bus FSB The FSB uses a 100 MHz clock for qualifying the buses control signals However address information is transferred using a 200 MHz strobe while data is transferred with a 400 MHz strobe providing a maximum data transfer rate of 3 2 GB s This is a 3x boost over a Pentium with a 133 MHz FSB The 3 2 GB s peak transfer rate of the FSB balances the 3 2 GB s maximum transfer capability of the dual channel Direct Rambus system memory 3 2 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide Figure 3 1 illustrates the internal architecture of the Pentium 4 processor Pentium 4 Processor ALU Speed 2 8 GHz w Pentium 4 1 4 GHz 3 0 GHz w Pentium 4 1 5 GHz Core Speed 1 4 GHz w Pentium 4 1 4 GHz 1 5 GHz w Pentium 4 9 1 5 GHz Hl FSB Speed 400 MHz Data transfer rate Figure 3 2 Pentium 4 Processor Internal Architecture The Pentium 4 increases processing speed with higher clock speeds made possib
264. r sec drive 03F8 03FFh Serial Port COM1 0400 04D1h Interrupt Controller 0678 067Fh Parallel Port LPT2 0778 077Fh Parallel Port LPT1 07 07 Parallel Port LPT3 8 PCI Configuration Address dword access only OCF9h Reset Control Register OCFCh PCI Configuration Data byte word or dword access NOTE Assume unmarked gaps are unused reserved or used by functions that employ variable I O address mapping Some ranges may include reserved addresses Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 4 35 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 4 System Support 4 8 2 82801 ICH GENERAL PURPOSE FUNCTIONS The 82801 ICH2 component includes a number of single and multi purpose pins available as general purpose input output GPIO ports The GPIO ports are configured enabled disabled during POST by BIOS through the PCI configuration registers of the ICH s LPC I F Bridge 82801 function 0 The GPIO ports are controlled through 64 bytes of I O space that is mapped during POST Table 4 15 lists the utilization of the ICH s GPIO ports in the desktop and minitower systems Table 4 15 82801 ICH2 GPIO Register Utilization GPIO Port Function Direction PS LED 1 5 2 3 IRQF 4 IRQG 5 6 HD LED 7 NC 8 NC 12 TAFI ASIC Interrupt 13 SMI 18
265. rates the Break code a two byte sequence that consists of a Make code immediately preceded by FOh 1 Break code for OEh is OEh Mode 3 Mode 3 generates a different scan code set from Modes 1 and 2 Code translation must be disabled since translation for this mode cannot be done Compaq Personal Computers C 11 Changed July 2000 Appendix Keyboard Table C 2 Keyboard Scan Codes Key Make Break Codes Hex Pos Legend Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 1 Esc 01 81 76 0 76 08 2 1 05 05 07 3 F2 3C BC 06 F0 06 OF na 4 F3 3D BD 04 0 04 17 na 5 F4 3E BE 0 0 OC 1F na 6 F5 3F BF 03 F0 03 27 na 7 F6 40 CO OB FO 2F na 8 F7 41 C1 83 F0 83 37 na 9 F8 42 C2 OA FO 10 F9 43 C3 01 FO 01 47 na 11 F10 44 4 09 09 4 12 11 57 07 78 78 56 na 13 F12 58 D8 07 FO 07 5E na 14 Print 2A 37 E0 B7 AA EO 2A EO 7 FO 7C EO FO 12 57 na 0 37 E0 B7 1 2 E0 7C EO FO 7C 1 2 54 84 3 84 0 84 3 15 Scroll Lock 46 C6 7E FO 7E 5F na 16 Pause E1 1D 45 E1 9D C5 na E1 14 77 E1 FO 14 FO 77 na 62 na EO 46 3 EO 7E F0 7 3 17 29 A9 OE FO EO OE FO OE 18 1 02 82 16 0 16 46 F0 46 19 2 03 83 1E FO 1E 1E FO 1E 20 3 04 84 26 F0 26 26 F0 26 21 4 05 85 25 0 25 25 0 25 22 5 06 86 2E FO 2E 2E FO 2E
266. rd Allows user to set Asset tag 16 byte identifier and Ownership Tag 80 byte identifier displayed during POST Refer to the Desktop Management guide for more information Chassis serial number or Universal Unique Identifier UUID number If current number is invalid these ID numbers are normally set in the factory and are used to uniquely identify the System Keyboard locale setting 0 English or German for System ID entry Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Continued 7 9 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 7 BIOS ROM Table 7 3 Setup Utility Functions Continued Heading Option Description Power Energy Saver Allows user to set the energy saver mode advanced disable or minimal Note In the minimal energy saver mode setting the hard drive and system do not go into energy saver mode but the setting allows you to press the power button to suspend the system This option is not available under ACPI enabled operating systems Timeouts Allows user to disable or manually select timeout values for the system and or all attached IDE hard drives Note This option has no effect under ACPI enabled operating systems This selection will only appear when energy saver mode is set to advanced Energy Saver Options Allows user to set Power button configuration on off or sleep wake under APM enabled operating systems Power LED blink in suspend
267. rier lost limit 1201 15 Modem detection failure 1205 06 Time out waiting for dial tone 1201 16 Modem ROM checksum failure 1205 07 Dial number string too long 1201 17 Tone detect failure 1205 08 Modem time out waiting for remote response 1202 XX Modem internal test 1205 09 Modem exceeded maximum redial limit 1202 01 Time out waiting for SYNC 1 1205 10 Line quality prevented remote response 1202 02 Time out waiting for response 1 1205 11 Modem time out waiting for remote connection 1202 03 Data block retry limit reached 1 1206 XX Dial multi frequency tone test 1202 11 Time out waiting for SYNC 2 1206 17 Tone detection failure 1202 12 Time out waiting for response 2 1210 XX Modem direct connect test 1202 13 Data block retry limit reached 2 1210 01 Time out waiting for SYNC 6 1202 21 Time out waiting for SYNC 3 1210 02 Time out waiting for response 6 1202 22 Time out waiting for response 3 1210 03 Data block retry limit reached 6 1202 23 Data block retry limit reached 3 1210 04 exceeded carrier lost limit 1203 XX Modem external termination test 1210 05 TX exceeded carrier lost limit 1203 01 Modem external TIP RING failure 1210 06 Time out waiting for dial tone 1203 02 Modem external data TIP RING fail 1210 07 Dial number string too long 1203 03 Modem line termination failure 1210 08 Modem time out waiting for remote response 1204 XX Modem auto originate test 1210 09 Modem exceeded maximum redial limit 1204 01 Time out wait
268. rk server mode Note This selection will appear only if a power on password is set Specify whether password is required for warm boot CTRL ALT DEL Note This selection is available only when Network Server Mode is disabled See the Desktop Management Guide for more information Smart Cover Allows user to Enable disable the Smart Cover Lock Enable disable Smart Cover Sensor Notify User alerts the user that the sensor has detected that the cover has been removed Setup Password requires that the setup password be entered to boot the computer if the sensor detects that the cover has been removed Feature supported on select models only Refer to the Desktop Management Guide for more information Continued 7 8 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Table 7 3 Setup Utility Functions Continued Heading Option Security Master Boot Record Security continued Save Master Boot Record Restore Master Boot Record Device Security Network Service Boot System IDs Technical Reference Guide Description Allows user to enable or disable Master Boot Record MBR Security When enabled the BIOS rejects all requests to write to the MBR on the current bootable disk Each time the computer is powered on or rebooted the BIOS compares the MBR of the current bootable disk to the previously saved MBR If changes are detected you are gi
269. rom the SMBus PAS connector on the card to a corresponding SMBus connector on the system board may be required Compaq desktop system boards with AOL support inter connect the SMBus with the PCI bus and do not require a SMBus cable connection The AOL implementation requirements are as follows System unit featuring the 810 810e 820 or 850 or later chipset Intel 100 Management Adapter Driver 3 1 or later available from Compaq Client side utility agent software available from Compaq Management console running one of the following a HP OpenView Network Node Manager 6 x b Intel LANDesk Client Manager c Compaq Insight Manager eo Compaq Personal Computers K 3 Original December 2000 Appendix K Compaq PCI 10 100 Ethernet Adapter K 2 2 K 2 3 RSA FUNCTION This adapter provides support for systems using the Remote System Alert RSA method of generating alerts over the network The RSA method is similar to the AOL function described previously but does not use the PCI s SMBus for alert transactions The RSA method uses an AOL SOS connector is provided on the card for connection to a compliant system board through a 7 conductor cable assembly Up to six events may be detected by the adapter such as BIOS fail OS fail Intrusion Fan alert Power alert Heartbeat 99999 The RSA implementation requirements are as follows System unit featuring the 810 810e 820 or 850 or later chipset 7 cond
270. se modes Drivers are provided with or available for the card to provide extended mode support for the current operating systems and programming environments such as Windows 98 95 Windows NT 4 0 3 51 Windows 3 11 3 1 OS 2 Quick Draw MS Direct Draw and Direct X Direct 3D OpenGL 9999999 0 5 POWER MANAGEMENT AND CONSUMPTION This controller provides monitor power control for monitors that conform to the VESA display power management signaling DPMS protocol This protocol defines different power consumption conditions and uses the HSYNC and VSYNC signals to select a monitor s power condition Table I 2 lists the monitor power conditions Table D 2 Monitor Power Management Conditions HSYNC VSYNC Power Mode Description Active Active On Monitor is completely powered up If activated the inactivity counter counts down during system inactivity and if allowed to tiemout generates an SMI to initiate the Suspend mode Active Inactive Suspend Monitors high voltage section is turned off and CRT heater filament voltage is reduced from 6 6 to 4 4 VDC The Off mode inactivity timer counts down from the preset value and if allowed to timeout another SMI is generated and serviced resulting in the monitor being placed into the Off mode Wake up from Suspend mode is typically a few seconds Inactive Inactive Off Monitor s high voltage section and heater circuitry is turned off Wake up from Off mode is a little longer t
271. sferred to the keyboard except bytes that follow a multibyte command that was written to 64h Port 64h T O port 64h is used for reading the status register and for writing commands A read of 64h by the CPU will yield the status byte defined as follows Funcion 2 4 General Purpose Flags Bit CMD DATA Flag reflects the state of A2 during a CPU write 0 Data 1 Command 2 1 Input Buffer Full Set to 1 upon a CPU write Cleared by IN A DBB instruction Output Buffer Full if set Cleared by a CPU read of the buffer A CPU write to I O port 64h places a command value into the input buffer and sets the CMD DATA bit of the status register bit lt 3 gt to CMD Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 5 19 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 5 Input Output Interfaces Table 5 15 lists the commands that can be sent to the 8042 by the CPU The 8042 uses for gaining the attention of the CPU Value 20h Table 5 15 CPU Commands To The 8042 Command Description Put current command byte in port 60h 60h Load new command byte A4h Test password installed Tests whether or not a password is installed in the 8042 If FAh is returned password is installed If F1h is returned no password is installed A5h Load password This multi byte operation places a password in the 8042 using the following manner 1 Write A5h
272. significant bit LSb and bit 7 representing the most significant bit MSb of a byte Bytes words double words and quad words are typically shown with most significant portions on the left or top and the least significant portions on the right or bottom respectively 1 2 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 1 44 COMMON ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Table 1 1 lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in this guide Table 1 1 Acronyms and Abbreviations Acronym Abbreviation Description A ampere AC alternating current ACPI Advanced Configuration and Power Interface A D analog to digital AGP Accelerated graphics port API application programming interface APIC Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller APM advanced power management AOL Alert On LANTM ASIC application specific integrated circuit AT 1 attention modem commands 2 286 based PC architecture ATA AT attachment IDE protocol ATAPI AT attachment w packet interface extensions AVI audio video interleaved AVGA Advanced VGA AWG American Wire Gauge specification BAT Basic assurance test BCD binary coded decimal BIOS basic input output system bis second new revision BNC Bayonet Neill Concelman connector type bps or b s bi
273. ss algorithm specified by the PCI specification The bus parking policy allows for the current PCI bus owner excepting the PCI ISA bridge to maintain ownership of the bus as long as no request is asserted by another agent Note that most CPU to DRAM and AGP to DRAM accesses can occur concurrently with PCI traffic therefore reducing the need for the Host PCI bridge to compete for PCI bus ownership Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 4 2 3 4 2 4 4 2 5 4 2 6 4 2 6 1 Technical Reference Guide OPTION ROM MAPPING During POST the PCI bus is scanned for devices that contain their own specific firmware in ROM Such option ROM data if detected is loaded into system memory s DOS compatibility area refer to the system memory map shown in chapter 3 PCI INTERRUPTS Eight interrupt signals INTA thru INTH are available for use by PCI devices These signals may be generated by on board PCI devices or by devices installed in the PCI slots For more information on interrupts including PCI interrupt mapping refer to the System Resources section 4 4 PCI POWER MANAGEMENT SUPPORT This system complies with the PCI Power Management Interface Specification rev 1 0 The PCI Power Management Enable signal is supported by the chipset and allows compliant PCI and AGP peripherals to initiate the power management routine PCI SUB BU
274. st single bit 1Eh Reserved 37h 3Fh Power on password 1Fh Power management functions 40 FFh Feature Control Status NOTES Assume unmarked gaps are reserved 4 22 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide RTC Control Register Byte 0Ah Bit Function 7 Update in Progress Read only 0 Time update will not occur before 2444 us 1 Time update will occur within 2444 us 6 4 Divider Chain Control R W 00x Oscillator disabled 010 Normal operation time base frequency 32 768 KHz 11x Divider chain reset 3 0 Periodic Interrupt Control R W Specifies the periodic interrupt interval 0000 none 1000 3 90625 ms 0001 3 90625 ms 1001 7 8125 ms 0010 7 8125 ms 1010 15 625 ms 0011 122 070 us 1011 31 25 ms 0100 244 141 us 1100 62 50 ms 0101 488 281 us 1101 125 ms 0110 976 562 us 1110 250 ms 0111 1 953125 ms 1111 500 ms RTC Control Register B Byte 0Bh Bit Function 7 Time Update Enable disable 0 Normal operation 1 Disable time updating for time set 6 Periodic Interrupt Enable Disable 0 Disable 1 Enable interval specified by Register 5 Alarm Interrupt Enable disable 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 4 End of Update Interrupt Enable Disable 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 3 Reserved read 0 2 Time Date Format Select 0 BCD format 1 Binary f
275. systems refer to the applicable Maintenance And Service Guide and or Service Reference Guide CAUTION Voltages present within the system unit whenever the unit is plugged 2 3 1 CABINET LAYOUTS 2 3 4 1 Front Views Figure 2 2 shows the front cabinet layouts of the controls and indicators Deskpro EXS Deskpro Workstation 300 Item Description Power button Power LED Hard drive activity LED CD ROM drive headphone jack CD ROM drive volume control CD ROM drive activity LED CD ROM drive door open close button 1 44 MB diskette drive activity LED 1 44 MB diskette drive eject button 00 N gt 01 B Co Po Figure 2 2 Front Cabinet Views 2 4 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 2 3 1 2 Rear View Figure 2 3 shows the rear cabinet layout of the controls and connectors an e 2554 Description 1 AC line In Connector 115V 230V 2 Line voltage switch 3 Parallel I F connector 4 PS 2 keyboard connector 5 PS 2 mouse connector 6 7 8 9 Serial port A connector
276. t failed 504 01 Video character set test failed 511 01 Screen memory page test failed 505 01 80x25 mode 9x14 cell test failed 512 01 Gray scale test failed 506 01 80x25 mode 8x8 cell test failed 514 01 White screen test failed 507 01 40x25 mode test failed 516 01 Noise pattern test failed See Table A 14 for additional graphics messages Changed November 2000 A 5 Compaq Personal Computers Appendix Error Messages and Codes DISKETTE DRIVE ERROR MESSAGES 6xx xx Table A 8 Diskette Drive Error Messages Message Probable Cause Message Probable Cause 6xx 01 Exceeded maximum soft error limit 6xx 20 Failed to get drive type 6xx 02 Exceeded maximum hard error limit 6xx 21 Failed to get change line status 6xx 03 Previously exceeded max soft limit 6xx 22 Failed to clear change line status 6xx 04 Previously exceeded max hard limit 6xx 23 Failed to set drive type in ID media 6xx 05 Failed to reset controller 6xx 24 Failed to read diskette media 6xx 06 Fatal error while reading 6xx 25 Failed to verify diskette media 6 07 Fatal error while writing 6xx 26 Failed to read media in speed test 6xx 08 Failed compare of R W buffers 6xx 27 Failed speed limits 6xx 09 Failed to format a tract 6xx 28 Failed write protect test 6xx 10 Failed sector wrap test 600 Diskette drive ID test 609 xx Diskette drive reset controller test 601 xx Diskette drive format 610 xx Diskette drive change line t
277. t maximum performance Quiet will not be displayed if not supported by drive Reduces noise from the drive during operation When set to Quiet the drive will not operate at maximum performance Storage Options Removable Media Boot Enables disables ability to boot the system from removable media Note After saving changes to Removable Media Boot the computer will restart Turn the computer off then on manually Removable Media Write Enables disables ability to write data to removable media Note This feature applies only to legacy diskette IDE LS 120 Superdisk and IDE PD CD drives Primary IDE Controller Allows you to enable or disable the primary IDE controller Secondary IDE Controller Allows you to enable or disable the secondary IDE controller Diskette MBR Validation Allows you to enable or disable strict validation of the diskette Master Boot Record MBR Note If you use a bootable diskette image that you know to be valid and it does not boot with Diskette MBR Validation enabled you may need to disable this option in order to use the diskette Continued Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 7 7 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 7 BIOS ROM Table 7 3 Setup Utility Functions Continued Heading Option Description Storage DPS Self Test Allows user to execute self tests on IDE hard drives continued capable of performing the Drive
278. tatus Power LED Power LED 50 System on normal operation Steady green Steady green 51 Suspend Blinks green 1 Hz Blinks green 1 Hz 53 Suspend to RAM Blinks green 1 Hz Blinks green 1 Hz 54 Suspend to disk Blinks green 0 5 Hz Blinks green 0 5 Hz S5 Soft off Off clear Off clear Processor not seated Off clear Steady red CPU thermal shutdown Off clear Blinks red 4 Hz ROM error Off clear Blinks red 1 Hz Power supply crowbar activated Off clear Blinks red 5 Hz System off Off clear Off Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 4 33 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 4 System Support 4 7 44 TEMPERATURE SENSING AND COOLING These systems feature a fan integrated into the power supply assembly A separate chassis fan is also employed Both fans are variable speed type and typically operate in tandem as long as the power supply is active producing 12 VDC The fans are off in 53 Suspend to RAM and 55 Soft Off states NOTE These systems are designed to provide optimum cooling with the cover in place Operating a system with the cover removed may result in a thermal condition of system board components including the processor Figure 4 11 shows the fan control schematic Chassis Fan Header P8 CH Fan CMD 4 Processor 3 2 Ens
279. tem wake up functionality Power is provided by either the auxiliary 3 3 VDC power rail of the PCI bus when installed in systems compliant with PCI ver 2 2 or by auxiliary 5 VDC through the WOL connector NOTE Controlling a system unit s power through an AC outlet strip will with the strip turned off disable wake up functionality APM ENVIRONMENT The Advanced Power Management APM functionality of system wake up is implemented through the system s APM compliant BIOS and Magic Packet compliant hardware This environment is not dependent on operating system OS intervention allowing a unit plugged into a live AC outlet to be turned on remotely over the network 1 remote wake up even if the OS has not been installed In APM mode the controller will respond upon receiving a Magic Packet which is a packet where the node s address is repeated 16 times Upon Magic Packet reception the adapter asserts the PME signal on the PCI bus resulting in the system unit s power control logic turning on the system and initiating the boot sequence After the boot sequence the BIOS clears the PME signal so that subsequent wake up events will be detected ACPI ENVIRONMENT The Advanced Configuration and Power Interface ACPI functionality of system wake up is implemented through an ACPI compliant OS such as Windows NT 5 0 and is the default power management mode The following wake up events may be individually enabled disabled through
280. ter Card Block Diagram The AIC7892 controller supports dual mode low voltage differential LVD SCSI I O up to the Ultra160 data rate of 160 Mbytes Both single ended SE LVD devices can co exist on the SCSI bus although operation will default to the SE mode In SE mode transfer rates are limited to the speed of the slower device High voltage differential HVD devices are supported for rates up to Ultra speeds The AIC7892 also supports cyclic redundancy check CRC codes an improvement over parity checking used earlier L 2 Compaq Personal Computers Original December 2000 1 3 L 3 1 L 3 2 L 4 Technical Reference Guide SCSI ADAPTER PROGRAMMING SCSI ADAPTER CONFIGURATION The Adaptec SCSI Host Adapter Card is a PCI device and configured using PCI protocol and PCI Configuration Space registers PCI addresses O0h FFh as discussed in Chapter 4 of this guide Configuration is accomplished by BIOS during POST and re configurable with software The vender ID and device ID for the adapter are as follows Vender ID PCI config addr 00h 9005h Device ID PCI config addr 02h 0080h SCSI ADAPTER CONTROL Control of the SCSI host adapter is affected through I O mapped registers mapped as listed in Table L 1 Table L 1 Ultra SCSI Host Adapter Card Control Register Mapping Addr Function nOOh n1Fh SCSI Register Array n20h n5Fh Scratch RAM n60h n7Fh Phase Engine Sequencer n80h n9Fh Host Registers nOO
281. the 8042 to transfer the test bits 1 and 0 into bits lt 1 0 gt of the output buffer FOh FFh Pulse output port Controls the pulsing of bits lt 3 0 gt of the output port 0 pulse 1 don t pulse Note that pulsing bit 0 will reset the system 5 20 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 5 6 4 KEYBOARD POINTING DEVICE INTERFACE CONNECTOR The legacy light model provides separate PS 2 connectors for the keyboard and pointing device Both connectors are identical both physically and electrically Figure 5 6 and Table 5 16 show the connector and pinout of the keyboard pointing device interface connectors Figure 5 5 Keyboard or Pointing Device Interface Connector PS 2 female as viewed from rear of chassis Table 5 16 Keyboard Pointing Device Connector Pinout Description Description 1 DATA Data 4 5 VDC Power 2 NC Not Connected 5 CLK Clock 3 GND Ground 6 NC Not Connected Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 5 21 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 5 Interfaces 5 7 5 7 1 UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS INTERFACE The Universal Serial Bus USB interface provides asynchronous isochronous data transfers of up to 12 Mb s with compatible peripherals such as keyboards printers or modems This high speed interface
282. the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide The USB transmissions consist of packets using one of four types of formats Figure 5 8 that include two or more of seven field types Sync Field 8 bit field that starts every packet and is used by the receiver to align the incoming signal with the local clock Packet Identifier PID Field 8 bit field sent with every packet to identify the attributes in out start of frame SOF setup data acknowledge stall preamble and the degree of error correction to be applied Address Field 7 bit field that provides source information required in token packets Endpoint Field 4 bit field that provides destination information required in token packets Frame Field 11 bit field sent in Start of Frame SOF packets that are incremented by the host and sent only at the start of each frame Data Field 0 1023 byte field of data Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC Field 5 or 16 bit field used to check transmission integrity Sync Field PID Field Addr ENDP CRC Field Token Packet 8 bits 8 bits Field Field 5 bits Sync Field PID Field Frame Field CRC Field SOF Packet 8 bits 8 bits 11 bits 5 bits Sync Field PID Field Data Field CRC Field Data Packet 8 bits 8 bits 0 1023 bytes 16 bits Sync Field PID Field Handshake Packet 8 bits 8 bits F
283. the PME signal can be used to restart or wake the system from a suspend state NOTE For auxiliary power to be available in a system off condition the system unit must be plugged into a live AC outlet Controlling unit power through a switchable power strip will with the strip turned off disable PME functionality ALERT ON LAN SUPPORT Alert On LAN AOL support allows a compliant network interface controller NIC card to communicate the occurrence of certain events over a network even while the system unit is powered off In a system off powered down condition a NIC card receives auxiliary 3 3 VDC power derived from the 5 VDC auxiliary power from the power supply assembly Certain events will result in a compliant NIC card to transmit an appropriate pre constructed message over the network to a system management console Reportable AOL events are listed in the following table Table 5 24 AOL Events Event Description BIOS Failure System fails to boot successfully OS Problem System fails to load operating system after POST Missing Faulty Processor Processor fails to fetch first instruction Heartbeat Indication of system s network presence sent approximately every 30 seconds in normal operation Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 5 33 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 5 Input Output Interfaces As shown in the following figure support with an
284. the software driver supplied with the adapter Magic Packet Packet with node address repeated 16 times in data portion Individual address match Directed acket with matching user defined byte mask Multicast address match Directed packet with matching user defined sample frame address resolution protocol packet Flexible packet filtering Packets that match defined CRC signature query under IP 4 0 IPX Diagnostic packet VLAN When an enabled event is received controller asserts the signal that is used to initiate the wakeup sequence Compaq Personal Computers K 5 Original December 2000 Appendix K Compaq PCI 10 100 Ethernet Adapter K 4 4 1 5 In addition to PCI card edge connector NIC adapter includes four on board connectors RJ 45 network connector an AOL SOS connector a WOL connector and a SMBus connector NETWORK CONNECTOR Figure K 3 shows the RJ 45 connector used for the NIC interface This connector includes the two status LEDs as part of the connector assembly Speed LED Activity LED Description Transmit Transmit Receive Receive Figure K 3 Ethernet TPE Connector RJ 45 viewed from card edge 4 2 AOL SOS CONNECTOR Figure K 4 shows the AOL SOS connector This connector is used
285. transition to another power state should occur If going to Standby or Suspend it notifies all APM aware drivers requesting approval for the state change If all drivers approve the BIOS is not involved in this process each is instructed to go to that state then the BIOS is told to to that state versions of Windows later versions of OS 2 and Linux support APM The BIOS ROM for these systems support APM 1 2 The APM functions are initialized when the O S loads An INT 15h call is made to see if APM is supported by the BIOS and at what level 1 0 1 1 or 1 2 After that the O S gets a 32 bit address from the BIOS ROM so it can subsequently make 32 bit protected mode calls to access the different APM functions in the ROM Table 7 6 lists all the APM calls that the O S can make to the BIOS These functions are the major difference between PM and APM Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 7 19 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 7 BIOS ROM APM BIOS Function APM Installation Check Table 7 6 APM BIOS Functions Description Allows the O S to determine if the system s BIOS supports the APM functionality and if so which version of the specification it supports The APM version number returned from this call is the highest level of APM supported by the BIOS APM Real Mode Interface Connect Establishes the cooperative interface between the O S and the BIOS
286. trobe signals are used to latch each 4 byte transfer on the AD lines As shown in Figure 4 7 4 byte block DnA is latched by the falling edge of AD STBx while DnB is latched by the falling edge of STBx AD 4 va AD_STBx STO 2 Xxx N Figure 4 7 AGP 4X Data Transfer Peak Transfer Rate 1064 MB s 4 12 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 4 3 2 AGP CONFIGURATION Technical Reference Guide AGP bus operations require the configuration of certain parameters involving system memory access by the AGP graphics adapter The AGP bus interface is configured as a PCI device integrated within the north bridge MCH device 1 component The AGP function is from the PCI bus perspective treated essentially as a PCI PCI bridge and configured through PCI configuration registers Table 4 6 Configuration is accomplished by BIOS during POST Table 4 5 PCI AGP Bridge Function Configuration Registers MCH Function 1 NOTE Configuration of the AGP bus interface involves functions 0 and 1 of the Function 0 registers listed in Table 3 4 include functions that affect basic control GART of the AGP Config Reset Config Reset Addr Register Value Addr Register Value 00 01h Vendor ID 8086h 1
287. ts movement of the cursor When pressed and released again the LED is turned off and the function is removed This keystroke is always serviced by the BIOS as indicated by the LED but may be inhibited or ignored by the application Pause The Pause pos 16 key when pressed can be used to cause the keyboard interrupt to loop i e wait for another key to be pressed This can be used to momentarily suspend an operation The key that is pressed to resume operation is discarded This function may be ignored by the application The Esc Fn function Insert Home Page Up Down Delete and End keys operate at the discretion of the application software C 8 Compaq Personal Computers Changed July 2000 Technical Reference Guide C 2 4 2 Multi Keystroke Functions Shift The Shift key pos 75 86 when held down produces a shift state upper case for keys in positions 17 29 30 39 51 60 70 and 76 85 as long as the Caps Lock key pos 59 is toggled off If the Caps Lock key is toggled on then a held Shift key produces the lower normal case for the identified pressed keys The Shift key also reverses the Num Lock state of key positions 55 57 72 74 88 90 100 and 101 Ctrl The Ctrl keys pos 92 96 can be used in conjunction with keys in positions 1 13 16 17 34 39 54 60 71 and 76 84 The application determines the actual function Both Ctrl key positions provide identical functionality The pressed combination of Ctr
288. ts per second BSP Bootstrap processor BTO Built to order CAS column address strobe CD compact disk CD ROM compact disk read only memory CDS compact disk system CGA color graphics adapter Ch Channel chapter cm centimeter CMC cache memory controller CMOS complimentary metal oxide semiconductor configuration memory Cntlr controller control codec compressor decompressor CPQ Compaq CPU central processing unit CRIMM Continuity blank RIMM CRT cathode ray tube CSM Compaq system management Compaq server management DAC digital to analog converter DC direct current DCH DOS compatibility hole DDC Display Data Channel DF direction flag Continued Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 1 3 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 1 Introduction Table 1 1 Acronyms and Abbreviations Continued Acronym Abbreviation Description DIMM dual inline memory module DIN Deutche IndustriNorm connector standard DIP dual inline package DMA direct memory access DMI Desktop management interface dpi dots per inch DRAM dynamic random access memory DRQ data request EDID extended display identification data EDO extended data out RAM type EEPROM electrically eraseable PROM EGA enhanced graphics adapter EIA Electronic
289. uctor AOL SOS cable assembly 3Com EtherDisk Driver 5 x or later available from Compaq Client side utility software included with driver Server side utility software available from Compaq Management console running one of the following a HP OpenView Network Node Manager 6 x b Intel LANDesk Client Manager E WAKE UP FUNCTIONS The adapter provides two types of wake up signaling the PME signal and the WOL signal The adapter provides PME signal support for systems compliant with PCI ver 2 2 The detection of any wake event results in the adapter s assertion of the PME signal which can be used by the system unit to initiate the power up sequence System software is responsible for the clearing the PME signal The adapter also includes a WOL interface for systems supporting that method of wake up The adapter asserts the WOL signal for 50 milliseconds upon detection of a Magic Packet The WOL signal is routed to the system unit through a three conductor cable connection for initializing a power up sequence K 4 Compaq Personal Computers Original December 2000 1 K 3 2 Technical Reference Guide POWER MANAGEMENT SUPPORT These adapters support APM and ACPI power management environments as well as the Wired for Management WfM and Wake On LAN WOL standards The adapter is designed to be powered up as long as the system unit is plugged into a live AC outlet to provide sys
290. ugged into a live AC outlet but not turned on When off and system is plugged into a live AC outlet indicates PS On is asserted system turned on Power button pressed 22 Momentarily illuminates when the power button is pressed 3 3V aux 25 When illuminated indicates system is plugged into a live AC outlet Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers 6 3 Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Chapter 6 Power and Signal Distribution 6 2 2 3 Power LED Indications A dual color LED located on the front panel bezel is used to indicate system power status The front panel bezel power LED provides a visual indication of key system conditions listed as follows Power LED Condition Steady green Normal full on operation Blinks green 1 Hz Suspend state S1 Blinks green 2 Hz Sleep Suspend to RAM state S3 Blinks green 4 Hz Sleep Suspend to disk state S4 Steady red Processor not seated Blinks red 0 5 Hz Power supply crowbar activated Blinks red 1 Hz BIOS ROM error Blinks red 4 Hz Thermal condition processor has overheated and shut down 6 2 2 4 Wake Up Events The PS On signal can be activated with a power wake up of the system due to the occurrence of a magic packet serial port ring or PCI power management PME event These events can be individually enabled through the Setup utility to wake up the system from a sleep
291. ull duplex 20 MB s 100BASE TX half duplex 100 MB s 100Base TX full duplex 200 MB s Encryption Standards 82550 only DES 3DES HMAC SHA 1 MD5 Standards Compliance IEEE VLAN 802 1A IEEE 802 2 IEEE 802 3 amp 802 3u IEEE Intel priority packet 801 1p OS Driver Support MS Windows 95 98 and 2000 beta MS Windows NT 3 51 amp 4 0 Novell Netware 3 11 3 12 amp 4 1x 5 Server Sunsoft Solaris SCO UnixWare Open Desktop OpenServer Boot ROM Support Intel 100 Boot Agent PXE 2 0 RPL F12 BIOS Support Yes Bus Inteface PCI 2 2 Power Management Support APM ACPI PCI Power Management Spec Power Comsumption 0 750 mW max Compaq Personal Computers I 7 Original December 2000 Appendix Compag Intel Network Interface Controller Adapters This page is intentionally blank L8 Compaq Personal Computers Original December 2000 Technical Reference Guide Appendix J COMPAQ NVIDIA QUADRO2 MXR AGP GRAPHICS CARD J 1 INTRODUCTION This appendix describes the Compaq NVIDIA Quadro2 MXR AGP Graphics Card used in the standard configuration on some models and also available as an option This card layout shown in the following figure installs in a system s AGP slot The Compaq N VIDIA Quadro2 MXR graphics card SP 221412 001 provides high 2D performance as well as entry level 3D capabilities Feature
292. unctionality of the 82559 plus IP security IPSEC support through a hardware accelerator engine Compaq Personal Computers Original December 2000 1 2 1 1 2 2 Technical Reference Guide AOL FUNCTION The adapter s Alert On LAN AOL function provides a AOL compliant system unit with the ability to communicate system status to a management console even while the system is powered down When installed in an AOL compliant system the adapter receives alert messages from the system s I O Controller Hub ICH over the PCI bus Each alert message decoded by the adapter results in a pre constructed status message being transmitted over the network to a management console Alert On LAN functionality occurs independent of software driver or even processor intervention The adapter can report following conditions System tampering Removal of the chassis cover BIOS failure System fails to boot successfully OS problem System fails to load operating system after boot Missing faulty processor Processor fails to fetch first instruction Thermal condition High temperature detected in system Heartbeat Indication of system s presence on the network sent approximately every 30 seconds 99999 NOTE The system unit must be plugged into a live AC outlet for the AOL function to be operative Controlling a system unit s power through an AC outlet strip will when the strip is turned off disable AOL functionality
293. upport independent PM support APM support and ACPI support INDEPENDENT PM SUPPORT The BIOS can provide power management PM of the system independently from an operating system that doesn t support APM including DOS Unix NT amp older versions of OS 2 In the Independent PM environment the BIOS and hardware timers determine when to switch the system to a different power state State switching is not reported to the OS 7 7 1 1 Staying Awake In Independent PM There are two Time out to Standy timers used in independent PM the System Timer and the IDE Hard Drive Timer System Timer In POST the BIOS enables a timer in the ICH that generates an SMI once per minute When the BIOS detects the SMI it checks status bits in the ICH for device activity If any of the device activity status bits are set at the time of the 1 minute SMI BIOS resets the time out minute countdown The system timer can be configured through the Setup utility for counting down 0 5 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 120 180 or 240 minutes The following devices are checked for activity Keyboard Mouse Serial port s Parallel port IDE primary controller 9999 NOTE The secondary controller is NOT included This is done to support auto sense of a CD ROM insertion auto run in case Windows or NT is running Note also that SCSI drive management is the responsibility of the SCSI driver Any IDE hard drive access resets the hard drive timer IDE Har
294. utput 5 1 00 A 24 0 A 24 0 A 50 mV 5 VDC Output 596 1 00 A 11 0 A 11 0 A 50 mV 3 AUX Output 5 0 00 A 2 20 A 2 20 A 50 mV 5 AUX Output 496 0 0 A 1 70 A 1 70 A 50 mV 12 VDC Output 5 0 00 A 5 00 A 8 0 A 120 mV 12 8 VDC Output Vcpu 5 0 00 A 7 50 A 10 5 200 12 Output 10 0 00 A 0 15A 0 15A 200 mV NOTES 1 Minimum loading requirements must be met at all times to ensure normal operation and specification compliance 2 Surge duration no longer than 10 seconds and 12 tolerance 1096 6 2 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 6 2 2 POWER CONTROL Technical Reference Guide The power supply assembly is controlled digitally by the PS On signal Figure 7 1 When PS On is asserted the Power Supply Assembly is activated and all voltage outputs are produced When PS On is de asserted the Power Supply Assembly is off and all voltages except 3 3 AUX and 5 AUX are not generated Note that the 3 3 AUX and 5 AUX voltages are always produced as long as the system is connected to a live AC source 6 2 2 1 Power Button The PS On signal is typically controlled through the Power Button which when pressed and released applies a negative grounding pulse to the power control logic The resultant action of pressing the power button depends on the state and mode of the system at that time and is d
295. ven the option of saving the MBR on the current bootable disk restoring the previously saved MBR or disabling MBR Security You must know the setup password if one is set Note Disable MBR Security before intentionally changing the formatting or partitioning of the current bootable disk Several disk utilities such as FDISK and FORMAT attempt to update the MBR If MBR Security is enabled and disk accesses are being serviced by the BIOS write requests to the MBR are rejected causing the utilities to report errors If MBR Security is enabled and disk accesses are being serviced by the operating System any MBR change will be detected by the BIOS during the next reboot and an MBR Security warning message will be displayed Saves a backup copy of the Master Boot Record of the current bootable disk Note Only appears if MBR Security is enabled Restores the backup Master Boot Record to the current bootable disk Note Only appears if all of the following conditions are true MBR Security is enabled A backup copy of the MBR has been previously saved The current bootable disk is the same disk from which the backup copy of the MBR was saved Enables disables serial parallel and USB ports and audio security Enables disables the computer s ability to boot from an operating system installed on a network server Feature available on NIC models only the network controller must reside on the PCI bus or be embedded on the system boa
296. vided AX E813h BH 00h retrieves the EDID information while AX E813h BX 01h determines the level of DDC support Input AX E813h BH 00 Get EDID BH 01 Get support level If BH 00 then DS E SI Pointer to a buffer 128 bytes where ROM will return block If 32 bit protected mode then DS E SI Pointer to DDC location Output Successful If BH 0 DS SI Buffer with EDID file CX Number of bytes written CF 0 00h Completion of command If BH System support lt 0 gt 1 DDC1 support lt 1 gt 1 DDC2 support BL Monitor DDC support lt 0 gt 1 DDC1 support lt 1 gt 1 DDC2 support lt 2 gt 1 Screen blanked during transfer Failure CF 1 AH 86h or 87h TEMPERATURE STATUS The BIOS includes a function INT15 AX E8 16h to retrieve the status of a system s interior temperature This function allows an application to check whether the temperature situation is at a Normal Caution or Critical condition 7 14 Compaq Deskpro EXS and Workstation 300 Personal Computers Featuring the Intel Pentium 4 Processor First Edition December 2000 Technical Reference Guide 7 5 4 DRIVE FAULT PREDICTION 7 6 The Compaq BIOS directly supports Drive Fault Prediction for IDE type hard drives This feature is provided through two Client Management BIOS calls Function INT 15 AX E817h is used to retrieve a 512 byte block of drive attribute data while the INT 15 AX E81Bh is used to retrieve the
297. x 600 16 65K 120 62 7 MB 800 x 600 32 16 7M 120 59 9 MB 1024 x 768 8 256 120 62 4 MB 1024 x 768 16 65K 120 60 9 MB 1024 x 768 32 16 7M 120 56 2 MB 1152 x 864 8 256 100 61 6 MB 1152 x 864 16 65K 100 59 7 MB 1152 x 864 32 16 7M 100 53 8 MB 1280 x 1024 8 256 100 60 4 MB 1280 x 1024 16 65K 100 57 9 MB 1280 x 1024 32 16 7M 100 50 2 MB 1536 x 960 8 256 100 59 8 MB 1536 x 960 16 65K 100 56 9 MB 1536 x 960 32 16 7M 100 48 3 MB 1600 x 1000 8 256 85 59 3 MB 1600 x 1000 16 65K 85 56 2 MB 1600 x 1000 32 16 7M 85 46 8 MB 1600 x 1200 8 256 85 58 0 MB 1600 x 1200 16 65K 85 54 3 MB 1600 x 1200 32 16 7M 75 43 0 MB 1600 x 1280 8 256 85 57 3 MB 1600 x 1280 16 65K 85 53 5 MB 1600 x 1280 32 16 7M 75 41 5 MB 1792 x 1120 8 256 85 57 7 MB 1792 x 1120 16 65K 85 53 8 MB 1792 x 1120 32 16 7M 75 42 0 MB 1920 x 1080 8 256 85 57 4 MB 1920 x 1080 16 65K 85 53 4 MB 1920 x 1080 32 16 7M 75 41 2 MB 1920 x 1200 8 256 85 56 5 MB 1920 x 1200 16 65K 75 52 0 MB 1920 x 1200 32 16 7M 75 38 5 MB NOTE 1 Value reflects hardware capabilities only May be restricted by operating system Compaq Personal Computers G 3 Original November 2000 Appendix Compaq ELSA GLoria Graphics Card 5 4 SOFTWARE SUPPORT INFORMATION The ELSA GLoria II graphics card is fully compatible with software written for legacy video modes VGA EGA CGA and needs no driver support for those modes Drivers are provided with or available for the card to provide extended mode support f
298. xx Hard drive ready test 1772 xx Sec IDE controller address conflict 1707 xx Hard drive recalibrate test 1780 xx Disk 0 failure 1708 xx Hard drive format bad track test 1781 xx Disk 1 failure 1709 xx Hard drive reset controller test 1782 xx Pri IDE controller failure 1710 xx Hard drive park head test 1790 xx Disk 0 failure 1714 xx Hard drive file write test 1791 xx Disk 1 failure 1715 xx Hard drive head select test 1792 xx Se controller failure 1716 xx Hard drive conditional format test 1793 xx Sec Controller or disk failure 1717 xx Hard drive ECC test 1799 xx Invalid hard drive type A 8 Compaq Personal Computers Changed November 2000 Technical Reference Guide 14 HARD DRIVE ERROR MESSAGES 19 Table A 13 Hard Drive Error Messages Message Probable Cause Message Probable Cause 19xx 01 Drive not installed 19xx 21 Got servo pulses second time but not first 19 02 Cartridge not installed 19 22 Never got to EOT after servo check 19 03 Tape motion error 19xx 23 Change line unset 19xx 04 Drive busy erro 19xx 24 Write protect error 19xx 05 Track seek error 19 25 Unable to erase cartridge 19xx 06 Tape write protect error 19xx 26 Cannot identify drive 19 07 Tape already Servo Written 19 27 Drive not compatible with controller 19 08 Unable to Servo Write 19 28 Format gap error 19xx 09 Unable to format 19xx 30 Except
299. y become corrupted requiring a re flashing of the ROM refer to chapter 8 BIOS ROM 4 6 3 STANDARD CMOS LOCATIONS Table 4 14 and the following paragraphs describe standard configuration memory locations OAh 3Fh These locations are accessible using OUT IN assembly language instructions using port 70 71 or BIOS function INT15 AX E823h Table 4 11 Configuration Memory CMOS Map Location Function Location Function 00 0Dh Real time clock 24h System board ID Diagnostic status 25h System architecture data System reset code 26h Auxiliary peripheral configuration 10h Diskette drive type 27h Speed control external drive 11h Reserved 28h Expanded base mem size IRQ12 12h Hard drive type 29h Miscellaneous configuration 13h Security functions 2Ah Hard drive timeout 14h Equipment installed 2Bh System inactivity timeout 15h Base memory size low byte KB 2Ch Monitor timeout Num Lock 16h Base memory size high byte KB 2Dh Additional flags 17h Extended memory low byte KB 2Eh 2Fh Checksum of locations 10h 2Dh 18h Extended memory high byte KB 30h 31h Total extended memory tested 19h Hard drive 1 primary controller 32h Century 1Ah Hard drive 2 primary controller 33h Miscellaneous flags set by BIOS 1Bh Hard drive 1 secondary controller 34h International language 1Ch Hard drive 2 secondary controller 35h APM status flags 1Dh Enhanced hard drive support 36h ECC POST te
300. y eight SBA lines as opposed to the 32 AD lines sideband addressing maximizes efficiency and throughput by allowing the AD lines to be exclusively used for data transfers Sideband addressing occurs at the same rate 1X 2X or 4X as data transfers The differences in rates will be discussed in the next section describing data transfers Note also that sideband addressing is limited to 48 bits address bits 48 63 are assumed zero The MCH component supports both SBA and AD addressing but the method and rate is selected by the AGP graphics adapter 4 3 1 2 Data Transfers Data transfers use the AD lines and occur as the result of data requests described previously Each transaction resulting from a request involves at least eight bytes requiring the 32 AD lines to handle at least two transfers per request The 82850 MCH supports three transfer rates 1X 2X and 4X Regardless of the rate used the speed of the bus clock is constant at 66 MHz The following subsections describe how the use of additional strobe signals makes possible higher transfer rates NOTE These systems support only 1 5 volt signaling on the AGP bus AGP 1X Transfers During a AGP 1X transfer the 66 MHz CLK signal is used to qualify the control and data signals Each 4 byte data transfer is synchronous with one CLK cycle so it takes two CLK cycles for a minimum 8 byte transfer Figure 4 5 shows two 8 byte transfers The GNT and TRDY signals retain their traditional PC
301. yboard Acknowledge ACK FAh Issued by the keyboard as a response to valid system inputs except the Echo and Resend commands Resend FEh Issued by the keyboard following an invalid input Keyboard ID 83ABh Upon receipt of the Read ID command from the system the keyboard issues the ACK command followed by the two IDS bytes Note 1 Modes 2 and 3 2 Mode 1 only SCAN CODES The scan codes generated by the keyboard processor are determined by the mode the keyboard is operating in Mode 1 In Mode 1 operation keyboard generates scan codes compatible with 8088 8086 based systems To enter Mode 1 the scan code translation function of the keyboard controller must be disabled Since translation is not performed the scan codes generated in Mode 1 are identical to the codes required by BIOS Mode 1 is initiated by sending command FOh with the O1h option byte Applications can obtain system codes and status information by using BIOS function INT 16h with AH 00h 01 and 02h Mode 2 Mode 2 is the default mode for keyboard operation In this mode the 8042 logic translates the make codes from the keyboard processor into the codes required by the BIOS This mode was made necessary with the development of the Enhanced III keyboard which includes additional functions over earlier standard keyboards Applications should use BIOS function INT 16h with AH 10h 11h and 12h for obtaining codes and status data In Mode 2 the keyboard gene

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

Manuel d`utilisation des Services en ligne pour conseillères et  Nokia N-Gage QD  Poulan P3314 User's Manual    CCI.Tecu - Competence Center ISOBUS  Philips Aleron Series 2-1 User's Manual    Télécharger - Mairie Hersin  夏が来たノ  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file